Manual Do Produto 980

OptiX RTN 980L Radio Transmission System
V100R007C10
Hardware Description
Issue 01
Date 2014-12-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Hardware Description About This Document
About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX RTN 980L V100R007C10
iManager U2000 V200R014C60
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineer

l Hardware installation engineer
l Installation and commissioning engineer
l Field maintenance engineer
l Data configuration engineer
l System maintenance engineer
Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following:
l Basics of digital microwave communication

l Basics of the OptiX RTN 980L
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

Symbol Description
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation

which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation

which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.

which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury.

which, if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not
related to personal injury.
Calls attention to important information, best

practices and tips.
NOTE is used to address information not
related to personal injury, equipment damage,
and environment deterioration.
General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic Book titles are in italics.
Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in

Courier New.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change History
Updates are as follows.
Updates in Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Based on Product Version V100R007C10

This document is the first issue for V100R007C10.
Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

Hardware Description Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Network Application......................................................................................................................................................2
1.2 Components....................................................................................................................................................................2
2 IDU 980L..........................................................................................................................................7
2.1 Chassis............................................................................................................................................................................9
2.1.1 Chassis Structure.........................................................................................................................................................9
2.1.2 Installation Mode.........................................................................................................................................................9
2.1.3 Air Flow.....................................................................................................................................................................10
2.1.4 IDU Labels................................................................................................................................................................10
2.2 Board List.....................................................................................................................................................................14
2.3 Board Appearance........................................................................................................................................................20
2.3.1 Photos of System Control, Switching, and Timing Boards.......................................................................................24
2.3.2 Photos of IF Boards...................................................................................................................................................24
2.3.3 Photos of Service Boards...........................................................................................................................................25
2.3.4 Photos of RFU and Branching Unit...........................................................................................................................26
2.4 Function Differences Between Boards of the Same Type............................................................................................28
2.4.1 Differences Between General-Purpose IF Boards.....................................................................................................28
2.4.2 Differences Between Packet Ethernet Boards...........................................................................................................29
2.5 Quick Reference...........................................................................................................................................................30
2.5.1 Board Loopback Types..............................................................................................................................................30
2.5.2 Indicators of Boards...................................................................................................................................................32
2.5.3 Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board.......................................................................................................49
2.6 CSHL............................................................................................................................................................................50
2.6.1 Version Description...................................................................................................................................................50
2.6.2 Application................................................................................................................................................................50
2.6.3 Functions and Features..............................................................................................................................................51
2.6.4 Working Principle......................................................................................................................................................60
2.6.5 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................63
2.6.6 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................................74
2.6.7 Types of SFP Modules..............................................................................................................................................76
2.6.8 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................77
Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

2.7 ISM6.............................................................................................................................................................................83
2.7.1 Version Description...................................................................................................................................................84
2.7.2 Application................................................................................................................................................................84
2.7.3 Functions and Features..............................................................................................................................................85
2.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..........................................................................................................................90
2.7.5 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................94
2.7.6 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................................96
2.7.7 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................98
2.7.7.1 Microwave Working Modes(short haul)................................................................................................................98
2.7.7.2 Receiver Sensitivity (Short Haul)...........................................................................................................................99
2.7.7.3 IF Performance.......................................................................................................................................................99
2.7.7.4 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem....................................................................................100
2.7.7.5 Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption...................................................................................................100
2.8 ISV3............................................................................................................................................................................100
2.8.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................................101
2.8.2 Application..............................................................................................................................................................101
2.8.3 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................104
2.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................................110
2.8.5 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................115
2.8.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................................117
2.8.7 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................................119
2.8.7.1 Microwave Work Modes (Long Haul).................................................................................................................120
2.8.7.2 Receiver Sensitivity (Long Haul).........................................................................................................................123
2.8.7.3 Microwave Working Modes(short haul)..............................................................................................................125
2.8.7.4 Receiver Sensitivity (Short Haul).........................................................................................................................134
2.8.7.5 IF Performance.....................................................................................................................................................148
2.8.7.7 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................................................149
2.9 ISU2............................................................................................................................................................................150
2.9.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................................150
2.9.2 Application..............................................................................................................................................................150
2.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................................155
2.9.5 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................159
2.9.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................................161
2.9.7.1 Microwave Work Modes and Air Interface Capacity...........................................................................................164
2.9.7.2 Receiver Sensitivity..............................................................................................................................................167
2.9.7.3 IF Performance.....................................................................................................................................................173
2.9.7.5 Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption...................................................................................................173
Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

2.10 ISX2..........................................................................................................................................................................174
2.10.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................174
2.10.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................174
2.10.3 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................176
2.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................................179
2.10.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................183
2.10.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................186
2.10.7 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................................187
2.10.7.1 Microwave Work Modes and Air Interface Capacity.........................................................................................188
2.10.7.2 Receiver Sensitivity............................................................................................................................................193
2.10.7.3 IF Performance...................................................................................................................................................203
2.10.7.4 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem..................................................................................203
2.10.7.5 Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption.................................................................................................204
2.11 EM6T/EM6F............................................................................................................................................................204
2.11.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................204
2.11.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................213
2.11.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................218
2.11.7 Types of SFP Modules..........................................................................................................................................220
2.12 EG4...........................................................................................................................................................................225
2.12.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................226
2.12.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................234
2.12.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................238
2.13 EX1...........................................................................................................................................................................245
2.13.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................245
2.13.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................252
2.13.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................254
2.13.7 Types of XFP Modules..........................................................................................................................................255
2.14 EMS6........................................................................................................................................................................257
Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii


2.14.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................258
2.14.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................266
2.14.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................271
2.15 EFP8.........................................................................................................................................................................275
2.15.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................275
2.15.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................283
2.15.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................286
2.16 SL1DA......................................................................................................................................................................288
2.16.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................289
2.16.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................295
2.16.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................297
2.16.7 Board Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................298
2.17 ML1/MD1.................................................................................................................................................................300
2.17.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................300
2.17.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................307
2.17.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................310
2.18 CQ1...........................................................................................................................................................................313
2.18.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................313
2.18.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................320
2.18.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................322
Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii


2.19 SP3S/SP3D...............................................................................................................................................................327
2.19.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................327
2.19.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................331
2.19.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................336
2.20 AUX..........................................................................................................................................................................338
2.20.3 Working Principle..................................................................................................................................................339
2.20.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................340
2.20.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................344
2.21 PIU............................................................................................................................................................................347
2.21.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................349
2.21.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................350
2.22 FAN..........................................................................................................................................................................351
2.22.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................354
2.22.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................355
3 RFU...............................................................................................................................................357
3.1 Appearance.................................................................................................................................................................358
3.2 Functions and Features...............................................................................................................................................359
3.3 Working Principles.....................................................................................................................................................359
3.4 Installation Mode........................................................................................................................................................361
3.5 Ports............................................................................................................................................................................361
3.6 Labels..........................................................................................................................................................................363
3.7 Technical Specifications.............................................................................................................................................365
4 Branching Unit...........................................................................................................................369
Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

4.1 Appearance.................................................................................................................................................................370
4.2 Functions and Features...............................................................................................................................................371
4.3 Working Principles.....................................................................................................................................................372
4.4 Installation Mode........................................................................................................................................................373
4.5 Ports............................................................................................................................................................................375
4.6 Labels..........................................................................................................................................................................376
5 Antennas......................................................................................................................................381
5.1 Device Type................................................................................................................................................................382
5.2 Functions....................................................................................................................................................................383
5.3 Working Principle.......................................................................................................................................................384
5.4 Interfaces....................................................................................................................................................................385
5.5 Antenna Diameters.....................................................................................................................................................386
6 Waveguide..................................................................................................................................388
6.1 Elliptical Waveguide..................................................................................................................................................389
6.2 Flexible Waveguide....................................................................................................................................................390
7 Accessories..................................................................................................................................393
7.1 E1 Panel......................................................................................................................................................................394
7.2 PDU............................................................................................................................................................................396
7.2.1 Appearance..............................................................................................................................................................396
7.2.2 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................397
7.2.3 Functions and Working Principles..........................................................................................................................398
7.3 AC Power Box............................................................................................................................................................399
7.3.2 Working Principle....................................................................................................................................................400
7.3.3 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................401
7.3.5 Power Cable.............................................................................................................................................................405
7.4 USB Flash Drives.......................................................................................................................................................408
8 Cables...........................................................................................................................................411
8.1 Power Cable................................................................................................................................................................413
8.2 PGND Cable...............................................................................................................................................................414
8.2.1 IDU PGND Cable....................................................................................................................................................414
8.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable.............................................................................................................................................414
8.2.3 Outdoor Protection Ground Cable...........................................................................................................................415
8.3 IF Cable......................................................................................................................................................................416
8.4 IF Jumper....................................................................................................................................................................418
8.5 XPIC Cable.................................................................................................................................................................418
8.6 Fiber Jumper...............................................................................................................................................................420
Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x

8.7 STM-1 Cable..............................................................................................................................................................421

8.8 E1 Cables....................................................................................................................................................................422
8.8.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment.....................................................................................................422
8.8.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel.......................................................................................................................426
8.9 Orderwire Cable.........................................................................................................................................................428
8.10 Network Cable..........................................................................................................................................................429
A Glossary......................................................................................................................................433
Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

Hardware Description 1 Introduction
1 Introduction
About This Chapter
The OptiX RTN 980L is a long haul microwave product in the OptiX RTN radio transmission
system series.
1.1 Network Application

The OptiX RTN 980L is a long haul IP radio transmission system developed by Huawei. It
provides a large capacity and supports long haul radio transmission. It mainly applies to long
haul trunk and metropolitan backbone networks.
1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 980L long haul system is composed of a powerful TDM/Hybrid/Packet
integrated IDU 980L, a high-performance high-power radio frequency unit (RFU), and a scalable
branching unit (BU).
Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

1.1 Network Application

The OptiX RTN 980L is a long haul IP radio transmission system developed by Huawei. It
provides a large capacity and supports long haul radio transmission. It mainly applies to long
haul trunk and metropolitan backbone networks.
The OptiX RTN 980L can transmit Ethernet and SDH/PDH services separately or in hybrid
mode. The OptiX RTN 980L supports N+0 (N ≤ 14) and N+1 (N ≤ 11) configurations for
microwave links. Two cascaded OptiX RTN 980Ls support 16+0 configurations for radio links
through one antenna. The OptiX RTN 980L applies to the following scenarios:
l Large-capacity and long haul trunk transmission

l Large-capacity microwave ring network
l Aggregation and backhaul on a mobile network
The OptiX RTN 980L can form a chain or ring network and aggregate services from other RTN
short haul microwave equipment through its air interface.
Figure 1-1 OptiX RTN 980L long haul radio solution
1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 980L long haul system is composed of a powerful TDM/Hybrid/Packet
integrated IDU 980L, a high-performance high-power radio frequency unit (RFU), and a scalable
branching unit (BU).
Overview
OptiX RTN 980L supports split structure.
l An IDU 980L connects to an RFU through an IF cable.

l An RFU is directly mounted on a BU.
l A BU connects to an antenna through a flexible waveguide. In space diversity (SD) mode,
a BU connects to an SD antenna through an elliptical waveguide.

Figure 1-2 OptiX RTN 980L long haul system
IDU 980L
The IDU 980L is the indoor unit of the OptiX RTN 980L long haul system. It receives and
multiplexes services, performs switching and IF processing of services, and provides system
control and communication functions. Table 1-1 lists basic information about the IDU 980L.
Table 1-1 Basic information about the IDU 980L
Item Description
Chassis height 5U
Pluggable Supported
Number of radio directions 1 to 14
RF configuration mode l N+0 non-protection (N ≤ 14)

l N+1 protection (N ≤ 11)
l 1+1 FD protection
l XPIC configuration

Item Description
Service interface type l E1 interface

l STM-1 optical/electrical interface
l STM-4 optical interface
l FE optical/electrical interface
l GE optical/electrical interface
Figure 1-3 Appearance of the IDU 980L
RFU
An RFU is the transceiver of the OptiX RTN 980L long haul system. It performs functions such
as frequency conversion and amplification of signals.
RFUs are available in two types according to support space diversity receiver or not:
l RFU-SD: space diversity (SD) receiver and IF combination supported. It provides three
RF ports: Tx, Main Rx and SD Rx.
l RFU-NonSD: SD not supported. It provides two RF ports: Tx and Rx. It provides a cost-
effective solution for scenarios with relatively good propagation conditions.
Mechanical specifications of an RFU-SD and an RFU-NonSD are the same. Figure 1-4 shows
the appearance of an RFU-SD.
Table 1-2 RFU supported by the OptiX RTN 980L
Item Description
Series type name XMC-LH
Frequency band L6/U6/7/8/11 GHz

Item Description
Modulation QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM/512QAM/
scheme 1024QAM
Channel spacing 28/40/56 MHz (U6/8/11 GHz)

28/56 MHz (L6/7 GHz)
Figure 1-4 Appearance of an RFU (in the case of the RFU-SD)
BU
The BU is the signal combiner and splitter of the OptiX RTN 980L long haul system. A BU
combines four channels of RF signals from RFUs into one for transmission. BUs can be also
cascaded.
BUs are available in two types: SD supported (BU-SD) and SD not supported (BU-NonSD).
Figure 1-5 shows the appearance of an BU-SD.

Figure 1-5 Appearance of a BU (in the case of the BU-SD)

Hardware Description 2 IDU 980L
2 IDU 980L
About This Chapter
This section describes the chassis and boards of the IDU 980L.
2.1 Chassis
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 980L is a chassis. It can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and
on several different types of racks, cabinets, and surfaces.
2.2 Board List

The IDU 980L provides various functions with different boards inserted.
2.3 Board Appearance

The dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 980L chassis are 19.82
mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching,
and timing board in the IDU 980L chassis are 23.60 mm x 378.40 mm x 205.70 mm.
2.4 Function Differences Between Boards of the Same Type
2.5 Quick Reference
2.6 CSHL
The CSHL is the hybrid system control, switching, and timing board.
2.7 ISM6
ISM6 boards are new-generation dual-channel IF boards. Each ISM6 board provides two IF
ports and is hardware ready for the MIMO function.
2.8 ISV3
ISV3 boards are multi-purpose IF boards that support Integrated IP radio, SDH radio, and DC-
I power distribution. Once the appropriate license files are loaded, the boards also support cross
polarization interference cancellation (XPIC). ISV3 boards apply to long- and short-haul
microwave service transmission.
2.9 ISU2
The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radiomode and SDH radio mode
at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. The ISU2 applies only to
short-haul microwave service transmission.

2.10 ISX2
The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/
received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power
distribution mode. The ISX2 applies only to short-haul microwave service transmission.
2.11 EM6T/EM6F
The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical ports and two
GE ports. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as follows: The
GE ports on the EM6T use fixed electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F use the SFP
modules and therefore can function as two FE/GE optical or GE electrical ports. The GE
electrical ports on the EM6F and the EM6T are compatible with the FE electrical ports.
2.12 EG4
EG4 boards are 4xGE interface boards, which provide flexible combinations of port types to
meet a wide variety of service requirements. One EG4 board provides a maximum of four ports,
two always being RJ45 electrical ports and the other two being small form-factor pluggable
(SFP) ports or RJ45 electrical ports.
2.13 EX1
EX1 boards are 1x10GE processing boards.
2.14 EMS6
The EMS6 is an FE/GE EoSDH processing board providing the L2 switching function. It
provides four FE electrical ports and two GE ports using small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
optical/electrical modules.
2.15 EFP8
The EFP8 is an 8-port FE EoPDH processing board. The EFP board is connected to the packet
plane through its bridging GE port.
2.16 SL1DA
The SL1DA is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board.The SL1DA can also provide STM-1 electrical
ports by using SFP electrical modules.
2.17 ML1/MD1
The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service
processing board.
2.18 CQ1
CQ1 boards are 4-port channelized STM-1 processing boards.
2.19 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.
2.20 AUX
The AUX is an auxiliary management interface board of the OptiX RTN 980L. One NE can
house only one AUX.
2.21 PIU
2.22 FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.

2.1 Chassis
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 980L is a chassis. It can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and
on several different types of racks, cabinets, and surfaces.
2.1.1 Chassis Structure

The dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 980L chassis are 225 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The
IDU 980L chassis has a ten-layered structure that is air cooled.
Figure 2-1 shows the chassis structure of the IDU 980L.
Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 980L
2.1.2 Installation Mode

The IDU 980L can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks,
cabinets, and surfaces.
The IDU 980L can be installed:

l In a 300 mm European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) cabinet
l In a 600 mm ETSI cabinet
l In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinet

l In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinet

l In a 19-inch open rack
l In an outdoor cabinet for wireless equipment
2.1.3 Air Flow

An IDU 980L chassis is air-cooled with air in on the left side and air out on the right side.
Figure 2-2 shows the air flow in an IDU 980L chassis.
Figure 2-2 Air flow in an IDU 980L chassis
2.1.4 IDU Labels

Product nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels,
laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, and
other types of labels are attached to their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards.
Adhere to the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks
in order to avoid bodily injury or damage to the equipment.

Label Description
Table 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards. Actual labels
may vary depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards.
Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels
Label Label Name Description
ESD protection Indicates that

label the equipment
is sensitive to
static
electricity.
Grounding label Indicates the

grounding
position of the
IDU chassis.
CAUTION Fan warning Warns you not
label to touch fan
leaves when the
Hazardous moving
parts,keep fingers and
other body parts away .
严禁在风扇旋转时接触扇
叶！
fan is rotating.
High Indicates that

temperature the board
warning label surface
temperature
may exceed 70°
C when the
ambient
temperature is
higher than 55°
C. Wear
protective
gloves to
handle the
board.
Power caution Instructs you to

label read related
instructions
before
performing any
power-related
tasks.

合格证/ QUALIFICATION CARD Qualification Indicates that

card label the equipment
has been
quality
checked.
HUAWEI
华为技术有限公司中国制造
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA
RoHS label Indicates that

the equipment
complies with
the related
requirements
specified in the
RoHS
directive.
Product Indicates the

nameplate label product name
and
certification.
! W A R N IN G
-48V O U T P U T
Operation The ODU-
TURN O FF PO W ER BEFO RE
D IS C O N N E C T IN G IF C A B LE
warning label PWR switch
must be turned
off before the
IF cable is
removed.
Operation Instructs you to

guidance label slightly pull the
switch lever
PULL outwards
before setting
the switch to
the "I" or "O"
position.

Operation Instructs you to

warning label disconnect the
IF cable from
the IDU before
connecting the
IF cable to the
ODU.
Label Position
Figure 2-3 shows the positions of the labels on the chassis of the IDU 980L.
Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 980L labels
50 ! 22kg(48.41b)
合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD
HUAWEI
华为技术有限公司中国制作
HUAW EI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA
CAUTION PULL
WARNING
Hazardous moving
parts,keep fingers -48V OUTPUT
and other body
parts away. TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
严禁在风扇旋转时接
触扇叶！ DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

2.2 Board List

The IDU 980L provides various functions with different boards inserted.
Figure 2-4 IDU slot layout
Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)
Slot 13 (EXT) Slot 14 (EXT)

Slot 28 Slot 20 (CSHL)
(FAN)
Slot 15 (CSHL)
NOTE
"EXT" represents an extended slot, which can house any type of IF board or interface board.

Table 2-2 List of the IDU boards
Board Board Valid

Acrony Name Slot
m Description
CSHL Hybrid Slot 15/20 l Provides full time division cross-connections with higher order cross-
system connect capacity of 128x128 VC-4s and lower order cross-connect
control, capacity of 32x32 VC-4s.
switching l Provides packet switching capacity of 43 Gbit/s.
, and
timing l Performs system communication and control.
board l Provides the clock processing function, supports one external clock
input/output and two external time inputs/outputs. External time
interface 1 shares a port with the external clock interface.
l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial interface, and one
NM cascading interface.
l Provide two STM-4 optical interfaces or two STM-1 optical/electrical
interfaces equipped with SFP modules.
l Provides four GE interfaces, of which two can be GE electrical
interfaces (RJ45) or GE optical interfaces (SFP), and the other two can
be only GE electrical (RJ45) interfaces.
l Provides a Type A USB port that supports software upgrades, data
backup, and command script loading using a USB flash drive.
l Provides a Mini USB port to connect to a local maintenance terminal.
l Provides one Huawei outdoor cabinet monitoring interface. The outdoor
cabinet monitoring interface shares a port with external time interface
2.
l Provides three-input and one-output external alarm interfaces.
ISV3 Versatile Slot 1 to Long haul Short haul

IF board slot 14

Board Board Valid

Acrony Name Slot
m Description
l Provides one IF interface. l Provides one IF interface.

l Supports integrated IP l Supports integrated IP
microwave and SDH microwave and SDH
microwave. The supported microwave. The supported
service modes are Native E1 service modes are Native E1
+Ethernet, Native STM-1 +Ethernet, Native STM-1
+Ethernet or SDH. +Ethernet or SDH.
l Supports the XPIC function. l Supports the XPIC function.
l Supports the AM function. l Supports the AM function.
l Supports Ethernet frame header l Supports Ethernet frame header
compression. compression.
l Supports the PLA/EPLA l Supports the PLA/EPLA
function. function.
l Supports QPSK to 1024QAM l Supports QPSK to 2048QAM
modulation plus QPSK/16QAM modulation plus QPSK/16QAM
strong FEC, and 512QAM light strong FEC, and 512QAM/
FEC. 1024QAM light FEC.
NOTE
If AM is enabled, 2048QAM is
supported.
l supports interconnected with
OptiX RTN 905 (in modulation
schemes from QPSK strong to
1024QAM light).
l Supports interconnection with
ISU2/ISX2 boards (in
modulation schemes of QPSK to
256QAM)

Board Board Valid

Acrony Name Slot
m Description
ISM6 Two- slot 1 to l Provides two IF interfaces.

channel slot 14 The two IF interfaces can be used together or independently.
versatile
IF board l Supports multiple IF running modes:
– IS6: The highest-order modulation mode is 4096QAM. The
maximum channel spacing is 112 MHz (in witch the highest-order
modulation mode is 512QAM).
– IS3: The highest-order modulation mode is 2048QAM. When
working in IS3 mode, ISM6 boards can interconnect with each other
or RTN 905.
– IS2: The highest-order modulation mode is 256QAM. When
working in IS2 mode, ISM6 boards can interconnect with ISU2/ISX2
boards.
l Supports integrated IP radio and SDH radio. Available service modes
include Native E1+Ethernet, Native STM-1+Ethernet, and SDH.
l Supports 1+1 protection, which is implemented based on the two IF
channels on the board.
l Supports XPIC, which is implemented based on the two IF channels on
the board.
l Supports 1+1 protection for an XPIC group, which is implemented
based on two boards.
l Supports intra-board PLA.
l Supports EPLA.
l Supports AM.
l Supports Ethernet frame header compression.
l Hardware ready for the multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO)
function.
ISU2 Universal Slot 1 to l Provides one IF interface.

IF board slot 14 l Supports modulation schemes from QPSK to 256QAM.
l Supports integrated IP radio and SDH radio. The supported service
modes are Native E1+Ethernet, Native STM-1+Ethernet or SDH.
l Supports the AM function.
l Supports the PLA/EPLA function.
l Supports short haul.

Board Board Valid

Acrony Name Slot
m Description
ISX2 Universal Slot 1 to l Provides one IF interface.

XPIC IF slot 14 l Supports modulation schemes from QPSK to 256QAM.
board
l Supports integrated IP radio and SDH radio. The supported service
modes are Native E1+Ethernet, Native STM-1+Ethernet or SDH.
l Supports the XPIC function.
l Supports the AM function.
l Supports the AM booster function.
l Supports the PLA/EPLA function.
l Supports short haul.
SL1DA 2xSTM-1 Slot 1 to l Uses SFP modules to provide two STM-1 optical/electrical interfaces.
interface slot 6 l Support K byte transparent transmission.
board
CQ1 4-port Slot 1 to l Uses the SFP optical module to provide four channelized STM-1 optical/
channeliz slot 14 electrical interfaces.
ed STM-1 l Supports CES E1 and ML-PPP E1 functions for E1s in STM-1 frame.
interface
board l Supports transmission of overhead bytes over CES E1.
EM6T 6-port Slot 1 to l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.

RJ45 slot 14 l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that are compatible with the FE
Ethernet/ electrical interface.
Gigabit
Ethernet l Supports synchronous Ethernet.
interface
board
EM6F 4-port Slot 1 to l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.

RJ45 + 2- slot 14 l Uses SFP modules to provide two GE/FE optical interfaces or GE
port SFP electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces are compatible with
Fast the FE electrical interfaces.
Ethernet/
Gigabit l Supports the synchronous Ethernet.
Ethernet
interface
board

Board Board Valid

Acrony Name Slot
m Description
EG4 2-port Slot 1 to l Provides four GE interfaces, of which two can be RJ45 GE electrical
RJ45/SFP slot 14 interfaces or SFP GE optical interfaces, and the other two can be only
+ 2-port RJ45 GE electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces are
RJ45 compatible with the FE electrical interfaces.
Gigabit l Supports the synchronous Ethernet.
Ethernet
interface l Supports the IEEE 1588v2 feature.
board
EX1 1x10GE slot 1 to l Uses XFP modules to provide one 10GE interface.
interface slot 2 l Supports synchronous Ethernet.
board
l Supports IEEE 1588v2.
EFP8 8-port Slot 1 to l Provides eight FE electrical interfaces.

RJ45 FE slot 14 l Bridges to the packet plane through one internal GE interface.
EoPDH
processin l Supports the processing of EoPDH services.
g board l Supports Ethernet transparent transmission services and Layer 2
with the switching services.
switching l Supports synchronous Ethernet.
function
EMS6 4-port Slot 1 to l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.

RJ45 and slot 6 l Uses SFP modules to provide two GE optical interfaces or GE electrical
2-port interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces are compatible with the FE
SFP FE/ electrical interfaces.
GE
EoSDH l Bridges to the packet plane through one internal GE interface.
processin l Supports the processing of EoSDH services.
g board
l Supports Ethernet transparent transmission services and Layer 2
with the
switching services.
switching
function l Supports synchronous Ethernet.
ML1 16xE1 Slot 1 to l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm Smart E1 interfaces.

(Smart) slot 14 l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, ML-PPP E1, and Fractional E1.
tributary
board
MD1 32xE1 Slot 1 to l Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm Smart E1 interfaces.

(Smart) slot 14 l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, ML-PPP E1, and Fractional E1.
tributary
board
SP3S 16xE1 Slot 1 to Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1 interfaces.

tributary slot 14
board

Board Board Valid

Acrony Name Slot
m Description
SP3D 32xE1 Slot 1 to Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1 interfaces.

tributary slot 14
board
AUX Auxiliary Slot 1 to Provides one orderwire interface, one asynchronous data interface, one
interface slot 14 synchronous data interface, and four-input and two-output external alarm
board interfaces.
PIU Power slot 26/27 Provides -48 V/-60 V DC power input.

board
FAN Fan board slot 28 Cools and ventilates the IDU.
2.3 Board Appearance

The dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 980L chassis are 19.82
mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching,
and timing board in the IDU 980L chassis are 23.60 mm x 378.40 mm x 205.70 mm.
NOTE
The depth of the board refers to the distance between the front panel and the end of the PCB.
Board Appearance
Figure 2-5 shows the appearance of an ISU2 board in an IDU 980L chassis.
Figure 2-5 Appearance of an ISU2 board
H
D W

Bar Code
The front panel of a board has two ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers help
you remove or insert a board. The captive screws fasten a board to the chassis. A board bar code
(as shown in Figure 2-6) is attached to one of the ejector levers.
Figure 2-6 Bar code
Bar code
0514721055000015-SL91EG401
① ② ③ ④
① Internal code
② Board version
③ Board name
④ Board feature code
NOTE
Only the bar codes of some boards contain board feature codes, which further classify boards. For example,
the feature codes of some boards using SFP modules (such as EG4) indicate the type of SFP module being
used, and the feature codes of some other boards providing E1 ports (such as SP3S) indicate the impedance
of E1 ports.
Two-dimensional Barcode Label of a Board

Figure 2-7 shows a two-dimensional bar code, and Table 2-3 provides the description of the
bar code.
Figure 2-7 Board's two-dimensional bar code

NOTE
The bar code in the figure is only an example and it may differ in practice.
Table 2-3 Description of the two-dimensional bar code of a board
No. Item Description
1 One-dimensional code A one-dimensional code

contains the serial number of
an item, compliant with ISO/
IEC 15417 Code 128, and
provided for barcode
scanning. One-dimensional
codes are retained for
business continuity.
2 Item number (BOM) An item number indicates the

ID of an item. Huawei's item
number is a string of 8 to 17
characters, including letters,
digits, and special characters
such as "-" and "=". An item
number is also known as a
part number (PN). The item
number of a board is a string
of 8 or 12 characters.
3 Serial number Serial number (SN) is the

exclusive identifier of an
item. The SN can help after-
sales personnel identify the
maintenance period. The
value is a string of 12, 16, or
20 characters containing
digits and letters.
The value is a string of 12, 16,
or 20 characters containing
digits and letters.

No. Item Description
4 Model The value consists of digits

and letters. For a board, this
field contains information
about the version, name, and
board feature codes.
NOTE
Only the bar codes of some
boards contain board feature
codes, which further classify
boards. For example, the
feature codes of some boards
using SFP modules (such as
EG4) indicate the type of SFP
module being used, and the
feature codes of some other
boards providing E1 ports (such
as SP3S) indicate the
impedance of E1 ports.
5 Country of origin Indicates the country where

the item is manufactured.
6 RoHS An environmental
friendliness flag code
identifies the environmental
protection information.
7 Two-dimensional code A two-dimensional code

normally contains the serial
number, item number, and
manufacturer identifier.
Some two-dimensional
codes do not contain
manufacturer identifier due
to length limitations. Two-
dimensional codes comply
with the ISO16022 - Data
Matrix standard and are
provided for barcode
scanning as an upgrade of the
one-dimensional code.
Manufacturer identifier:
Manufacturer information
that Huawei applies for from
the Electronic Data
Interchange Forum for
Companies with Interests in
Computing and Electronics
(EDIFICE). The
manufacturer identifier of
Huawei is LEHWT.

2.3.1 Photos of System Control, Switching, and Timing Boards

This section provides photos of system control, switching, and timing boards.
Figure 2-8 CSHL board
2.3.2 Photos of IF Boards

This section provides photos of IF boards.
Figure 2-9 ISU2 board
Figure 2-10 ISX2 board
Figure 2-11 ISV3 board
Figure 2-12 ISM6 board

2.3.3 Photos of Service Boards

This section provides photos of some service boards.
Figure 2-13 CQ1 board
Figure 2-14 EM6T board
Figure 2-15 EM6F board
Figure 2-16 EG4 board
Figure 2-17 EFP8 board
Figure 2-18 ML1 board

Figure 2-19 SP3S board
Figure 2-20 SP3D board
Figure 2-21 EX1 board
2.3.4 Photos of RFU and Branching Unit

This section provides photos of RFU and Branching Unit.

Figure 2-22 RFU

Figure 2-23 Branching Unit
2.4 Function Differences Between Boards of the Same Type
2.4.1 Differences Between General-Purpose IF Boards

The general-purpose IF boards used on OptiX RTN NEs provide different functions and features.
NOTE
l "Y" indicates that the corresponding board supports the specified function, and "N" indicates that the
corresponding board does not support the specified function.
Table 2-4 Differences between general-purpose IF boards
Item specifications
ISU2 ISX2 ISV3 ISM6
Radio type Integrated IP Native E1 + Ethernet Y Y Y Y

radio
Native STM-1 + Ethernet Y Y Y Y
SDH radio STM-1 Y Y Y Y
2xSTM-1 Y Y Y Y
Long haul N N Y N
Ethernet frame header compression Y Y Y Y
MIMO N N N Y

Item specifications
ISU2 ISX2 ISV3 ISM6
112 MHz channel spacing N N N Y
1 Gbit/s backplane bus bandwidth Y Y Y Y
2.5 Gbit/s backplane bus bandwidth N N N Y
XPIC N Y Y Y
K byte pass-through Y Y Y Y
PLA Y Y Y Y
EPLA Y Y Y Y
The maximum modulation 256QAM Y Y Y Y

scheme
2048QAM N N Ya Ya
4096QAM N N N Yd
NOTE
a: 2048QAM is supported when AM is used for IS3 mode. The maximum modulation scheme is 1024QAM
for LH-ACCP mode.
d：4096QAM is supported when IS6 mode is used.
2.4.2 Differences Between Packet Ethernet Boards

Different packet Ethernet boards used on OptiX RTN 980Ls provide different functions and
features.
NOTE
l "Y" indicates that the corresponding board supports the specified function, and "N" indicates that the
corresponding board does not support the specified function.
Table 2-5 Differences between packet Ethernet boards
Item Specifications
EM6T EM6F EG4 EX1
Port Number of 4 4 - -
specificatio fixed FE
ns electrical
ports
Number of 2 - 2a -
fixed GE
electrical
ports

Item Specifications
EM6T EM6F EG4 EX1
Number of - 2 2 -
GE SFP
ports
Number of - - - 1
10GE ports
Backplane bus bandwidth 1 Gbit/s 1 Gbit/s l 2.5 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/sc

(slots 1-2)
l 1 Gbit/s
(slots 3-14)
1588 V2 N N Y Yd
1588 ACR N N Y Yd
NOTE
l a: There are two other fixed GE ports that share service channels with two SFP ports. Only one type
of port can take effect at a time.
l c: Only slots 1 and 2 support EX1 boards.
l d: The corresponding function is supported only when the port involved works in LAN mode.
2.5 Quick Reference
2.5.1 Board Loopback Types

Different service interface boards support different loopback types.
Table 2-6 Loopback types that service interface boards support
Board Loopback Type Remarks
SL1DA l Inloops at optical ports -

l Outloops at optical ports
l Inloops on VC-4 paths
l Outloops on VC-4 paths
CQ1 l Inloops at STM-1 ports -

l Outloops at STM-1 ports
l Inloops on E1 paths
l Outloops on E1 paths

SP3S/SP3D/ML1/MD1 l Inloops at E1 tributary -

ports
l Outloops at E1 tributary
ports
EM6T/EM6F l Inloops at the MAC layer of -

Ethernet ports
l Inloops at the PHY layer of
Ethernet ports
EFP8 l Inloops at the PHY layer of -

Ethernet ports excluding
ports 9 and 10 (bridging
ports)
l Inloops at the MAC layer of
port 10 (bridging port)
EG4 l Inloops at the MAC layer of -

Ethernet ports
l Inloops at the PHY layer of
Ethernet ports
EMS6 l Inloops at the PHY layer of -

ports 7 and 8 (bridging
ports)
port 8 (bridging port)
ISU2/ISX2 l Inloops at IF ports -

l Outloops at IF ports
l Inloops at composite ports
l Outloops at composite
ports
ISV3 l Inloops at IF ports -

ports

ISM6 l Inloops at IF ports -

ports
EX1 l Inloops at the PHY layer of -

Ethernet ports
Ethernet ports
2.5.2 Indicators of Boards
Indicators of Boards
Table 2-7 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHL
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is working properly.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.
PROG Blinks on (green) and off at Software is being loaded to the board
100 ms intervals during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.
Blinks on (green) and off at The board software is in BIOS boot state
of the board.
On (green) l When the board is being powered on

or being reset, the upper layer
software is being initialized.
l When the board is running, the
software is running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at The BOOTROM self-check fails during

100 ms intervals the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

On (red) l The memory self-check fails or

loading upper layer software fails
during the power-on or resetting
process of the board.
l The logic file or upper layer software
is lost during the running process of
the board.
l When database synchronization
between the active and standby
system control boards fails, the
PROG indicator on the standby
system control board is steady red.
SYNC On (green) The clock is working properly.
On (red) The clock source is lost or a clock

switchover occurs.
SRV On (green) The system is working properly.
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the

system.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in the

system.
ACT On (green) In a 1+1 protected system, the board

works as the active one.
In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.
Off In a 1+1 protected system, the board

works as the standby one.
In an unprotected system, the board is not
activated.
USB Blinks (red) The USB flash drive is online but faulty,
or the NE does not support the USB flash
drive.
Blinks on (yellow) and off Data on the USB flash drive is being
at 300 ms intervals backed up or recovered.
On (red) Backing up or recovering data on the

USB flash drive fails.
On (green) l The USB flash drive is online.

l Backing up or recovering data on the
USB flash drive is complete.

Off The USB flash drive is offline, or the NE

cannot recognize the USB flash drive.
LOS1 On (red) The first optical port on the line is

reporting the R_LOS alarm.
Off The first optical port on the line is free of

R_LOS alarms.
LOS2 On (red) The second optical port on the line is

Off The second optical port on the line is free

of R_LOS alarms.
L/A1-L/A2 On (green) The port is properly connected and is not

transmitting or receiving data.
On (red) An optical power alarm is reported

(applicable only to optical ports).
Blinks (yellow) The port is receiving or transmitting

data.
Off The port is not connected or is

incorrectly connected.
CRIT On (red) A critical alarm occurs on the NE.
MAJ On (orange) A major alarm occurs on the NE.
MIN On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs on the NE.
Table 2-8 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2
STAT On (green) The board is working

properly.

l There is no power
supplied to the board.
SRV On (green) The services are normal.
On (red) A critical or major alarm

occurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm

LINK On (green) The radio link is normal.
On (red) The radio link is faulty.
ODU On (green) The ODU is working

properly.
On (red) l The ODU is reporting

critical or major alarms.
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.
On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor

alarms.
Blinks on (yellow) and off at The antennas are not aligned.

300 ms intervals
Off The ODU is offline.
RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment is

reporting defects.
Off The remote equipment is free

of defects.
ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system,

the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.
Off l In a 1+1 protected system,

standby one.
the board is not activated.
Table 2-9 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2
XPIC On (green) The XPIC input signal is

normal.
On (red) The XPIC input signal is lost.

Off The XPIC function is

disabled.

properly.

l There is no power



properly.

l There is no power

alarms.

300 ms intervals

reporting defects.

of defects.

active one.
the board has been
activated.


standby one.
Table 2-10 Status explanation for indicators on an ISV3 board
XPIC On (green) XPIC input signals are

normal.
On (red) XPIC input signals are lost.
Off XPIC is disabled.

properly.
Off The board is not working, not

created, or not powered on.
SRV On (green) Services are normal.
On (red) A critical or major alarm has

been reported.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm has

been reported.
ODU On (green) The RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/

ODU is working properly.
On (red) The RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/

ODU has reported a critical
or major alarm, or was not
powered on.
On (yellow) The RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/

ODU has reported a minor
alarm.
Blinks on (yellow) and off at Antennas are not well

300 ms intervals aligned.

Off The RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/

ODU is offline.
RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment has

reported a defect.

of defects.
ACT On (green) In a 1+1 protected system, the

board is working as the main
board.
In an unprotected system, the
board has been activated.
Off In a 1+1 protected system, the

board is working as the
standby board.
board has not been activated.
Table 2-11 Status explanation for indicators on an ISM6 board

properly.


been reported.

been reported.
LINK1 On (green) The radio link is normal.

ACT1 On (green) In a 1+1 protected system, the

board.

standby board.

board.

standby board.
Table 2-12 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F

l There is no power supplied to the board.

system.
On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.

Off There is no power supplied to the system.
PROG Blinks on (green) and off at Software is being loaded to the board during
board.
300 ms intervals during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.
On (green) l When the board is being powered on or

being reset, the upper layer software is
being initialized.
l When the board is running, the software
is running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at 100 The BOOTROM self-check fails during the
ms intervals power-on or resetting process of the board.
On (red) l The memory self-check fails or loading

upper layer software fails during the
power-on or resetting process of the
board.
l The logic file or upper layer software is
lost during the running process of the
board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.
LINK1a On (green) The GE1 port is connected correctly and is

not receiving or transmitting data.
Blinking (green) The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting

data.
Off The GE1 port is not connected or is

connected incorrectly.


data.

NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE ports.

Table 2-13 Status explanation for indicators on an EG4 board
Off The board is not working, not created, or not

powered on.
On (red) A critical or major alarm has been reported.
On (yellow) A minor alarm has been reported.
Off No service is configured.
L/A1 On (green) Port GE1 is connected correctly but is not

(optical/ receiving or transmitting data.
electrical
port 1) Blinks on (red) and off at 300 Port GE1 has received extremely high
ms intervals optical power (applicable only to an optical
port).
Blinks on (red) for 300 ms and Port GE1 has received extremely low optical
off for 700 ms at 1000 ms power (applicable only to an optical port).
intervals
Blinks (yellow) Port GE1 is receiving or transmitting data.
Off Port GE1 is not connected or is incorrectly

connected.

electrical
port).
intervals

connected.

(electrical receiving or transmitting data.
port 3)

connected.


port 4)

connected.
Table 2-14 Status explanation for indicators on an EX1

properly.
Off l The board is not working

or created.
l There is no power
SRV On (green) The system/service is

normal.

occurs in the system/service.

L/A On (green) The port is connected

correctly (link up), but is not
receiving or transmitting
data.
Blinks (red) three times every The port on the board

second, 300 ms on and 300 receives too strong power.
ms off
Blinks (red) once every The port on the board

second, 300 ms on and 700 receives too weak power.
ms off
Blinks (orange) The port is connected

correctly (link up), and is
receiving and transmitting
data.

Off The optical fiber is not

connected to the port, or the
port is abnormal (link down/
LOS).
Table 2-15 Status explanation for indicators on the EMS6

board.
the board.
On (green) l The upper layer software is being

initialized during the power-on or
resetting process of the board.
l The software is running properly during
the running process of the board.

board.
board.
SRV On (green) The system is working normally.

system.

LINK1 On (green) The GE1 port is connected correctly.
Blinks on (red) and off at 300 The receive optical power at the GE1 optical
ms intervals port is higher than the upper threshold.
Blinks 300 ms on (red) and 700 The receive optical power at the GE1 optical
ms off port is lower than the lower threshold.

ACT1 Blinking (yellow) The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting

data.
Off The GE1 port is not receiving or

transmitting data.


data.

transmitting data.
Table 2-16 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8

board.

the board.

being initialized.

board.
board.

system.
Table 2-17 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1DA

properly.

l There is no power



Off The services are not

configured.
LOS1 On (red) The first port of the SL1D/

SL1DA is reporting the
R_LOS alarm.
Off The first port of the SL1D/

SL1DA is free of R_LOS
alarms.
LOS2 On (red) The second port of the

SL1D/SL1DA is reporting
the R_LOS alarm.
Off The second port of the

SL1D/SL1DA is free of
R_LOS alarms.
Table 2-18 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D

properly.

l There is no power



configured.

Table 2-19 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1

properly.

l There is no power



configured.
Table 2-20 Status explanation for indicators on a CQ1 board

properly.


been reported.

been reported.
LOS1 On (red) The first port has reported an

R_LOS alarm.
Off The first port does not report

any R_LOS alarms.

LOS2 On (red) The second port has reported

an R_LOS alarm.
Off The second port does not

report any R_LOS alarms.
LOS3 On (red) The third port has reported an

R_LOS alarm.
Off The third port does not report

any R_LOS alarms.
LOS4 On (red) The fourth port has reported

an R_LOS alarms.
Off The fourth port does not

Table 2-21 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX

board.

system.

system.
Table 2-22 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU
Indicator Status Description
PWR On (green) The power supply is normal.
Off There is no power supply.

ALM On (orange) The board is in the initialization state.
On (red) An alarm is reported on the PIU.
Off No alarm occurs.
Table 2-23 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN
FAN On (green) The fan is working properly.
On (red) The fan is faulty.
Off The fan is not powered on or is not installed.
2.5.3 Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board
Table 2-24 Weight and power consumption of each board
Board Weight (kg) Power Consumption (W)
CSHL 1.15 kg < 49.0 W
ISU2 0.60 kg < 22.0 W
ISX2 0.60 kg < 23.0 W
ISV3 0.65 kg < 23.0 W
ISM6 0.80 kg < 41 W (typical value, excluding the

power consumed for supplying power to
the ODU)
EM6T 0.37 kg < 10.4 W
EM6F 0.40 kg < 11.3 W
EG4 0.30 kg <6W
EX1 0.50 kg ≤13.1 W
EMS6 0.50 kg < 16.5 W
EFP8 0.60 kg < 13.5 W
SL1DA 0.30 kg < 3.3 W
ML1 0.45 kg < 7.0 W

Board Weight (kg) Power Consumption (W)
MD1 0.50 kg < 12.2 W
CQ1 0.47 kg < 11.5 W
SP3S 0.50 kg (VER.B) < 5.7 W (VER.B)

0.40 kg (VER.C) < 4.8 W (VER.C)
SP3D 0.64 kg (VER.B) < 9.6 W (VER.B)

0.54 kg (VER.C) < 8.3 W (VER.C)
AUX 0.27 kg < 1.3 W
PIU 1.00 kg < 25.0 W
FAN 1.70 kg < 15.9 W (room temperature)

< 103.5 W (high temperature)
Empty chassis 7.10 kg -

(with only the
backplane)
2.6 CSHL
The CSHL is the hybrid system control, switching, and timing board.
2.6.1 Version Description

The functional versions of the CSHL is SLB1.
2.6.2 Application
CSHL boards are the hybrid system control, switching, and timing boards of the new-generation
OptiX RTN 980L. CSHL boards provide STM-1/4 and GE service ports, as well as TDM,
Hybrid, and Packet microwave ports to converge, schedule, and transmit various services.

Figure 2-24 Application scenario of CSHL boards
E1
Regional backhaul
STM-1/4 network
FE/GE
RFU E1/STM-1
ISV3 Service
RFU board FE/GE
BRU CSHL
RFU STM-1/4
ISV3
RFU GE
OptiX RTN 980L Cable/fiber
NOTE
l E1 services shown in the preceding figure can be native E1 services or CES/ATM E1 services, and
Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or ETH PWE3 services.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure can be Ethernet interface boards, STM-1 interface boards,
E1 interface boards, or Smart E1 processing boards.
2.6.3 Functions and Features

The CSHL provides 37 Gbit/s packet switching, full time-division cross-connection, system
control and communication, and clock processing functions. The CSHL provides GE/FE ports,
STM-1/4 ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports.
Table 2-25 lists the functions and features that the CSHL supports.
Table 2-25 Functions and features that the CSHL supports
Function and Feature Description
Basic functions Switching Supports 37 Gbit/s packet switching function.

capacity
Cross-connect l Supports higher order cross-connections, which are

capacity equivalent to 128x128 VC-4s.
l Supports full time-division lower order cross-
connections (equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s) at the
VC-12 or VC-3 level.

System control Manages, monitors, and controls the running status of

and the IDU, and works as a communication service unit
communication between the NMS and boards to help the NMS to
control and manage the NE.
Clock source Clock source Provides the system clock and frame headers for
service signals and overhead signals for the other
boards when tracing an appropriate clock source.
The traced clock source can be any of the following:
l External clock
l SDH line clock
l PDH tributary clock
l Radio link clock
l Synchronous Ethernet clock
Clock Supports the following clock protection schemes:

protection l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
IEEE 1588v2 Processes IEEE 1588v2 messages.

protocol
External clock 1
port
External time 2
port
DCN Outband DCN Supports a maximum of 24 DCCs.
Inband DCN Supports the inband DCN function. The DCN

bandwidth is configurable.
Network HWECC Supported

management protocol
protocols
IP protocol Supported
L2 DCN Supported
SNMP protocol Supports SNMP Get and Set for managing devices.
Protection 1+1 hot backup Supported
EPLA Supported
MPLS/PWE3 functions Supported
See Table 2-26.

QoS functions Supported
See Table 2-27.
Ethernet service functions Supported
See Table 2-28.
STM-1/4 service functions Supported
See Table 2-29.
Auxiliary ports NMS port 1

and
management NMS serial port 1
ports NE cascade port 1
Outdoor cabinet 1
monitoring port The specifications of port comply with RS-485.
USB port 1
MINI USB port 1
External alarm 3 inputs + 1 output

port
O&M Warm reset and Supported

cold reset
In-service Supported
FPGA loading
Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query
Board power Supported

consumption
information
query
Board Supported
temperature
detection
Board voltage Supported

detection
Detection of Supported
indicators on the
other boards

Hot swapping Supported

function
The packet switching unit of the CSHL works with its service interface unit or a service board
to implement MPLS/PWE3 functions. Table 2-26 provides details about these functions.
Table 2-26 MPLS/PWE3 functions
MPLS Setup mode Static LSPs

tunnel
VLAN subinterface Supported
Protection 1:1 MPLS tunnel APS
OAM l MPLS OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711

l MPLS-TP tunnel OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.
1731
l LSP ping and LSP traceroute functions
PWE3 TDM Emulatio l SAToP

PWE3 n mode l CESoPSN
Packet 125 us to 5000 us

loading
time
Jitter l 375 μs to 16000 μs (for TDM PWE3 services carried

compens on Smart E1 boards)
ation l 875 μs to 16000 μs (for TDM PWE3 services carried
bufferin on channelized STM-1 boards)
g time
ATM Mapping l ATM N-to-one VCC cell encapsulation

PWE3 mode l ATM N-to-one VPC cell encapsulation
l ATM one-to-one VCC cell encapsulation
l ATM one-to-one VPC cell encapsulation
Transpar Supported
ently
transmitt
ed ATM
service

Maximu 31
m
number
of
concaten
ated cells
ETH Encapsul l Raw mode

PWE3 ation l Tagged mode
mode
Service l E-Line
type l E-Aggr
l E-LAN, that is, virtual private LAN service (VPLS)
Control Supporting packets carrying control words or carrying no

word control words
Setup mode Static PWs
Number of PWs A maximum of 1024 PWs
Protection 1:1 PW APS/FPS
OAM l VCCV
l PW OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711
l MPLS-TP PW OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.
1731
l PW ping and PW traceroute functions
l One-click PWE3 service fault diagnosis
MS-PW Supported
Bandwidth setting Supported
The packet switching unit of the CSHL works with its service interface unit or a service board
to implement QoS functions. Table 2-27 provides details about these functions.
Table 2-27 QoS functions
Function and Description

Feature
DiffServ Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service

classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values)
carried by the packets.


Feature
Ethernet complex Supports traffic classification based on SMAC, DMAC, C-VLAN

traffic classification IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN
IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or
DSCP values carried by packets.
CAR Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports.
Queue scheduling Supports the following queue scheduling policies:

policies l SP
l WRR
l SP+WRR
Congestion Supports tail drop and weighted random early detection (WRED).
avoidance
Traffic shaping Supports shaping for a specified port, priority queue, or service flow,
and supports a step of 64 kbit/s for the peak information rate (PIR)
and committed information rate (CIR).
The Ethernet service interface unit of the CSHL works with its packet switching unit to
implement Ethernet service functions. Table 2-28 provides details about these functions.
Table 2-28 Ethernet service functions
Basic functions Receives/Transmits GE service signals and works with

the packet switching unit to process the received GE
service signals.
Port GE electrical 4 (Two GE electrical ports and two GE optical ports

specifications port (fixed): share service channels.)
10/100/1000BA
SE-T(X)
GE port: SFP 2
optical module
(1000BASE-
SX/LX/VX/ZX/
BX)
FE port: SFP
optical module
(100BASE-SX/
LX/VX/ZX/
BX)

Port attributes Working mode l GE electrical ports support 10M full-duplex, 100M
full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-
negotiation.
l GE optical ports support 1000M full-duplex and
auto-negotiation.
l FE optical ports support 100M full-duplex.
TAG attribute l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet

port.
l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,
or hybrid.
Jumbo frame Supports jumbo frames with a maximum length of 9600

bytes.
Traffic control Supports the port-based traffic control function that

function complies with IEEE 802.3x.
Services E-Line services Supports the following types of E-Line services:

l Port-based E-line services
l VLAN-based E-line services
l E-Line services carried by QinQ links
l E-Line services carried by PWs
E-LAN services Supports the following types of E-LAN services:

l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
l E-LAN services carried by PWs, that is, virtual
private LAN services (VPLSs)
LAG Inter-board Supported

LAG
Intra-board Supported
LAG
ERPS Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T

G.8032v1/v2.
Spanning tree protocol Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the
CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.
IGMP snooping Supported
LPT Supported
Port mirroring Supported

LLDP Supported
ETH OAM Ethernet service l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM

OAM function.
l Supports packet loss, delay, and delay variation
monitoring functions that comply with ITU-T Y.
1731.
Ethernet port Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM

OAM function.
RMON Supported
Clock Clock source Synchronous Ethernet

DCN Inband DCN Each GE port provides one inband DCN channel.
OAM Loopback Supports the following loopback types:

l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports
Warm reset Supported
Query of SFP Supported

module
information
NOTE
The four GE ports on the front panel support the access of 2.5 Gbit/s services at most.
Table 2-29 provides details about the SDH service functions that the CSHL supports.
Table 2-29 SDH service functions
Basic functions Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1/4 signals.
Service categories l STM-1

l STM-4

Port specifications l STM-1: Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and STM-1e

l STM-4: S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2
l The performance characteristics of the ports comply
with ITU-T G.957 and the jitter performance of the
ports complies with ITU-T G.823.
DCN Outband DCN Supported
Protection Linear Supported

multiplex
section
protection
(LMSP)
Ring MSP Supported
SNCP Supported
Clock Clock source Each line port provides one SDH line clock signal.

O&M Loopback Supports the following loopback types:

l Inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths
l Inloops and outloops at STM-1/4 optical ports
Cold reset and Supported

warm reset
Setting of the Supported

on/off state for a
laser
ALS functiona Supported
Query of SFP Supported

optical module
information

NOTE
a: The ALS function is implemented as follows:

l When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500
ms, the laser at the specific transmit port is automatically shut down.
l The laser starts to launch laser pulses at a specified interval; that is, the laser emits light for two seconds
and stops emission for 60 seconds.
l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser works properly and emits continuous light.
2.6.4 Working Principle

The CSHL consists of the system control and communication unit, packet switching unit, cross-
connect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 2-25 Functional block diagram of the CSHL

Backplane
Ethernet Ethernet service

GE bus
GE signal GE signal Packet bus board/Packet
access unit switching unit switching unit of
the paired board
VC-4
TDM service
signal Cross- VC-4 signal
STM-1/4 signal STM-1/4 signal unit/Cross-
processing unit connect unit connect unit of
the paired board
Control bus
Ethernet NM port
NM serial port
System control Clock signal received

NE cascading port from other boards
and Clock unit
communication Clock signal provided
OAM port unit to other boards
FE signal System control and
communication unit
USB port
Clock Clock
signal signal
Auxiliary received provided
External alarm port interface from the to the
unit service other units
unit on on the
Port for monitoring Monitoring signal the board
an outdoor External clock signal board
cabinet/Time port2
External clock signal
Clock/Time port1
Power -48 V 1
3.3 V power supplied to the supply
other units on the board unit -48 V 2

System Control and Communication Unit

The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The
system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.
l The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.
l The CPU unit controls and manages the RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/ODU by transmitting the
RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/ODU control signal to the SMODEM unit in the IF board over the
control bus in the backplane.
l The CPU unit enables the packet switching unit using the control bus to groom Ethernet
service packets.
l The CPU unit processes Ethernet protocol packets from the packet switching unit using the
control bus.
l The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control
unit.
l The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascading
port.
l The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables
FPGA loading.
l The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit,
the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes:
– Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit
– Adding or dropping orderwire and asynchronous data services
– Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines
l The system control and communication unit on a CSHL board communicates with the
system control and communication unit on the paired CSHL board by carrying FE signals
over the communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, 1+1 hot backup between
paired boards is achieved.
Packet Switching Unit

The packet switching unit grooms services and processes protocols for Ethernet services
(including Native Ethernet services and MPLS/PWE3 packets carried over Ethernet).
l After receiving services from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or a service board,
the packet switching unit grooms the services based on the configurations that are delivered
by the system control and communication unit.
l After receiving protocol packets from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or a service
board, the packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the system control and
communication unit for processing. After processing, the system control and
communication unit sends the protocol packets back to the packet switching unit. The
packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the Ethernet interface unit or the
service board.
l The packet switching unit exchanges data service signals with the packet switching unit of
the paired board over the GE pass-through bus.

Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order cross-
connect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 2-26 shows the functional
block diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Figure 2-26 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM SinkTDM

service unit service unit
Higher order
cross-connect
module
HOXC
Lower order
cross-connect
module
LOXC
The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module
over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit.
If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order
cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services
back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes
the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
The cross-connect unit exchanges TDM service signals with the cross-connect unit of the paired
board over the TDM pass-through bus.
GE Signal Access Unit

The GE signal access unit allows access of two channels of GE/FE optical signals and two
channels of electrical signals, or four channels of GE electrical signals and works with the Layer
2 switching unit to provide Ethernet service processing functions.
l In the receive direction: After performing O/E conversion, restructuring, decoding, and
serial/parallel conversion for GE optical signals or after performing restructuring, decoding,
and serial/parallel conversion for GE electrical signals, the GE signal access unit extracts
framed GE signals by delimiting frames and adding preambles. The GE signal access unit
also performs CRC checks and Ethernet performance measurement.
l In the transmit direction: After delimiting frames, adding preambles, calculating CRC
codes, and measuring Ethernet performance, the GE signal access unit performs parallel/
serial conversion and encoding and then transmits GE signals to the GE electrical port or
the GE optical port after performing E/O conversion.

STM-1/4 Signal Processing Unit

The STM-1/4 signal processing unit transmits/receives and processes two STM-1/4 signals,
extracts clock signals, restores data, scrambles/descrambles data, processes overheads, and
processes pointers.
l In the receive direction, the STM-1/4 signal processing unit performs the following
functions:
– Regenerates STM-1/4 signals and performs O/E conversion.
– Restores and descrambles clock data.
– Extracts and processes overhead bytes, adjusts AU pointer, and sends pointer indication
signals and VC-4 signal to the cross-connect unit.
l In the transmit direction, the STM-1/4 signal processing unit performs the following
functions:
– Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit and
processes clock signals.
– Sets AU pointers and overhead bytes.
– Scrambles signals and performs E/O conversion.
Clock Unit
The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service clock
sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the
phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock and frame headers for service signals
and overhead signals to other units on the system control, switching, and timing board and the
other boards.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit combines and then converts the -48 V power inputs into the power supply
required by the chips of the other units on the local board.
2.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, buttons, service ports, latches, clock ports, auxiliary ports, management
ports, alarm ports, and service ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 2-27 Front panel of the CSHL

1 2 GE1 GE3 GE4
CSHL
TX RX
PROG
SYNC
STAT
LOS1
LOS2
CRIT
ACT
SRV
USB
L/A1
L/A2
1 2 1 2
MAJ
MIN
RST USB STM-1/4 GE

OAM NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD1 MON/TOD2 ALMI/ALMO GE2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. Indicators 2. Buttons 3. USB ports

4. Clock ports, auxiliary 5. STM-1/4 ports (using SFP 6. GE/FE optical service
ports, management ports, and modules) ports (using SFP optical
alarm ports modules)
7. GE electrical service ports 8. Latches -

(fixed)
Indicators
Table 2-30 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHL

board.
PROG Blinks on (green) and off at Software is being loaded to the board
of the board.
of the board.
On (green) l When the board is being powered on

or being reset, the upper layer
software is being initialized.
l When the board is running, the
software is running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at The BOOTROM self-check fails during

board.

On (red) l The memory self-check fails or

loading upper layer software fails
during the power-on or resetting
process of the board.
l The logic file or upper layer software
is lost during the running process of
the board.
l When database synchronization
between the active and standby
system control boards fails, the
PROG indicator on the standby
system control board is steady red.
SYNC On (green) The clock is working properly.
On (red) The clock source is lost or a clock

switchover occurs.

system.

system.
ACT On (green) In a 1+1 protected system, the board

works as the active one.
In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.
Off In a 1+1 protected system, the board

works as the standby one.
In an unprotected system, the board is not
activated.
USB Blinks (red) The USB flash drive is online but faulty,
or the NE does not support the USB flash
drive.
Blinks on (yellow) and off Data on the USB flash drive is being
at 300 ms intervals backed up or recovered.
On (red) Backing up or recovering data on the

USB flash drive fails.
On (green) l The USB flash drive is online.

l Backing up or recovering data on the
USB flash drive is complete.

Off The USB flash drive is offline, or the NE

cannot recognize the USB flash drive.
LOS1 On (red) The first optical port on the line is

Off The first optical port on the line is free of

R_LOS alarms.
LOS2 On (red) The second optical port on the line is

Off The second optical port on the line is free

of R_LOS alarms.
L/A1-L/A2 On (green) The port is properly connected and is not

transmitting or receiving data.
On (red) An optical power alarm is reported

(applicable only to optical ports).
Blinks (yellow) The port is receiving or transmitting

data.
Off The port is not connected or is

incorrectly connected.
CRIT On (red) A critical alarm occurs on the NE.
MAJ On (orange) A major alarm occurs on the NE.
MIN On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs on the NE.
USB Ports
Table 2-31 Description of the USB ports
Port Description Connector Type
USB Universal Serial Bus (USB) -

port, to which a USB flash
drive connects for NE data
backup, software upgrades,
and NE configuration
OAM Mini USB port, to which a -

Web LCT connects for NE
maintenance

Clock Ports, Auxiliary Ports, Management Ports. and Alarm Port
Table 2-32 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, management ports. and Alarm Port
NMS/COM Ethernet NM port/NM serial port
EXT NE cascading port
CLK/TOD1 External clock port (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz),

external time port 1, or wayside E1 port RJ45
MON/TOD2 Port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet/External

time port 2
ALMI/ALMO Alarm input/output port
NOTE
l The external clock port, external time port, and wayside E1 port share one physical port. This port can
also transparently transmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes, and synchronous/asynchronous data
overhead bytes. This port, however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at a time.
l External time port 2 and the outdoor cabinet monitoring port share one port physically. This port,
however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at a time.
Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports,
however, are different. Figure 2-28 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.
Figure 2-28 Front view of the RJ45 connector
87654321
Table 2-33 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port
Port Pin Signal
1 Transmitting data (+)
2 Transmitting data (-)
NMS/COM 3 Receiving data (+)
4 Grounding end of the NM serial port
5 Receive end of the NM serial port

Port Pin Signal
6 Receiving data (-)
7 Not defined
8 Transmit end of the NM serial port
Table 2-34 Pin assignments for the EXT port
Port Pin Signal
1 Transmitting data (+)
2 Transmitting data (-)
EXT 3 Receiving data (+)
6 Receiving data (-)
4, 5, 7, 8 Not defined
NOTE
The EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmit
data through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 2-35 provides status explanation for these
indicators.
Table 2-35 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector
LINK (green) On The link is working properly.
Off The link is interrupted.
ACT (yellow) On or blinking The port is transmitting or receiving

data.
Off The port is not transmitting or

receiving data.
NOTE
The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no external
Ethernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, an
Ethernet loop will be formed, causing broadcast storms on the network and affecting DCN communication.
Figure 2-29 shows the two common incorrect connections.

Figure 2-29 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port
1 2 GE1 GE3 GE4
CSHL
TX RX
PROG
SYNC
STAT
LOS1
LOS2
CRIT
ACT
SRV
USB
L/A1
L/A2
1 2 1 2
MAJ
MIN
RST USB STM-1/4 GE
LAN
1 2 GE1 GE3 GE4

CSHL
TX RX
PROG
SYNC
STAT
LOS1
LOS2
CRIT
ACT
SRV
USB
L/A1
L/A2
MAJ 1 2 1 2
MIN
RST USB STM-1/4 GE
The clock port (CLK) and the high-precision time port (TOD1) use different pins of the same
RJ45 connector. The pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port are provided in Table 2-36. The
CLK/TOD1 port can work only in one mode at one time and does not support two or more modes
at the same time.
Table 2-36 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port
Pin Working Mode
External External External External External

Clock Time Time Time Input Time
Input Output (DCLS) Output
(1PPS + (1PPS + (DCLS)
Time Time
Informati Information
on) )
1 Signal input Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined
(-)
2 Signal input Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined
(+)
3 Not defined 1PPS signal 1PPS signal DCLS time DCLS time
input (-) output (-) signal input signal output
(RS-422 (RS-422 (-) (-)
level) level) (RS-422 (RS-422
level) level)
4 Signal output Grounding Grounding Grounding Grounding

(-) end end end end
5 Signal output Grounding Grounding Grounding Grounding

(+) end end end end
6 Not defined 1PPS signal 1PPS signal DCLS time DCLS time
input (+) output (+) signal input signal output
(RS-422 (RS-422 (+) (+)
level) level) (RS-422 (RS-422
level) level)

Pin Working Mode
External External External External External

Clock Time Time Time Input Time
Input Output (DCLS) Output
(1PPS + (1PPS + (DCLS)
Time Time
on) )
7 Not defined Time Time Not defined Not defined

information information
input (-) output (-)
(RS-422 (RS-422
level) level)
8 Not defined Time Time Not defined Not defined

information information
input (+) output (+)
(RS-422 (RS-422
level) level)
NOTE
The pin assignment when the CLK/TOD1 port functions as a wayside E1 service port is the same as that
when the CLK/TOD1 port functions as a clock port.
The time port, and port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet share the MON/TOD2 port physically.
The pin assignments for the MON/TOD2 port are provided in Table 2-37.
Table 2-37 Pin assignments for the MON/TOD2 port
Pin Working Mode
External External External External Port for

Time Time Time Input Time Monitoring
Input Output (DCLS) Output an Outdoor
(1PPS + (1PPS + (DCLS) Cabinet
Time Time
on) )
1 Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined
2 Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined

Pin Working Mode
External External External External Port for

Time Time Time Input Time Monitoring
Input Output (DCLS) Output an Outdoor
(1PPS + (1PPS + (DCLS) Cabinet
Time Time
on) )
3 1PPS signal 1PPS signal DCLS time DCLS time Outdoor

input (-) output (-) signal input signal output cabinet
(RS-422 (RS-422 (-) (-) monitoring
level) level) (RS-422 (RS-422 signal input (-)
level) level) (RS-422
level)
4 Grounding Grounding Grounding Grounding Grounding

end end end end end
5 Grounding Grounding Grounding Grounding Grounding

end end end end end
6 1PPS signal 1PPS signal DCLS time DCLS time Outdoor

input (+) output (+) signal input signal output cabinet
(RS-422 (RS-422 (+) (+) monitoring
level) level) (RS-422 (RS-422 signal input
level) level) (+)
(RS-422
level)
7 Time Time Not defined Not defined Outdoor

information information cabinet
input (-) output (-) monitoring
(RS-422 (RS-422 signal output
level) level) (-)
(RS-422
level)
8 Time Time Not defined Not defined Outdoor

information information cabinet
input (+) output (+) monitoring
(RS-422 (RS-422 signal output
level) level) (+)
(RS-422
level)
Table 2-38 provides the pin assignments for the ALMI/ALMO port.

Table 2-38 Pin assignments for the ALMI/ALMO port
Port Pin Signal
ALMI/ 1 The first external alarm input signal

ALMO
2 Grounding end for the first alarm input signal
3 The second external alarm input signal
4 The third external alarm input signal
5 Grounding end for the third alarm input signal
6 Grounding end for the second alarm input signal
7 Alarm output signal (+)
8 Alarm output signal (-)
Buttons
Table 2-39 Buttons
Button Name Description
RST Warm reset button After this button is pressed, a warm

reset is performed on the board.
Latches
There is a latch near each ejector lever on the front panel of the board. When removing a board,
you can rotate the ejector levers only after pushing the latches to the middle positions. In addition,
rotating the ejector levers triggers the tact switch on the board and then triggers working/
protection switching.
Service Ports
Table 2-40 Description of the service ports on the CSHL
2×STM-1/4 STM-1/4 optical port, or STM-1 LC SFP optical module/SAA

electrical port straight/female SFP electrical
module
GE1(SFP) GE/FE optical port LC SFP optical module
GE2(SFP)
GE1(RJ45) GE electrical ports (fixed) RJ45

GE2(RJ45)
GE3
GE4
NOTE
Two fixed GE electrical ports and two GE/FE optical ports share two GE channels. That is, the two GE1
ports share one GE channel and the two GE2 ports share the other GE channel. Only one of the two ports
that share one GE channel can transmit/receive services at one time.
SFP optical modules are used to provide GE optical ports and STM-1/4 optical ports; one SFP
optical module provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 2-30, in which
TX represents the transmit port and RX represents the receive port.
Figure 2-30 Ports of the SFP optical module
TX RX
The GE electrical ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. Table 2-41
and Table 2-42 provide the pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in different modes.
Table 2-41 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode
Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T
Signal Function Signal Function
1 TX+ Transmitting data BIDA+ Bidirectional data

(+) wire A (+)
2 TX- Transmitting data BIDA- Bidirectional data

(-) wire A (-)
3 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data

wire B (+)
4 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data

wire C (+)
5 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data

wire C (-)
6 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data

wire B (-)

7 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data

wire D (+)
8 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data

wire D (-)
Table 2-42 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode

wire B (+)

wire B (-)

(+) wire A (+)

wire D (+)

wire D (-)

(-) wire A (-)

wire C (+)

wire C (-)
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. The status explanation for the two indicators is the same
as that for the indicators on the RJ45 connector of the NMS/COM port.
2.6.6 Valid Slots

The CSHL can be inserted in slots 15 and 20. For the NMS to manage function units on the
CSHL, the function units are mapped into specific logical boards and allocated proper logical
slots on the NMS.

Figure 2-31 Slots for the CSHL in the IDU chassis
Slot 28 Slot 20 (CSHL)

(FAN)
Slot 15 (CSHL)
Figure 2-32 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHL
Slot 28 Slot 20 (CSHL) Slot 21 (SL4D) Slot 22 (EG4)

(FAN)
Slot 15 (CSHL) Slot 16 (SL4D) Slot 17 (EG4)
Table 2-43 Slot allocation
Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slot 15 > Slot 20

2.6.7 Types of SFP Modules

The GE port and STM-1/4 optical port on the CSHL board support multiple types of SFP
modules.
Table 2-44 Types of SFP modules that FE/GE ports support
Category Part Number Type Wavelength and

Transmission
Distance
Dual-fiber 34060286 1000BASE-SX 850 nm, 0.5 km

bidirectional GE
module 34060473 1000BASE-LX 1310 nm, 10 km
34060298 1000BASE-VX 1310 nm, 40 km
34060513 1550 nm, 40 km
34060360 1000BASE-ZX 1550 nm, 80 km
Single-fiber 34060475 1000BASE-BX-D Transmit wavelength:

bidirectional GE 1490 nm; receive
module wavelength: 1310 nm
10 km
34060470 1000BASE-BX-U Transmit wavelength:

1310 nm; receive
wavelength: 1490 nm
10 km
34060540 1000BASE-BX-D Transmit wavelength:

1490 nm; receive
wavelength: 1310 nm
40 km

1310 nm; receive
wavelength: 1490 nm
40 km
Dual-fiber 34060287 100BASE-FX 1310 nm, 2 km

bidirectional FE
34060281 100BASE-VX 1310 nm, 40 km
34060282 100BASE-ZX 1550 nm, 80 km

bidirectional FE 1550 nm; receive
15 km


Transmission
Distance

1310 nm; receive
wavelength: 1550 nm
15 km
34060329 100BASE-BX-D Transmit: 1550 nm;

receive: 1310 nm
40 km
34060328 100BASE-BX-U Transmit: 1310 nm;

receive: 1550 nm
40 km
Table 2-45 Types of SFP modules that the STM-1/4 optical port supports
Part Number Type
34060287 Ie-1
34060276 S-1.1
34060281 L-1.1
34060282 L-1.2
34100104 STM-1e
34060277 S-4.1
34060280 L-4.1
34060284 L-4.2
2.6.8 Technical Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including the packet switching capacity, cross-
connection capability, performance of Ethernet ports, STM-1/4 ports, clocks, and wayside
service port, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Packet Switching Capacity

The CSHL supports a 37 Gbit/s packet switching capacity.
Cross-Connection Capability
l Supports higher order cross-connections, which are equivalent to 128x128 VC-4s.

l Supports lower order cross-connections, which are equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s.
Ethernet Port Performance

Ethernet port performance complies with IEEE 802.3. The following tables provide the
specifications of GE optical ports, and GE electrical ports.
Table 2-46 GE optical interface performance(two-fiber bidirectional, short-distance

transmission)
Item Performance
Classification code 1000BASE-SX (0.5 km) 1000BASE-LX (10 km)
Nominal wavelength (nm) 850 1310
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 1000
Fiber type Multi-mode Single-mode
Transmission distance (km) 0.5 10
Operating wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355
Average optical output -9 to -3 -9 to -3

power (dBm)
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -17 -20
Overload (dBm) 0 -3
Extinction ratio (dB) 9.5 9.5
Table 2-47 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, long-haul transmission)
Item Performance
Classification code 1000BASE-VX (40 1000BASE-VX (40 1000BASE-ZX (80

km) km) km)
Nominal wavelength (nm) 1310 1550 1550
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 1000 1000 1000
Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode
Transmission distance (km) 40 40 80
Operating wavelength (nm) 1270 to 1350 1480 to 1580 1500 to 1580
Average optical output power -5 to 0 -5 to 0 -2 to +5

(dBm)
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -23 -22 -22

Item Performance

km) km) km)
Overload (dBm) -3 -3 -3
Extinction ratio (dB) 9 9 9
Table 2-48 GE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional)
Item Performance
1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE-

BX-D (10 km) BX-U (10km) BX-D (40 km) BX-U (40km)
Nominal wavelength (nm) Tx: 1490 Tx: 1310 Tx: 1490 Tx: 1310
Rx: 1310 Rx: 1490 Rx: 1310 Rx: 1490
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 1000 1000 1000 1000
Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode
Transmission distance (km) 10 10 40 40
Operating wavelength (nm) Tx: 1480 to 1500 Tx: 1260 to Tx: 1260 to 1360 Tx: 1480 to 1500
Rx: 1260 to 1360 Rx: 1480 to Rx: 1260 to
1360 Rx: 1480 to 1500 1360
1500
Average optical output power -9 to -3 -9 to -3 -3 to +3 -3 to +3

(dBm)
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -19.5 -19.5 -23 -23
Overload (dBm) -3 -3 -3 -3
Extinction ratio (dB) 6 6 6 6
Table 2-49 FE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional)
Item Performance
100BASE-FX 100BASE-LX 100BASE-VX 100BASE-ZX

(2 km) (15 km) (40 km) (80 km)
Nominal wavelength (nm) 1310 1310 1310 1550
Fiber type Multi-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

Item Performance

(2 km) (15 km) (40 km) (80 km)
Operating wavelength (nm) 1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
Average optical output power -19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

(dBm)
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -30 -28 -34 -34
Overload (dBm) -14 -8 -10 -10
Extinction ratio (dB) 10 8.2 10 10.5
Table 2-50 FE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional)
Item Performance
Classification code 100BASE- 100BASE- 100BASE- 100BASE-

BX-D (15 BX-U (15 BX-D (40 BX-U (40
km) km) km) km)
Rx: 1310 Rx: 1550 Rx: 1310 Rx: 1550
Operating wavelength (nm) Tx: 1480 to Tx: 1260 to Tx: 1480 to Tx: 1260 to
1580 1360 1580 1360
Rx: 1260 to Rx: 1480 to Rx: 1260 to Rx: 1480 to
1360 1580 1360 1580
Average optical output -15 to -8 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

power (dBm)
Overload (dBm) -8 -8 -10 -10
Extinction ratio (dB) 8.5 8.5 10 10

Table 2-51 GE electrical interface performance
Item Performance
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)

100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)
Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)

MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)
Interface type RJ45
STM-1 Optical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The
following table provides the typical performance of the interface.
Table 2-52 STM-1 optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional)
Item Performance
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 155520
Classification code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2

fiber fiber fiber fiber
Transmission distance 2 15 40 80
(km)
Operating wavelength 1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
(nm)
Mean launched power -19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

(dBm)
Receiver minimum -30 -28 -34 -34

sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum overload (dBm) -14 -8 -10 -10
Minimum extinction ratio 10 8.2 10 10

(dB)
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980L uses SFP optical modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types
of SFP optical modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission
distances.

STM-1 Electrical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-1 electrical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The
Table 2-53 STM-1 electrical interface performance
Item Performance
Code type CMI
Wire pair in each One coaxial wire pair

transmission direction
Impedance (ohm) 75
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980L uses SFP electrical modules to provide electrical interfaces.

The performance of the STM-4 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957. The following
table provides the typical performance of the interface.
Table 2-54 STM-4 optical interface performance
Item Performance
Classification code S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2

fiber fiber fiber
Mean launched power (dBm) -15 to -8 -3 to +2 -3 to +2
Minimum receiver sensitivity -28 -28 -28

(dBm)
Minimum overload (dBm) -8 -8 -8
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 8.2 10 10

NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980L uses SFP optical modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different
types of SFP optical modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and
transmission distances.
Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance

Clock timing and synchronization performance meets related ITU-T Recommendations.
Table 2-55 Clock timing and synchronization performance
Item Performance
External synchronization 2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §9), or 2048 kHz
source (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §13)
Frequency accuracy Compliant with ITU-T G.813
Pull-in and pull-out ranges
Noise generation
Noise tolerance
Noise transfer
Transient response and

holdover performance
Mechanical Behavior
Table 2-56 Mechanical behavior
Item Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D) 23.60 mm x 378.40 mm x 205.70 mm
Weight 1.15 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 49.0 W
2.7 ISM6
ISM6 boards are new-generation dual-channel IF boards. Each ISM6 board provides two IF
ports and is hardware ready for the MIMO function.


The functional version of ISM6 boards is SL91.
2.7.2 Application
An ISM6 board provides two IF ports. The two IF ports can be used to implement XPIC, 1+1
HSB/FD/SD, or PLA/EPLA in one microwave direction, or provide radio links in different
directions.
Scenario Where Two IF Ports Are Applied in the Same Microwave Direction
ISM6 boards support XPIC/PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ between intra-board ports as well as 1+1 HSB/
FD/SD between intra- and inter-board ports. The 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection between inter-
board ports is supported only when XPIC is enabled between intra-board ports.
Figure 2-33 Scenario where two IF ports are applied in the same microwave direction
E1/STM-1 Service Service

E1/STM-1
board board
FE/GE Control ISM6 Control FE/GE
ISM6
board board
STM-1/4
STM-1/4
GE GE
OptiX RTN 900
Scenario Where Two IF Ports Are Applied in Different Microwave Directions

An ISM6 board can transmit packets in two microwave directions through its two IF ports.

Figure 2-34 Scenario where two IF ports are applied in different microwave directions

ISM6 boards receive and transmit 2xIF signals, provide management channels to ODUs, and
supply -48 V power to ODUs.
Table 2-57 lists the functions and features supported by ISM6 boards. ISM6 boards implement
Ethernet and packet service functions by working with packet switching units on system control,
switching, and timing boards.
NOTE
ISM6 boards do not support long-haul transmission.
Table 2-57 Functions and features that ISM6 boards support
Basic functions l Receives and transmits 2xIF signals.

l Provides management channels to ODUs.
l Supplies -48 V power to ODUs.
Radio types l Integrated IP radio

l SDH radio
NOTE
Integrated IP radio is compatible with Hybrid radio and Packet
radio.

Service types in Integrated IP l Native E1 + Ethernet

radio mode l Native STM-1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet
services that are encapsulated into pseudo wire emulation
edge-to-edge (PWE3) packets.
A maximum of two STM-1 services are supported for one
board.
Service types in SDH radio mode l STM-1

l 2xSTM-1
NOTE
If one IF port provides 2xSTM-1 radio, the other IF port can
provide only integrated IP radio (native E1+Ethernet).
Running modes l IS6 mode, which is the default mode. In this mode,
the modulation schemes QPSK-4096QAM and the
two extended modulation schemes QPSK Strong
and 16QAM Strong are supported. The 112 MHz
channel spacing is supported, and in this channel
spacing, the modulation schemes QPSK-512QAM
are supported.
l IS3 mode. In this mode, the modulation schemes
QPSK-2048QAM and the four extended
modulation schemes QPSK Strong, 16QAM
Strong, and 512QAM Light, and 1024QAM Light
are supported. ISM6 boards can interconnect only
with ISV3 boards or the RTN 905.
l IS2 mode. In this mode, the modulation schemes
QPSK-256QAM are supported. ISM6 boards can
interconnect only with ISU2/ISX2 boards.
NOTE
Compared with QPSK/16QAM, QPSK Strong/16QAM
Strong has stronger FEC capability, and therefore has better
receiver sensitivity. It has, however, less air interface
bandwidth. Compared with 512QAM/1024QAM, 512QAM
Light/1024QAM Light has weaker FEC capability, and
therefore has worse receiver sensitivity. It has, however,
higher air interface bandwidth.

Modulation schemes l IS6 mode: QPSK Strong/QPSK/16QAM Strong/

16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM/
512QAM/1024QAM/2048QAM/4096QAM
l IS3 mode: QPSK Strong/QPSK/16QAM Strong/
16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM/
512QAM/512QAM Light/1024QAM/1024QAM
Light/2048QAM
l IS2 mode: QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM
NOTE
l In IS3 mode, 2048QAM is supported only when AM is
enabled.
l The highest-order modulation scheme that can be used by
an IF port is determined based on factors such as the ODU
frequency band, XPIC status, and channel spacing. For
details, see 2.7.7 Technical Specifications.
112 MHz channel spacing Supported (only in IS6 mode)

NOTE
If a channel spacing of 112 MHz is configured for one port of
the two ports on an ISM6 board, the channel spacing of the
other port automatically changes to 112 MHz. Similarly, when
the channel spacing of one port of the two ports on an ISM6
board changes from 112 MHz to another value, the channel
spacing of the other port changes to the new value
accordingly.
Backplane bus bandwidth l 2.5 Gbit/s for slots 1 to 2

l 2.5 Gbit/s for slots 3 to 6 when EPLA is supported
and 1 Gbit/s for slots 3 to 6 when EPLA is not
supported
l 1 Gbit/s for slots 7 to 14
MIMO Hardware ready
Automatic transmit power control Supported

(ATPC)
Adaptive modulation (AM) Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode
E1 priorities Supported only if native TDM services transmitted

over Integrated IP radio are E1 services
Compression of Ethernet frame Supported

headers
XPIC Supported (only between two IF ports on a board)
Radio working mode See ISM6 Board Technical Specifications.

Link protection 1+1 HSB/FD/ Supported

SD protection NOTE
(HSB stands for l 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection is supported between intra-
hot standby, FD board ports.
stands for l 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection is supported between inter-
frequency board ports only when XPIC is enabled between intra-
diversity, and board ports.
SD stands for
space diversity.)
N+1 protection Supported
Link Supported
aggregation
groups (LAGs)
at air interfaces
Physical link Supported

aggregation NOTE
(PLA) Slots 1 and 2 do not support EPLA.
Do not support physical link aggregation.
TDM service protection Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP)
K byte pass-through Supported
Ethernet service functions See Table 2-58.
Multiprotocol Label Switching Refer to the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions

(MPLS) functions provided in the sections about system control,
PWE3 functions
Physical layer Clock source Air interface clock

clock
Clock l Protection implemented by providing clock sources
protection with different priorities
l Protection implemented by running the
Synchronization Status Message (SSM) protocol
l Protection implemented by running the extended
SSM protocol
IEEE 1588v2 Time Supported

clock synchronization
Frequency Not supported

synchronization

Precision Time l The IF ports of ISV3 boards can work as PTP ports
Protocol (PTP) if the NEs housing the boards work in ordinary
port clock (OC) or boundary clock (BC) mode.
l The IF ports of ISV3 boards can work as PTP BC
ports if the NEs housing the boards work in TC+BC
(TC stands for transparent clock) mode.
Data Inband DCN Supports inband DCN. DCN bandwidth is

communication configurable.
network (DCN)
Outband DCN l Supports one data communications channel (DCC)
that is composed of three DCC bytes for each
channel in Integrated IP radio mode.
l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3
bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes for each
channel in SDH radio mode.
Operation and Loopback l Supports inloops and outloops at IF ports.

management l Supports inloops and outloops at composite
(COMP) ports.
Cold and warm Supported

resetting
In-service field Supported

programmable
gate array
(FPGA) loading
Pseudo random Supported

binary sequence
(PRBS) test at
IF ports
Manufacturer Supported
information
query
Power Supported
consumption
query
Temperature Supported
monitoring
Voltage Supported
monitoring

Ethernet Native Ethernet l E-Line services

services services – Port-based E-line services
– VLAN-based E-line services
– E-Line services carried by QinQ links
l E-LAN services
– E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
– E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
– E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
PWE3 Ethernet l E-Line services carried by PWs

services l E-Aggr services carried by PWs
Ethernet ring protection switching Supported (complies with ITU-T G.8032 v1/v2)
(ERPS)
Operation, administration, and l Supports ETH OAM functions that comply with
management (OAM) IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah.
l Supports frame loss measurement, frame delay
measurement, and delay variation measurement
functions that comply with ITU-T Y.1731.
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Supports Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
that runs only Common and Internal Spanning Tree
(CIST) instances. This type of MSTP provides the same
functions as Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).
Quality of service (QoS) Refer to the description of QoS functions provided in

the sections about system control, switching, and
timing boards.
Remote network monitoring Supported

(RMON)
2.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

This section describes how the function units of an ISM6 board process Integrated IP radio IF
signals.
NOTE
ISM6 boards process signals transmitted over SDH radio in the same way as they process signals transmitted
over Integrated IP radio. The only differences are with regard to the microwave frame structure and
processed service types.

Function Block Diagram
Figure 2-35 ISM6 board function block diagram

Backplane
SMODEM unit HSM signal bus

Paired board
ODU control signal
processing
Service bus
Cross-connect unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
Logic
unit
processing
Combiner
interface
System control and

IF
unit
unit
Microwave Overhead communication unit

IF
frame signal MODEM bus

unit
Ethernet GE bus
(Digital
processing Packet switching unit
XPIC)
processing
Combiner
unit
interface
IF
unit
unit
IF
System control and

communication unit
Control bus
Logic
SMODEM unit control unit
-48 V power
supplied to an ODU Power -48 V 1
+3.3 V power supplied to supply
+3.3 V power supplied to
+3.3 V
the monitoring circuit
Clock signal provided to Clock

System clock signal
other units on the board unit
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 2-59 Signal processing in the receive direction of an ISM6 board
Step Function Unit Processing Flow
1 Combiner interface Separates ODU control signals from microwave service

unit signals.
2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates ODU control signals.

l Transmits ODU control signals to the system control
and communication unit.
3 IF processing unit Filters signals, performs analog/digital conversion, and

transmits the converted signals to the modem unit.

4 Modem unit l If XPIC is disabled, performs digital demodulation.

l If XPIC is enabled, performs XPIC operations for IF
signals.
l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs forward error correction (FEC) decoding
and generates alarms, if any.
5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers and generates

alarms and performance events, if any.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generates
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates
l Detects changes in both ATPC messages and response
messages, and reports the changes to the system
control and communication unit over the control bus.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
(including F1 and serial bytes), and DCC bytes from
microwave frames, and transmits the bytes to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals to specific positions in VC-4s
and transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit
(if native TDM services transmitted over Integrated
IP radio are E1 services).
l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit (if
native TDM services transmitted over Integrated IP
radio are STM-1 services).
l Extracts Ethernet signals from the microwave service
signals, and transmits the Ethernet signals to the
Ethernet processing unit.
6 Ethernet processing l Processes GE signals received from the MUX/

unit DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the packet switching
unit.
7 Logic processing l Processes clock signals.

unit l Transmits overhead signals to the system control and
communication unit.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the cross-connect unit.

NOTE
In inter-boards 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to
the MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals
for subsequent processing.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 2-60 Signal processing in the transmit direction of an ISM6 board


unit l Processes overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.
2 Ethernet processing l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit.

unit l Processes GE signals.
3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that are
from the logic processing unit (if native TDM services
transmitted over Integrated IP radio are E1 services).
l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals from the logic
processing unit to form STM-1 signals (if native TDM
services transmitted over Integrated IP radio are
STM-1 services).
l Sets overheads for microwave frames.
l Combines Ethernet signals, E1/STM-1 service
signals, and microwave frame overheads to form
microwave frames.
4 Modem unit l Performs FEC coding.

l Performs digital modulation.
5 IF processing unit l Performs digital/analog conversion.

l Filters signals.
l Amplifies signals.
6 SMODEM unit Modulates ODU control signals from the system control
7 Combiner interface Combines ODU control signals, microwave service

unit signals, and -48 V power signals, and transmits the
combined signals through an IF cable.
Control Signal Processing

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the

control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus on the backplane, and supplies -48 V power to an ODU after performing DC-
DC conversion.
supply bus on the backplane, and supplies +3.3 V power to other units on the ISV3 board
after performing DC-DC conversion.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
2.7.5 Front Panel

An ISM6 board has indicators, two IF port, and labels on its front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 2-36 Front panel of an ISM6 board

ISM6
! WARNING-48V OUTPUT:
STAT
IF1 IF2
SRV
DISCONNECT IF CABLE FROM

IDU BEFORE CONMECTING
IF CABLE TO ODU
ACT1 LINK2 ACT2

LINK1
Indicators
Table 2-61 Status explanation for indicators on an ISM6 board

properly.



been reported.

been reported.

board.

standby board.

board.

standby board.

Ports
Table 2-62 Description of the ports

Port Description Connector Type Corresponding
Cable
IF1 IF port TNC IF jumpera
IF2 IF port TNC IF jumpera
NOTE
l a: If a 5D IF cable is used, you can use a TNC-to-TNC connector to replace an IF jumper. When installing
an IF cable, connect one end of the cable to the ODU and then connect the other end of the cable to an IF
port on an IF board.
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches this
level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.
The operation warning label instructs you to connect the IF cable to the ODU before you connect
it to the IDU.
2.7.6 Valid Slots

An ISM6 board can be inserted in any slot 1 to 14. Its logical slot on the network management
system (NMS) is the same as its physical slot.
NOTE
An IDU can house a maximum of 10 ISM6 boards.
Figure 2-37 Slots for ISM6 boards in a chassis
Slot 13 (ISM6) Slot 14 (ISM6)
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 15

An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but has a logical slot on the NMS.
l IF1 port: The logical slot ID of an ODU is equal to the logical slot ID of the connected IF
board plus 50.
l IF2 port: The logical slot ID of an ODU is equal to the logical slot ID of the connected IF
board plus 70.
Figure 2-38 Logical slots of ISV3 boards on the NMS
Slot 63 (ODU) Slot 83 (ODU) Slot 64 (ODU) Slot 84 (ODU)
Slot 28 Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 22

(FAN) Slot 7 (ISM6) Slot 8 (ISM6)
Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17
Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 7 and 9 > Slots 8 and 10 > Slots
11 and 13 > Slots 12 and 14 > Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 4
and 6

Use two IF boards in paired slots to configure an inter-board 1+1 FD/SD IF protection group.
Specifically, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 5, slots 4 and 6, slots 7 and 9, slots 8 and 10, slots 11 and
13, and slots 12 and 14 are paired slots respectively.

This section describes board specifications, including running modes, radio working modes, IF
performance, modem performance, mechanical behaviors, and power consumption.
2.7.7.1 Microwave Working Modes(short haul)

NOTE
The channel spacings supported by the OptiX RTN 980L comply with ETSI standards. Channel spacings
14/28/56 MHz apply to most frequency bands; but channel spacings 13.75/27.5/55 MHz apply to the 18 GHz
frequency band.
Table 2-64 Application scenarios of each running mode
Running Mode Application Scenario
IS6 mode IS6 mode provides high bandwidth and large capacity, which is the
default mode. In this mode, the modulation schemes
QPSK-4096QAM and the two extended modulation schemes QPSK
Strong and 16QAM Strong are supported. The 112 MHz channel
spacing is supported,, and in this channel spacing, the modulation
schemes QPSK-512QAM are supported.
The newly developed XMC-3 ODU will support the IS6 mode.
IS3 mode IS3 mode provides large capacity. In this mode, the modulation
schemes QPSK-2048QAM and the four extended modulation
schemes QPSK Strong, 16QAM Strong, and 512QAM Light, and
1024QAM Light are supported. ISM6 boards can interconnect only
with ISV3 boards or the RTN 905.
ISM6 boards working in IS3 mode support the same radio working
modes as ISV3 boards. For information about the supported radio
working modes, see ISV3 Microwave Working Modes(short
haul).
ISM6 boards in IS3 mode can work with the XMC-2, XMC-2H, and
XMC-3 ODU.

Running Mode Application Scenario
IS2 mode IS2 mode provides standard capacity. In this mode, the modulation
schemes QPSK-256QAM are supported. ISM6 boards can
interconnect only with ISU2/ISX2 boards.
l ISM6 boards working in IS2 mode and with XPIC disabled
support the same radio working modes as ISU2 boards. For
information about the supported radio working modes, see ISU2
Technical Specifications.
l ISM6 boards working in IS2 mode and with XPIC enabled support
the same radio working modes as ISX2 boards. For information
about the supported radio working modes, see ISX2 Technical
Specifications.
ISM6 boards in IS2 mode can work with the XMC-2, XMC-2H, and
XMC-3 ODU.
2.7.7.2 Receiver Sensitivity (Short Haul)

The ISV3 board supports two running modes: IS6, IS3 and IS2.
l When the ISM6 board runs in the IS3 mode, the receiver sensitivity for the ISM6 board are
the same as those for the ISV3 board. For details, see 2.8.7.4 Receiver Sensitivity (Short
Haul).
l When the ISM6 board runs in the IS2 mode and XPIC is disabled, the receiver sensitivity
for the ISM6 board are the same as those for the ISU2 board. For details, see 2.9.7.2
Receiver Sensitivity.
l When the ISM6 board runs in the IS2 mode and XPIC is enabled, the receiver sensitivity
for the ISM6 board are the same as those for the ISX2 board. For details, see 2.10.7.2
l The newly developed XMC-3 ODU will support the IS6 mode.
2.7.7.3 IF Performance
The IF performance includes the performance of the IF signal and the performance of the
RFU O&M signal.
Table 2-65 IF performance
Item Performance
IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 350
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) 140
RFU O&M signal Modulation scheme ASK
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 5.5

Item Performance
Interface impedance (ohm) 50
2.7.7.4 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem

The baseband signal processing performance of the modem indicates the FEC coding scheme
and the performance of the baseband time domain adaptive equalizer.
Table 2-66 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem
Item Performance
Encoding mode Low-density parity check code (LDPC) encoding.
Adaptive time- Supported.

domain equalizer for
baseband signals
2.7.7.5 Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

An ISU2 board occupies one slot. Its power consumption is less than 41 W.
Mechanical Behaviors
Table 2-67 Mechanical behaviors
Item Performance
Dimensions (H x W 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

x D)
Weight 0.8 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 41 W
2.8 ISV3
ISV3 boards are multi-purpose IF boards that support Integrated IP radio, SDH radio, and DC-
I power distribution. Once the appropriate license files are loaded, the boards also support cross
polarization interference cancellation (XPIC). ISV3 boards apply to long- and short-haul
microwave service transmission.


The functional version of ISV3 boards is SL91.
2.8.2 Application
ISV3 boards apply to long- and short-haul microwave service transmission. ISV3 boards can
function as SDH IF boards to transmit SDH radio services, or as integrated IP radio IF boards
to transmit integrated IP radio services (native E1+Ethernet or native STM-1+Ethernet). To
increase transmission capacity, ISV3 boards can also support the XPIC function.
NOTE
Compared with ISU2/ISX2 boards, ISV3 boards support 512QAM or higher-order modulation schemes.
The scenarios where ISV3 boards are used for long- and short-haul microwave service transmission are
similar. The difference is as follows:
l When ISV3 boards are used for long-haul microwave service transmission, ISV3 boards need to work
with RFU-NonSDs/RFU-SDs.
l When ISV3 boards are used for short-haul microwave service transmission, ISV3 boards need to
work with ODUs.
Functioning as SDH IF Boards

If applied to OptiX RTN 980L NEs building TDM radio networks, ISV3 boards function as
large-capacity SDH IF boards to transmit TDM services.
Figure 2-39 Application scenario of ISV3 boards with XPIC disabled (1)
ISV3 CSHL ISV3
TDM radio network
E1/STM-1 TDM TDM

Service ISV3 ISV3 Service E1/STM-1
board CSHL CSHL board
STM-1/STM-4
STM-1/STM-4
OptiX RTN 980L

NOTE
l When working in SDH radio mode, ISV3 boards transmit 1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1 SDH radio services.
l If a TDM radio network needs to transmit a small number of FE/GE services, these services must be
encapsulated into TDM services by EMS6/EFP8 boards before transmission.
l To expand the capacity of an SDH radio hop, use ISV3 boards with XPIC enabled to transmit TDM
services, as shown in Figure 2-40.
Figure 2-40 Application scenario of ISV3 boards with XPIC enabled (2)
E1/STM-1 TDM ISV3 TDM

ISV3
Service Service E1/STM-1
board board
CSHL XPIC cable XPIC cable CSHL
STM-1/4
ISV3 ISV3 STM-1/4
OptiX RTN 980L
Functioning as Integrated IP radio IF Boards

ISV3 boards also apply to OptiX RTN 980L NEs to transmit native E1 services, native STM-1
services, native Ethernet services, native MPLS/PWE3 services, or a combination of these
services over Integrated IP radio.

Figure 2-41 Application scenario of ISV3 boards with XPIC disabled (1)
ISV3 CSHL ISV3
IP radio network
E1/STM-1
FE/GE board board
ISV3 ISV3 FE/GE
STM-1/4 CSHL CSHL
STM-1/4
GE
GE
OptiX RTN 980L
NOTE
l In the preceding figure, if transmitted over Integrated IP radio, E1 services can be native E1 services
or CES/ATM E1 services, Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or ETH PWE3 services,
and STM-1 services must be native STM-1 services.
l ISV3 boards will transmit native E1 services only when these boards work in native E1+Ethernet mode,
and will transmit native STM-1 services only when these boards work in native STM-1+Ethernet mode.
l To expand the capacity of an Integrated IP radio hop, use ISV3 boards with XPIC enabled, as shown
in Figure 2-42.

Figure 2-42 Application scenario of ISV3 boards with XPIC enabled (2)
E1/STM-1
E1/STM-1
Service ISV3 Service
FE/GE ISV3
board board FE/GE
STM-1/4 CSHL XPIC cable XPIC cable CSHL
STM-1/4
GE ISV3 ISV3 GE
OptiX RTN 980L

ISV3 boards receive and transmit 1xIF signals, provide management channels to RFU-NonSDs/
RFU-SDs/ODUs, and supply -48 V power to RFU-NonSDs/RFU-SDs/ODUs. When the XPIC
function is enabled, ISV3 boards also implement XPIC for IF signals by transmitting and
receiving XPIC reference signals.
Table 2-68 lists the functions and features supported by ISV3 boards. ISV3 boards implement
Ethernet and packet service functions by working with packet switching units on system control,
Table 2-68 Functions and features that ISV3 boards support

Feature
Long Haul Short Haul
Basic functions l Receives and transmits 1xIF l Receives and transmits 1xIF
signals. signals.
l Provides management l Provides management
channels to RFU-NonSDs/ channels to ODUs.
RFU-SDs. l Supplies -48 V power to
l Supplies -48 V power to ODUs.
RFU-NonSDs/RFU-SDs.
Radio types l Integrated IP radio

l SDH radio
NOTE
Integrated IP radio is compatible with Hybrid radio and Packet radio.


Feature
Running modes l LH ACCP mode l IS2 mode, in which ISV3

boards can work with ISU2/
ISX2 boards.
l IS3 mode.
For differences between the two
modes, see 2.8.7.3 Microwave
Working Modes(short haul).
Modulation schemes Supports the following Supports the following

modulation schemes: modulation schemes:
l QPSK l QPSK
l 16QAM l 16QAM
l 32QAM l 32QAM
l 64QAM l 64QAM
l 128QAM l 128QAM
l 256QAM l 256QAM
l 512QAM l 512QAM
l 1024QAM l 1024QAM
l 2048QAM (AM enabled)
Flexible FEC Supports the following flexible Supports the following flexible
modulation schemes FEC modulation schemes: FEC modulation schemes:
l QPSK Strong l QPSK Strong
l 16QAM Strong l 16QAM Strong
l 512QAM Light l 512QAM Light
Compared with QPSK/16QAM, l 1024QAM Light
QPSK Strong/16QAM Strong Compared with QPSK/16QAM,
has stronger FEC capability, and QPSK Strong/16QAM Strong
therefore has better receiver has stronger FEC capability, and
sensitivity. It has, however, less therefore has better receiver
air interface bandwidth. sensitivity. It has, however, less
Compared with 512QAMM, air interface bandwidth.
512QAM Light has weaker FEC Compared with 512QAM/
capability, and therefore has 1024QAM, 512QAM Light/
worse receiver sensitivity. It has, 1024QAM Light has weaker
however, higher air interface FEC capability, and therefore has
bandwidth. worse receiver sensitivity. It has,
however, higher air interface
bandwidth.


Feature
Service types in l Native E1 + Ethernet l Native E1 + Ethernet

Integrated IP radio l Native STM-1 + Ethernet(A l Native STM-1 + Ethernet
mode maximum of two STM-1s are NOTE
supported.) l Ethernet services can be native
NOTE Ethernet services or packet
Ethernet services can be native services that are encapsulated
Ethernet services or packet services into pseudo wire emulation
that are encapsulated into pseudo edge-to-edge (PWE3) packets.
wire emulation edge-to-edge l Only one STM-1 is supported in
(PWE3) packets. IS2 mode, and a maximum of
two STM-1s are supported in
IS3 mode.
Service types in SDH l STM-1

radio mode l 2xSTM-1
Backplane bus 1 Gbit/s

bandwidth
Automatic transmit Supported

power control
(ATPC)
Adaptive modulation Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode

(AM)
E1 priorities Supported only if native TDM services transmitted over Integrated

IP radio are E1 services
Compression of Supported
Ethernet frame
headers
XPIC Supported
Radio working mode See 2.8.7.1 Microwave Work See 2.8.7.3 Microwave
Modes (Long Haul). Working Modes(short haul).


Feature
Link 1+1 Supports 1+1 FD. Supported

protectio HSB/
n FD/SD
protectio
n (HSB
stands
for hot
standby,
FD
stands
for
frequenc
y
diversity
, and SD
stands
for space
diversity
.)
Enhance Supported
d N+1
protectio
n and N
+1
protectio
n
Link Supported
aggregat
ion
groups
(LAGs)
at air
interface
s
Physical Supported
link NOTE
aggregat Slots 1 and 2 do not support EPLA.
ion
(PLA/
EPLA)
TDM service Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP)

protection


Feature
Ethernet service See Table 2-69.

functions
Multiprotocol Label Refer to the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided in the

Switching (MPLS) sections about system control, switching, and timing boards.
functions
PWE3 functions
Physical Clock Air interface clock

layer source
clock
Clock l Protection implemented by running the Synchronization Status
protectio Message (SSM) protocol
n l Protection implemented by running the extended SSM protocol
IEEE Time Supported

1588v2 synchron
clock ization
Frequen Not supported

cy
synchron
ization
Precisio l The IF ports of ISV3 boards can work as PTP ports if the NEs
n Time housing the boards work in ordinary clock (OC) or boundary clock
Protocol (BC) mode.
(PTP) l The IF ports of ISV3 boards can work as PTP BC ports if the NEs
port housing the boards work in TC+BC (TC stands for transparent
clock) mode.
Data Inband Supports inband DCN. DCN bandwidth is configurable.

commun DCN
ication
network Outband l Supports one data communications channel (DCC) that is
(DCN) DCN composed of three DCC bytes for each channel in Integrated IP
radio mode.
l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3 bytes, D4-D12
bytes, or D1-D12 bytes for each channel in SDH radio mode.
Operatio Loopbac l Supports inloops and outloops at IF ports.

n and k l Supports inloops and outloops at composite (COMP) ports.
manage
ment Cold and Supported
warm
resetting


Feature
In- Supported
service
field
program
mable
gate
array
(FPGA)
loading
Pseudo Supported
random
binary
sequence
(PRBS)
test at IF
ports
Manufac Supported
turer
informat
ion
query
Power Supported
consump
tion
query
Tempera Supported
ture
monitori
ng
Voltage Supported
monitori
ng

Ethernet Native Ethernet l E-Line services

services services – Port-based E-line services
l E-LAN services

Ethernet ring protection switching Supported (complies with ITU-T G.8032 v1/v2)
(ERPS)
Operation, administration, and l Supports ETH OAM functions that comply with
management (OAM) IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah.
l Supports frame loss measurement, frame delay
measurement, and delay variation measurement
functions that comply with ITU-T Y.1731.
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Supports Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
that runs only Common and Internal Spanning Tree
(CIST) instances. This type of MSTP provides the same
functions as Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).
Quality of service (QoS) Refer to the description of QoS functions provided in

the sections about system control, switching, and
timing boards.
Remote network monitoring Supported

(RMON)

This section describes how the function units of an ISV3 board process Integrated IP radio IF
signals.
NOTE
ISV3 boards process signals transmitted over SDH radio in the same way as they process signals transmitted
over Integrated IP radio. The only differences are with regard to the microwave frame structure and
processed service types.

Figure 2-43 ISV3 board function block diagram

Backplane
SMODEM unit HSM signal bus

Paired board
RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/
processing
ODU control signal Service bus
Cross-connect unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
Logic
unit
processing
Combiner
interface System control and
IF
unit
Microwave MODEM
unit
Overhead communication unit
IF
frame signal unit bus
Ethernet GE bus
unit
Paired XPIC board
XPIC signal
Control bus System control and

communication unit
Logic
control unit
-48 V power supplied to an

RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/ODU Power -48 V 1
+3.3 V
Clock signal provided to Clock

System clock signal
Table 2-70 Signal processing in the receive direction of an ISV3 board
1 Combiner interface Separates RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/ODU control signals

unit from microwave service signals.
2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/ODU control

signals.
l Transmits RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/ODU control
signals to the system control and communication unit.

3 IF processing unit l Filters microwave service signals.

l If XPIC is disabled, converts microwave service
signals into digital signals and transmits these signals
to the modem unit.
l If XPIC is enabled:
– Splits microwave service signals into two channels
of signals, converts one channel of signals into
digital signals and transmits them to the modem
unit, and transmits the other channel of signals to
the paired board as XPIC signals.
– Converts XPIC signals from the paired board into
digital signals and transmits the digital signals to
the modem unit.
4 Modem unit l If XPIC is disabled, performs digital demodulation.

l If XPIC is enabled:
– Performs digital demodulation using XPIC IF
signals from the paired board as reference signals.
– Performs XPIC operations for IF signals.
l Performs forward error correction (FEC) decoding
and generates alarms, if any.


l Detects changes in both ATPC messages and response
messages, and reports the changes to the system
control and communication unit over the control bus.
(including F1 and serial bytes), and DCC bytes from
microwave frames, and transmits the bytes to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals to specific positions in VC-4s
and transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit
(if native TDM services transmitted over Integrated
IP radio are E1 services).
l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit (if
native TDM services transmitted over Integrated IP
radio are STM-1 services).
l Extracts Ethernet signals from the microwave service
signals, and transmits the Ethernet signals to the
Ethernet processing unit.
6 Ethernet processing l Processes GE signals received from the MUX/

unit DEMUX unit.
unit.

unit l Transmits overhead signals to the system control and
communication unit.
NOTE
In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent
processing.

Table 2-71 Signal processing in the transmit direction of an ISV3 board


from the logic processing unit (if native TDM services
transmitted over Integrated IP radio are E1 services).
l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals from the logic
processing unit to form STM-1 signals (if native TDM
services transmitted over Integrated IP radio are
STM-1 services).
l Sets overheads for microwave frames.
l Combines Ethernet signals, E1/STM-1 service
signals, and microwave frame overheads to form
microwave frames.
4 Modem unit l Performs FEC coding.

5 IF processing unit l Performs digital/analog conversion.

l Performs analog modulation.
l Filters signals.
6 SMODEM unit Modulates RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/ODU control signals

from the system control and communication unit.
7 Combiner interface Combines RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/ODU control signals,

unit microwave service signals, and -48 V power signals, and
transmits the combined signals through an IF cable.


Power Supply Unit

supply bus on the backplane, and supplies -48 V power to an RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/ODU
supply bus on the backplane, and supplies +3.3 V power to other units on the ISV3 board
Clock Unit
2.8.5 Front Panel

An ISV3 board has indicators, XPIC signal ports, one IF port, one RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/ODU
power switch, and labels on its front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 2-44 Front panel of an ISV3 board

X-IN X-OUT ODU-PWR
ISV3
WARNING
I O
IF
STAT
XPIC
-48V OUTPUT
ODU
LINK
RMT
ACT
SRV
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE

DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
PULL
Indicators
Table 2-72 Status explanation for indicators on an ISV3 board
XPIC On (green) XPIC input signals are

normal.
On (red) XPIC input signals are lost.
Off XPIC is disabled.

properly.



been reported.

been reported.
ODU On (green) The RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/

ODU is working properly.
On (red) The RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/

ODU has reported a critical
or major alarm, or was not
powered on.
On (yellow) The RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/

ODU has reported a minor
alarm.
Blinks on (yellow) and off at Antennas are not well

300 ms intervals aligned.
Off The RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/

ODU is offline.
RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment has

reported a defect.

of defects.
ACT On (green) In a 1+1 protected system, the

board.

standby board.

Ports

Cable
IF IF port TNC IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa RFU-NonSD/RFU- - -
SD/ODU power
switch
X-IN XPIC signal input SMA XPIC cable

port
X-OUT XPIC signal output SMA

port
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.
Labels
The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.
The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
2.8.6 Valid Slots

An ISV3 board can be inserted in any of slots 1 to 14. Its logical slot on the network management

Figure 2-45 Slots for ISV3 boards in a chassis
Slot 13 (ISV3) Slot 14 (ISV3)
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 15
An RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/ODU is not allocated a physical slot but has a logical slot on the
NMS. The logical slot ID of an RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/ODU is equal to the logical slot ID of
the connected IF board plus 50.

Figure 2-46 Logical slots of ISV3 boards on the NMS
Slot 63 (RFU/RFU-SD/ODU) Slot 64 (RFU/RFU-SD/ODU)

(FAN) Slot 7 (ISV3) Slot 8 (ISV3)
Item Description
12 and 14 > Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and
2
Use two IF boards in paired slots to configure a 1+1 FD/SD IF protection group. Specifically,
slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 5, slots 4 and 6, slots 7 and 9, slots 8 and 10, slots 11 and 13, and slots
12 and 14 are paired slots respectively.
When implementing XPIC, one ISV3 pair must be installed adjacent to each other in the same
row or column.

This section describes board specifications, including running modes, radio working modes, IF
performance, modem performance, mechanical behaviors, and power consumption.

2.8.7.1 Microwave Work Modes (Long Haul)

The microwave work mode refers to the combination of the channel spacing and modulation
scheme.
NOTE
The LH ACCP mode is the IF running mode when ISV3 is used in Long haul microwave transmission.
Table 2-75 Service capacity in SDH microwave mode
Channel Spacing (MHz) Modulation Scheme Service Capacity
28 (27.5) 128QAM STM-1
56 (55) 128QAM 2 x STM-1

NOTE
The product support same SDH microwave work modes regardless of whether the XPIC function is enabled or disabled.
Table 2-76 Service capacity in integrated IP microwave mode (LH ACCP mode, XPIC disabled)
Channel Modulation Maximum Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

Spacing Scheme Number of
(MHz) E1s (STM-1) Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
in Hybrid Compressio Frame Frame Frame
Microwave n Header Header Header
Compressio Compressio Compressio
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
28 QPSK Strong 15 35 to 44 35 to 54 35 to 76 36 to 107
28 QPSK 18 41 to 51 41 to 63 41 to 89 42 to 125
28 16QAM 33 70 to 89 71 to 109 72 to 154 73 to 217

Strong
28 16QAM 38 82 to 104 83 to 128 84 to 180 86 to 253
28 32QAM 49 105 to 134 106 to 163 108 to 231 110 to 324
28 64QAM 59 126 to 160 127 to 196 129 to 277 131 to 389
28 128QAM 75 (1) 157 to 198 158 to 243 160 to 342 163 to 481
28 256QAM 75 (1) 178 to 225 179 to 275 181 to 389 185 to 546
28 512QAM 75 (1) 190 to 240 191 to 294 194 to 415 197 to 583
28 512QAM 75 (1) 202 to 256 203 to 313 206 to 441 210 to 620
Light
28 1024QAM 75 (1) 213 to 270 215 to 330 217 to 466 221 to 654


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
40 QPSK 27 59 to 75 60 to 92 60 to 130 62 to 183
40 16QAM 48 102 to 129 103 to 158 104 to 223 106 to 313

Strong
40 16QAM 56 119 to 151 120 to 185 122 to 261 124 to 367
40 32QAM 74 (1) 158 to 200 159 to 245 161 to 345 164 to 485
40 64QAM 75 (1) 188 to 238 189 to 291 192 to 411 195 to 577
40 128QAM 75 (1) 222 to 282 224 to 344 227 to 486 231 to 682
40 256QAM 75 (1) 257 to 325 259 to 398 262 to 561 267 to 788
40 512QAM 75 (1) 274 to 347 276 to 424 280 to 599 285 to 841
40 512QAM 75 (1) 291 to 369 293 to 451 297 to 636 303 to 893
Light
40 1024QAM 75 (1) 307 to 389 309 to 475 313 to 671 319 to 941
56 QPSK 39 85 to 107 85 to 131 86 to 185 88 to 260
56 16QAM 69 146 to 185 147 to 226 149 to 320 152 to 449

Strong
56 16QAM 75 (1) 171 to 216 172 to 264 174 to 373 177 to 524
56 32QAM 75 (1) 214 to 271 216 to 331 218 to 468 222 to 657
56 64QAM 75 (1) 270 to 343 272 to 419 276 to 591 281 to 830
56 128QAM 75 (2) 318 to 403 321 to 493 325 to 695 331 to 976
56 256QAM 75 (2) 363 to 460 366 to 562 370 to 794 377 to 1000
56 512QAM 75 (2) 392 to 497 396 to 608 401 to 858 408 to 1000
56 512QAM 75 (2) 416 to 527 420 to 645 425 to 910 433 to 1000
Light
56 1024QAM 75 (2) 440 to 558 444 to 682 450 to 963 458 to 1000

Table 2-77 Service capacity in integrated IP radio mode (LH ACCP mode, XPIC enabled)

n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
28 QPSK 18 41 to 51 41 to 63 41 to 89 42 to 125
28 16QAM 33 70 to 89 71 to 109 72 to 154 73 to 217

Strong
28 16QAM 38 82 to 104 83 to 128 84 to 180 86 to 253
28 32QAM 49 105 to 134 106 to 163 108 to 231 110 to 324
28 64QAM 59 126 to 160 127 to 196 129 to 277 131 to 389
28 128QAM 74(1) 157 to 198 158 to 243 160 to 342 163 to 481
28 256QAM 75 (1) 176 to 224 178 to 273 180 to 386 183 to 542
28 512QAM 75 (1) 182 to 231 184 to 282 186 to 398 189 to 559
28 512QAM 75 (1) 194 to 246 195 to 300 198 to 424 201 to 595
Light
40 QPSK 27 59 to 75 60 to 92 60 to 130 62 to 183
40 16QAM 48 102 to 129 103 to 158 104 to 223 106 to 313

Strong
40 16QAM 56 119 to 151 120 to 185 122 to 261 124 to 367
40 32QAM 74 (1) 158 to 200 159 to 245 161 to 345 164 to 485
40 64QAM 75 (1) 188 to 238 189 to 291 192 to 411 195 to 577
40 128QAM 75 (1) 222 to 282 224 to 344 227 to 486 231 to 682
40 256QAM 75 (1) 255 to 323 257 to 395 260 to 557 265 to 782
40 512QAM 75 (1) 263 to 333 265 to 407 268 to 575 273 to 807
40 512QAM 75 (1) 279 to 354 282 to 433 285 to 611 291 to 858
Light
40 1024QAM 75 (1) 298 to 377 300 to 461 304 to 651 310 to 914
56 QPSK 39 85 to 107 85 to 131 86 to 185 88 to 260


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
56 16QAM 69 146 to 185 147 to 226 149 to 320 152 to 449

Strong
56 16QAM 75 (1) 171 to 216 172 to 264 174 to 373 177 to 524
56 32QAM 75 (1) 214 to 271 216 to 331 218 to 468 222 to 657
56 64QAM 75 (1) 270 to 343 272 to 419 276 to 591 281 to 830
56 128QAM 75 (2) 318 to 403 321 to 493 325 to 695 331 to 976
56 256QAM 75 (2) 359 to 455 362 to 556 366 to 785 373 to 1000
56 512QAM 75 (2) 377 to 477 380 to 584 385 to 824 392 to 1000
56 512QAM 75 (2) 400 to 506 403 to 619 408 to 874 416 to 1000
Light
56 1024QAM 75 (2) 426 to 540 429 to 660 435 to 931 443 to 1000
NOTE
l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on the following conditions.
l Without compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 1518 bytes
l With L2 frame header compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to
1518 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv4): UDP messages, C-tagged Ethernet frames with a length
ranging from 70 bytes to 1518 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv6): UDP messages, S-tagged Ethernet frames with a length
l E1/STM-1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1/STM-1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided
for Ethernet services.
2.8.7.2 Receiver Sensitivity (Long Haul)

NOTE
Receiver sensitivity remains the same values for various channel configurations (no matter the channels
are enabled with XPIC or not). However, the modulation modes supported by different types of channel
configurations are different.
For a guaranteed value, remove 3 dB from the typical value.

Table 2-78 Typical receiver sensitivity
Channel Modulati Receiver Sensitivity (dBm, @ BER=10-6)

Spacing on
(MHz) L6 GHz U6 GHz 7 GHz 8 GHz 11 GHz
28 QPSK -90.2 -90.2 -90.2 -90.2 -89.7

Strong
28 QPSK -88.8 -88.8 -88.8 -88.8 -88.3
28 16QAM -83.1 -83.1 -83.1 -83.1 -82.6

Strong
28 16QAM -81.6 -81.6 -81.6 -81.6 -81.1
28 32QAM -78.4 -78.4 -78.4 -78.4 -77.9
28 64QAM -75.8 -75.8 -75.8 -75.8 -75.3
28 128QAM -72.6 -72.6 -72.6 -72.6 -72.1
28 256QAM -69.8 -69.8 -69.8 -69.8 -69.3
28 512QAM -67.5 -67.5 -67.5 -67.5 -67
28 512QAM -66.5 -66.5 -66.5 -66.5 -66

Light
28 1024QAM -63.9 -63.9 -63.9 -63.9 -63.4
40 QPSK N/A -88.9 N/A -88.9 -88.4

Strong
40 QPSK N/A -87.4 N/A -87.4 -86.9
40 16QAM N/A -81.3 N/A -81.3 -80.8

Strong
40 16QAM N/A -79.8 N/A -79.8 -79.3
40 32QAM N/A -76.1 N/A -76.1 -75.6
40 64QAM N/A -73.7 N/A -73.7 -73.2
40 128QAM N/A -71 N/A -71 -70.5
40 256QAM N/A -68.1 N/A -68.1 -67.6
40 512QAM N/A -65.8 N/A -65.8 -65.3
40 512QAM N/A -65 N/A -65 -64.5

Light
40 1024QAM N/A -62.9 N/A -62.9 -62.4
56 QPSK -87.1 -87.1 -87.1 -87.1 -86.6

Strong

Channel Modulati Receiver Sensitivity (dBm, @ BER=10-6)

Spacing on
(MHz) L6 GHz U6 GHz 7 GHz 8 GHz 11 GHz
56 QPSK -85.6 -85.6 -85.6 -85.6 -85.1
56 16QAM -79.9 -79.9 -79.9 -79.9 -79.4

Strong
56 16QAM -78.5 -78.5 -78.5 -78.5 -78
56 32QAM -75.7 -75.7 -75.7 -75.7 -75.2
56 64QAM -72.1 -72.1 -72.1 -72.1 -71.6
56 128QAM -69.6 -69.6 -69.6 -69.6 -69.1
56 256QAM -66.8 -66.8 -66.8 -66.8 -66.3
56 512QAM -64.2 -64.2 -64.2 -64.2 -63.7
56 512QAM -63.2 -63.2 -63.2 -63.2 -62.7

Light
56 1024QAM -60.9 -60.9 -60.9 -60.9 -60.4

NOTE
When the XPIC function is enable, the 28MHz/1024QAM working mode is not supported.
2.8.7.3 Microwave Working Modes(short haul)

NOTE
frequency band.
IF Running Modes and Microwave Work Modes

The ISV3 board supports two IF running modes: IS3 and IS2.
l IS3 is the default mode applicable to air-interface interconnection between the ISV3 and
the ISV3 or applicable to air-interface interconnection between the ISV3 and the OptiX
RTN 905.
l IS2 is an optional mode applicable to air-interface interconnection between the ISV3 and
the ISU2/ISX2 board.
– When XPIC is disabled, microwave work modes those the ISV3 board supported are
same as those the ISU2 board supported.
– When XPIC is enabled, microwave work modes those the ISV3 board supported are
same as those the ISX2 board supported.

SDH Microwave Work Mode
Table 2-79 SDH microwave work modes (ISV3 board@IS3-mode)
Service Capacity Modulation Scheme Channel Spacing (MHz)
STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)
2×STM-1 128QAM 56 (55)

NOTE
For the ISV3 board in SDH service mode, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether
the XPIC function is enabled or disabled.
Integrated IP Microwave Work Mode (IS3-Mode)
Table 2-80 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISV3 @IS3-mode, E1 + Ethernet, XPIC disabled)

(MHz) E1s in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
Hybrid Compressio Frame Frame Frame
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
7 QPSK 5 10 to 13 10 to 16 10 to 25 10 to 33
7 16QAM 8 17 to 22 17 to 26 17 to 41 18 to 55
Strong
7 16QAM 10 20 to 26 20 to 32 21 to 49 21 to 66
7 32QAM 12 25 to 32 25 to 39 26 to 61 26 to 81
7 64QAM 15 32 to 40 32 to 50 33 to 77 33 to 102
7 128QAM 18 37 to 48 38 to 58 38 to 90 39 to 120
7 256QAM 20 42 to 53 42 to 65 43 to 101 44 to 135
7 512QAM 21 45 to 57 45 to 69 46 to 107 46 to 143
7 512QAM 22 48 to 61 48 to 74 49 to 115 50 to 153

Light
7 1024QAM 23 51 to 65 51 to 79 52 to 122 53 to 163
14 (13.75) QPSK Strong 8 17 to 22 17 to 27 17 to 41 18 to 55
14 (13.75) QPSK 10 21 to 26 21 to 32 21 to 50 21 to 66


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
14 (13.75) 16QAM 16 35 to 45 35 to 55 36 to 84 36 to 113

Strong
14 (13.75) 16QAM 20 41 to 53 42 to 64 42 to 99 43 to 133
14 (13.75) 32QAM 24 52 to 66 52 to 80 53 to 124 54 to 166
14 (13.75) 64QAM 31 65 to 83 66 to 101 67 to 156 68 to 208
14 (13.75) 128QAM 37 77 to 98 78 to 120 79 to 185 80 to 247
14 (13.75) 256QAM 42 88 to 112 89 to 137 90 to 211 92 to 282
14 (13.75) 512QAM 44 94 to 119 94 to 145 96 to 224 97 to 299
14 (13.75) 512QAM 46 100 to 127 101 to 155 102 to 240 104 to 320
Light
14 (13.75) 1024QAM 48 104 to 131 104 to 161 106 to 248 108 to 331
14 (13.75) 1024QAM 50 109 to 138 110 to 169 111 to 260 113 to 347
Light
28 (27.5) QPSK 20 42 to 54 43 to 66 43 to 102 44 to 135
28 (27.5) 16QAM 34 73 to 93 74 to 114 75 to 176 76 to 234

Strong
28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 86 to 109 86 to 133 88 to 205 89 to 274
28 (27.5) 32QAM 52 110 to 139 110 to 170 112 to 262 114 to 350
28 (27.5) 64QAM 64 135 to 172 136 to 210 138 to 324 141 to 432
28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 160 to 203 162 to 248 164 to 383 167 to 511
28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 183 to 232 184 to 284 187 to 438 190 to 584
28 (27.5) 512QAM 75 196 to 249 198 to 304 200 to 469 204 to 626
28 (27.5) 512QAM 75 210 to 266 212 to 325 214 to 502 218 to 670
Light
28 (27.5) 1024QAM 75 217 to 275 219 to 337 222 to 520 226 to 693
28 (27.5) 1024QAM 75 228 to 289 230 to 353 233 to 545 237 to 727
Light


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
28 (27.5) 2048QAM 75 245 to 306 248 to 379 250 to 585 254 to 780
56 (55) QPSK Strong 34 73 to 93 74 to 114 75 to 176 76 to 235
56 (55) QPSK 40 86 to 109 87 to 133 88 to 206 89 to 275
56 (55) 16QAM 68 148 to 188 150 to 230 151 to 355 154 to 473
Strong
56 (55) 16QAM 75 173 to 220 175 to 269 177 to 415 180 to 553
56 (55) 32QAM 75 217 to 275 219 to 336 222 to 519 226 to 692
56 (55) 64QAM 75 273 to 346 275 to 423 279 to 653 284 to 871
56 (55) 128QAM 75 323 to 409 326 to 501 330 to 772 336 to 1000
56 (55) 256QAM 75 369 to 467 372 to 571 376 to 882 384 to 1000
56 (55) 512QAM 75 395 to 501 398 to 612 404 to 945 411 to 1000
56 (55) 512QAM 75 423 to 536 426 to 655 432 to 1000 440 to 1000
Light
56 (55) 1024QAM 75 447 to 567 451 to 693 456 to 1000 465 to 1000
56 (55) 1024QAM 75 481 to 609 485 to 745 491 to 1000 500 to 1000
Light
56 (55) 2048QAM 75 504 to 636 507 to 780 512 to 1000 522 to 1000
40 QPSK 27 58 to 74 58 to 90 59 to 139 60 to 186
40 16QAM 46 100 to 127 101 to 156 102 to 240 104 to 321

Strong
40 16QAM 55 117 to 149 118 to 182 120 to 281 122 to 375
40 32QAM 71 150 to 190 151 to 232 153 to 359 156 to 478
40 64QAM 75 185 to 235 187 to 287 189 to 443 193 to 591
40 128QAM 75 219 to 278 221 to 339 224 to 524 228 to 699
40 256QAM 75 253 to 321 255 to 392 258 to 605 263 to 807
40 512QAM 75 268 to 340 270 to 415 274 to 641 279 to 855


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
40 512QAM 75 287 to 363 289 to 444 293 to 686 298 to 915

Light
40 1024QAM 75 302 to 383 304 to 468 309 to 723 314 to 964
40 1024QAM 75 317 to 402 320 to 491 324 to 758 330 to 1000

Light
40 2048QAM 75 333 to 418 335 to 515 338 to 795 345 to 1000
Table 2-81 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISV3 @IS3-mode, E1 + Ethernet, XPIC enabled)

n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
7 QPSK 4 10 to 12 10 to 15 10 to 24 10 to 32
7 16QAM 6 16 to 21 17 to 26 17 to 40 17 to 53
Strong
7 16QAM 9 20 to 25 20 to 31 20 to 48 21 to 64
7 32QAM 11 24 to 31 25 to 38 25 to 59 25 to 79
7 64QAM 14 31 to 39 31 to 48 32 to 74 32 to 99
7 128QAM 17 36 to 46 37 to 56 37 to 87 38 to 117
14 (13.75) QPSK 9 20 to 25 20 to 31 20 to 48 21 to 64
14 (13.75) 16QAM 16 34 to 43 34 to 53 35 to 82 35 to 109

Strong
14 (13.75) 16QAM 19 40 to 51 40 to 62 41 to 97 42 to 129
14 (13.75) 32QAM 24 50 to 64 51 to 78 51 to 121 52 to 161
14 (13.75) 64QAM 30 63 to 80 64 to 98 65 to 152 66 to 202


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
14 (13.75) 128QAM 36 75 to 95 76 to 116 77 to 180 78 to 240
14 (13.75) 256QAM 40 85 to 107 85 to 131 86 to 203 88 to 270
28 (27.5) QPSK 20 42 to 54 43 to 66 43 to 102 44 to 135
28 (27.5) 16QAM 34 73 to 93 74 to 114 75 to 176 76 to 234

Strong
28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 86 to 109 86 to 133 88 to 205 89 to 274
28 (27.5) 32QAM 52 110 to 139 110 to 170 112 to 262 114 to 350
28 (27.5) 64QAM 64 135 to 172 136 to 210 138 to 324 141 to 432
28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 160 to 203 162 to 248 164 to 383 167 to 511
28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 182 to 230 183 to 281 185 to 434 189 to 579
28 (27.5) 512QAM 75 188 to 239 190 to 292 192 to 450 196 to 601
28 (27.5) 512QAM 75 201 to 255 203 to 312 206 to 482 210 to 643
Light
28 (27.5) 1024QAM 75 215 to 272 216 to 333 219 to 513 223 to 685
56 (55) QPSK Strong 34 73 to 93 74 to 114 75 to 176 76 to 235
56 (55) QPSK 40 86 to 109 87 to 133 88 to 206 89 to 275
56 (55) 16QAM 68 148 to 188 150 to 230 151 to 355 154 to 473
Strong
56 (55) 16QAM 75 173 to 220 175 to 269 177 to 415 180 to 553
56 (55) 32QAM 75 217 to 275 219 to 336 222 to 519 226 to 692
56 (55) 64QAM 75 273 to 346 275 to 423 279 to 653 284 to 871
56 (55) 128QAM 75 323 to 409 326 to 501 330 to 772 336 to 1000
56 (55) 256QAM 75 365 to 462 368 to 565 372 to 872 379 to 1000
56 (55) 512QAM 75 379 to 481 382 to 588 387 to 907 395 to 1000
56 (55) 512QAM 75 406 to 514 409 to 629 414 to 971 422 to 1000
Light
56 (55) 1024QAM 75 433 to 548 436 to 670 441 to 1000 450 to 1000


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
56 (55) 1024QAM 75 454 to 575 458 to 703 463 to 1000 472 to 1000
Light
40 QPSK 27 58 to 74 58 to 90 59 to 139 60 to 186
40 16QAM 46 100 to 127 101 to 156 102 to 240 104 to 321

Strong
40 16QAM 55 117 to 149 118 to 182 120 to 281 122 to 375
40 32QAM 71 150 to 190 151 to 232 153 to 359 156 to 478
40 64QAM 75 185 to 235 187 to 287 189 to 443 193 to 591
40 128QAM 75 219 to 278 221 to 339 224 to 524 228 to 699
40 256QAM 75 251 to 318 253 to 389 256 to 600 261 to 800
40 512QAM 75 257 to 326 259 to 399 263 to 615 268 to 821
40 512QAM 75 275 to 349 277 to 427 281 to 658 286 to 878

Light
40 1024QAM 75 293 to 372 296 to 454 300 to 701 305 to 935
Table 2-82 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISV3 board @IS3 mode, STM-1 + Ethernet, XPIC disabled)
Channel Modulation Number of Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

Spacing Scheme STM-1
(MHz) Services in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
28 (27.5) 128QAM 1 160 to 203 162 to 248 164 to 383 167 to 511
28 (27.5) 256QAM 1 183 to 232 184 to 284 187 to 438 190 to 584
28 (27.5) 512QAM 1 196 to 249 198 to 304 200 to 469 204 to 626
28 (27.5) 512QAM 1 210 to 266 212 to 325 214 to 502 218 to 670
Light
28 (27.5) 1024QAM 1 217 to 275 219 to 337 222 to 520 226 to 693


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
28 (27.5) 1024QAM 1 228 to 289 230 to 353 233 to 545 237 to 727
Light
28 (27.5) 2048QAM 1 245 to 306 248 to 379 250 to 585 254 to 780
56 (55) 16QAM 1 173 to 220 175 to 269 177 to 415 180 to 553
56 (55) 32QAM 1 217 to 275 219 to 336 222 to 519 226 to 692
56 (55) 64QAM 1 273 to 346 275 to 423 279 to 653 284 to 871
56 (55) 128QAM 1 323 to 409 326 to 501 330 to 772 336 to 1000
56 (55) 256QAM 1 369 to 467 372 to 571 376 to 882 384 to 1000
56 (55) 512QAM 1 395 to 501 398 to 612 404 to 945 411 to 1000
56 (55) 512QAM 1 423 to 536 426 to 655 432 to 1000 440 to 1000
Light
56 (55) 1024QAM 1 447 to 567 451 to 693 456 to 1000 465 to 1000
56 (55) 1024QAM 1 481 to 609 485 to 745 491 to 1000 500 to 1000
Light
56 (55) 2048QAM 1 504 to 636 507 to 780 512 to 1000 522 to 1000
40 64QAM 1 185 to 235 187 to 287 189 to 443 193 to 591
40 128QAM 1 219 to 278 221 to 339 224 to 524 228 to 699
40 256QAM 1 253 to 321 255 to 392 258 to 605 263 to 807
40 512QAM 1 268 to 340 270 to 415 274 to 641 279 to 855
40 512QAM 1 287 to 363 289 to 444 293 to 686 298 to 915

Light
40 1024QAM 1 302 to 383 304 to 468 309 to 723 314 to 964
40 1024QAM 1 317 to 402 320 to 491 324 to 758 330 to 1000

Light
40 2048QAM 1 333 to 418 335 to 515 338 to 795 345 to 1000

Table 2-83 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISV3 board @IS3-mode, STM-1 + Ethernet, XPIC enabled)

n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
28 (27.5) 128QAM 1 160 to 203 162 to 248 164 to 383 167 to 511
28 (27.5) 256QAM 1 182 to 230 183 to 281 185 to 434 189 to 579
28 (27.5) 512QAM 1 188 to 239 190 to 292 192 to 450 196 to 601
28 (27.5) 512QAM 1 201 to 255 203 to 312 206 to 482 210 to 643
Light
28 (27.5) 1024QAM 1 215 to 272 216 to 333 219 to 513 223 to 685
56 (55) 16QAM 1 173 to 220 175 to 269 177 to 415 180 to 553
56 (55) 32QAM 1 217 to 275 219 to 336 222 to 519 226 to 692
56 (55) 64QAM 1 273 to 346 275 to 423 279 to 653 284 to 871
56 (55) 128QAM 1 323 to 409 326 to 501 330 to 772 336 to 1000
56 (55) 256QAM 1 365 to 462 368 to 565 372 to 872 379 to 1000
56 (55) 512QAM 1 379 to 481 382 to 588 387 to 907 395 to 1000
56 (55) 512QAM 1 406 to 514 409 to 629 414 to 971 422 to 1000
Light
56 (55) 1024QAM 1 433 to 548 436 to 670 441 to 1000 450 to 1000
56 (55) 1024QAM 1 454 to 575 458 to 703 463 to 1000 472 to 1000
Light
40 64QAM 1 185 to 235 187 to 287 189 to 443 193 to 591
40 128QAM 1 219 to 278 221 to 339 224 to 524 228 to 699
40 256QAM 1 251 to 318 253 to 389 256 to 600 261 to 800
40 512QAM 1 257 to 326 259 to 399 263 to 615 268 to 821
40 512QAM 1 275 to 349 277 to 427 281 to 658 286 to 878

Light
40 1024QAM 1 293 to 372 296 to 454 300 to 701 305 to 935

NOTE
1518 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv4): UDP messages, C-tagged Ethernet frames with a length
2.8.7.4 Receiver Sensitivity (Short Haul)

The ISV3 board supports two running modes: IS3 and IS2.
l This section provides the receiver sensitivity when the ISV3 runs in the IS3 mode.
l When the ISV3 board runs in the IS2 mode and XPIC is disabled, the receiver sensitivity
for the ISV3 board are the same as those for the ISU2 board. For details, see 2.9.7.2
l When the ISV3 board runs in the IS2 mode and XPIC is enabled, the receiver sensitivity
for the ISV3 board are the same as those for the ISX2 board. For details, see 2.10.7.2
NOTE
Unless otherwise specified, the receiver sensitivity values in the table are valid when different types of
ODUs are used. However, the frequency bands and modulation schemes supported by different types of
ODUs are different.
N/A means that microwave working mode is not supported.
SDH Microwave (IS3-Mode)
Table 2-84 Typical receiver sensitivity of the SDH microwave (ISV3 @IS3-mode)
Item Performance
1xSTM-1 2xSTM-1
28MHz/128QAM 56MHz/128QAM
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -72.5 -69.5
@7 GHz -72.5 -69.5
@8 GHz -72.5 -69.5
@10 GHz -72 -69
@10.5 GHz -70 N/A

Item Performance
1xSTM-1 2xSTM-1
28MHz/128QAM 56MHz/128QAM
@11 GHz -72 -69
@13 GHz -72 -69
@15 GHz -72 -69
@18 GHz -71.5 -68.5
@23 GHz -71.5 -68.5
@26 GHz -71 -68
@28 GHz -69 -66
@32 GHz -68.5 -65.5
@38 GHz -69.5 -66.5
@42 GHz -68 -65

NOTE
For the ISV3 board in SDH service mode, receiver sensitivities are the same regardless of whether the
XPIC function is enabled or disabled.
Integrated IP Microwave (IS3-mode)
Table 2-85 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave I (ISV3 @IS3-mode, XPIC disabled)
Item Performance (Channel Spacing: 7 MHz)
QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM

Strong Strong
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -96 -94 -89.5 -87.5 -84.5 -81.5
@7 GHz -96 -94 -89.5 -87.5 -84.5 -81.5
@8 GHz -96 -94 -89.5 -87.5 -84.5 -81.5
@10 GHz -95.5 -93.5 -89 -87 -84 -81
@10.5 GHz -93.5 -91.5 -87 -85 -82 -79
@11 GHz -95.5 -93.5 -89 -87 -84 -81
@13 GHz -95.5 -93.5 -89 -87 -84 -81
@15 GHz -95.5 -93.5 -89 -87 -84 -81


Strong Strong
@18 GHz -95 -93 -88.5 -86.5 -83.5 -80.5
@23 GHz -95 -93 -88.5 -86.5 -83.5 -80.5
@26 GHz -94.5 -92.5 -88 -86 -83 -80
@28 GHz -94 -92 -87.5 -85.5 -82.5 -79.5
@32 GHz -93.5 -91.5 -87 -85 -82 -79
@38 GHz -93 -91 -86.5 -84.5 -81.5 -78.5
@42 GHz -91.5 -89.5 -85 -83 -80 -77
Table 2-86 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave II (ISV3 @IS3-mode, XPIC disabled)
128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 512QAM 1024QAM

Light
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -72 -70
@7 GHz -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -72 -70
@8 GHz -78.5 -75.5 73.5 -72 -70
@10 GHz -78 -75 -73 -71.5 -69.5
@10.5 GHz -76 -73 -71 -69.5 -67.5
@11 GHz -78 -75 -73 -71.5 -69.5
@13 GHz -78 -75 -73 -71.5 -69.5
@15 GHz -78 -75 -73 -71.5 -69.5
@18 GHz -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -71 -69
@23 GHz -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -71 -69
@26 GHz -77 -74 -72 -70.5 -68.5
@28 GHz -76.5 -73.5 N/A N/A N/A
@32 GHz -76 -73 N/A N/A N/A
@38 GHz -75.5 -72.5 -70.5 -69 N/A
@42 GHz -74 -71 -69 -67.5 N/A

Table 2-87 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave III (ISV3 @IS3-mode, XPIC disabled)

Strong Strong
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -94 -92 -86.5 -84.5 -81.5 -78.5
@7 GHz -94 -92 -86.5 -84.5 -81.5 -78.5
@8 GHz -94 -92 -86.5 -84.5 -81.5 -78.5
@10 GHz -93.5 -91.5 -86 -84 -81 -78
@10.5 GHz -91.5 -89.5 -84 -82 -79 -76
@11 GHz -93.5 -91.5 -86 -84 -81 -78
@13 GHz -93.5 -91.5 -86 -84 -81 -78
@15 GHz -93.5 -91.5 -86 -84 -81 -78
@18 GHz -93 -91 -85.5 -83.5 -80.5 -77.5
@23 GHz -93 -91 -85.5 -83.5 -80.5 -77.5
@26 GHz -92.5 -90.5 -85 -83 -80 -77
@28 GHz -92 -90 -84.5 -82.5 -79.5 -76.5
@32 GHz -91.5 -89.5 -84 -82 -79 -76
@38 GHz -91 -89 -83.5 -81.5 -78.5 -75.5
@42 GHz -89.5 -87.5 -82 -80 -77 -74
Table 2-88 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave IV (ISV3 @IS3-mode, XPIC disabled)
128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 512QAM 1024QAM 1024QAM

Light Light
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -75.5 -72.5 -70.5 -69 -67 -65.5
@7 GHz -75.5 -72.5 -70.5 -69 -67 -65.5
@8 GHz -75.5 -72.5 -70.5 -69 -67 -65.5


Light Light
@10 GHz -75 -72 -70 -68.5 -66.5 -65
@10.5 GHz -73 -70 -68 -66.5 -64.5 -63
@11 GHz -75 -72 -70 -68.5 -66.5 -65
@13 GHz -75 -72 -70 -68.5 -66.5 -65
@15 GHz -75 -72 -70 -68.5 -66.5 -65
@18 GHz -74.5 -71.5 -69.5 -68 -66 -64.5
@23 GHz -74.5 -71.5 -69.5 -68 -66 -64.5
@26 GHz -74 -71 -69 -67.5 -65.5 -64
@28 GHz -73.5 -70.5 N/A N/A N/A N/A
@32 GHz -73 -70 N/A N/A N/A N/A
@38 GHz -72.5 -69.5 -67.5 -66 -64 N/A
@42 GHz -71 -68 -66 -64.5 -62.5 N/A
Table 2-89 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave V (ISV3 @IS3-mode, XPIC disabled)

Strong Strong
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -90.5 -89 -83.5 -82 -79 -75.5
@7 GHz -90.5 -89 -83.5 -82 -79 -75.5
@8 GHz -90.5 -89 -83.5 -82 -79 -75.5
@10 GHz -90 -88.5 -83 -81.5 -78.5 -75
@10.5 GHz -88 -86.5 -81 -79.5 -76.5 -73
@11 GHz -90 -88.5 -83 -81.5 -78.5 -75
@13 GHz -90 -88.5 -83 -81.5 -78.5 -75
@15 GHz -90 -88.5 -83 -81.5 -78.5 -75
@18 GHz -89.5 -88 -82.5 -81 -78 -74.5
@23 GHz -89.5 -88 -82.5 -81 -78 -74.5


Strong Strong
@26 GHz -89 -87.5 -82 -80.5 -77.5 -74
@28 GHz -88.5 -87 -81.5 -80 -77 -73.5
@32 GHz -88 -86.5 -81 -79.5 -76.5 -73
@38 GHz -87.5 -86 -80.5 -79 -76 -72.5
@42 GHz -86 -84.5 -79 -77.5 -74.5 -71
Table 2-90 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave VI (ISV3 @IS3-mode, XPIC disabled)
128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 512QAM 1024QAM 1024QAM 2048QAM

Light Light
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -72.5 -69.5 -67.5 -66 -64 -62.5 -61
@7 GHz -72.5 -69.5 -67.5 -66 -64 -62.5 -61
@8 GHz -72.5 -69.5 -67.5 -66 -64 -62.5 -61
@10 GHz -72 -69 -67 -65.5 -63.5 -62 N/A
@10.5 GHz -70 -67 -65 -63.5 -61.5 -60 N/A
@11 GHz -72 -69 -67 -65.5 -63.5 -62 -60.5
@13 GHz -72 -69 -67 -65.5 -63.5 -62 -60.5
@15 GHz -72 -69 -67 -65.5 -63.5 -62 -60.5
@18 GHz -71.5 -68.5 -66.5 -65 -63 -61.5 -60
@23 GHz -71.5 -68.5 -66.5 -65 -63 -61.5 -60
@26 GHz -71 -68 -66 -64.5 -62.5 -61 N/A
@28 GHz -70.5 -67.5 -65.5 -64 N/A N/A N/A
@32 GHz -70 -67 -65 -63.5 N/A N/A N/A
@38 GHz -69.5 -66.5 -64.5 -63 -61 -59.5 -58
@42 GHz -68 -65 -63 -61.5 -59.5 -58 N/A

Table 2-91 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave VII (ISV3 @IS3-mode, XPIC disabled)

Strong Strong
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -87.5 -86 -80.5 -79 -76 -72.5
@7 GHz -87.5 -86 -80.5 -79 -76 -72.5
@8 GHz -87.5 -86 -80.5 -79 -76 -72.5
@10 GHz -87 -85.5 -80 -78.5 -75.5 -72
@10.5 GHz N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
@11 GHz -87 -85.5 -80 -78.5 -75.5 -72
@13 GHz -87 -85.5 -80 -78.5 -75.5 -72
@15 GHz -87 -85.5 -80 -78.5 -75.5 -72
@18 GHz -86.5 -85 -79.5 -78 -75 -71.5
@23 GHz -86.5 -85 -79.5 -78 -75 -71.5
@26 GHz -86 -84.5 -79 -77.5 -74.5 -71
@28 GHz -85.5 -84 -78.5 -77 -74 -70.5
@32 GHz -85 -83.5 -78 -76.5 -73.5 -70
@38 GHz -84.5 -83 -77.5 -76 -73 -69.5
@42 GHz -83 -81.5 -76 -74.5 -71.5 -68
Table 2-92 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave VIII (ISV3 @IS3-mode, XPIC disabled)

Light Light
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -69.5 -66.5 -64.5 -63 -61 -59.5 -58
@7 GHz -69.5 -66.5 -64.5 -63 -61 -59.5 -58
@8 GHz -69.5 -66.5 -64.5 -63 -61 -59.5 -58
@10 GHz -69 -66 -64 -62.5 -60.5 -59 N/A
@10.5 GHz N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A


Light Light
@11 GHz -69 -66 -64 -62.5 -60.5 -59 -57.5
@13 GHz -69 -66 -64 -62.5 -60.5 -59 -57.5
@15 GHz -69 -66 -64 -62.5 -60.5 -59 -57.5
@18 GHz -68.5 -65.5 -63.5 -62 -60 -58.5 -57
@23 GHz -68.5 -65.5 -63.5 -62 -60 -58.5 -57
@26 GHz -68 -65 -63 -61.5 -59.5 -58 N/A
@28 GHz -67.5 -64.5 -62.5 -61 -59 N/A N/A
@32 GHz -67 -64 -62 -60.5 -58.5 N/A N/A
@38 GHz -66.5 -63.5 -61.5 -60 -58 -56.5 -55
@42 GHz -65 -62 -60 -58.5 -56.5 -55 N/A
Table 2-93 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave IX (ISV3 @IS3-mode, XPIC disabled)

Strong Strong
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -89 -87.5 -82 -80.5 -77.5 -74
@7 GHz -89 -87.5 -82 -80.5 -77.5 -74
@8 GHz -89 -87.5 -82 -80.5 -77.5 -74
@10 GHz -88.5 -87 -81.5 -80 -77 -73.5
@11 GHz -88.5 -87 -81.5 -80 -77 -73.5
@13 GHz -88.5 -87 -81.5 -80 -77 -73.5
@15 GHz -88.5 -87 -81.5 -80 -77 -73.5
@18 GHz -88 -86.5 -81 -79.5 -76.5 -73
@23 GHz -88 -86.5 -81 -79.5 -76.5 -73
@26 GHz -87.5 -86 -80.5 -79 -76 -72.5
@28 GHz -87 -85.5 -80 -78.5 -75.5 -72


Strong Strong
@32 GHz -86.5 -85 -79.5 -78 -75 -71.5
@38 GHz -86 -84.5 -79 -77.5 -74.5 -71
@42 GHz -84.5 -83 -77.5 -76 -73 -69.5
Table 2-94 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave X (ISV3 @IS3-mode, XPIC disabled)

Light Light
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -71 -68 -66 -64.5 -62.5 -61 -59.5
@7 GHz -71 -68 -66 -64.5 -62.5 -61 -59.5
@8 GHz -71 -68 -66 -64.5 -62.5 -61 -59.5
@10 GHz -70.5 -67.5 -65.5 -64 -62 -60.5 N/A
@10.5 GHz N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
@11 GHz -70.5 -67.5 -65.5 -64 -62 -60.5 -59
@13 GHz -70.5 -67.5 -65.5 -64 -62 -60.5 -59
@15 GHz -70.5 -67.5 -65.5 -64 -62 -60.5 -59
@18 GHz -70 -67 -65 -63.5 -61.5 -60 -58.5
@23 GHz -70 -67 -65 -63.5 -61.5 -60 -58.5
@26 GHz -69.5 -66.5 -64.5 -63 -61 -59.5 N/A
@28 GHz -69 -66 -64 -62.5 N/A N/A N/A
@32 GHz -68.5 -65.5 -63.5 -62 N/A N/A N/A
@38 GHz -68 -65 -63 -61.5 -59.5 -58 -56.5
@42 GHz -66.5 -63.5 -61.5 -60 -58 -56.5 N/A

Table 2-95 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave XI (ISV3 @IS3-mode, XPIC enabled)
QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM

Strong Strong
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -96 -94 -89.5 -87.5 -84.5 -81.5 -78.5
@7 GHz -96 -94 -89.5 -87.5 -84.5 -81.5 -78.5
@8 GHz -96 -94 -89.5 -87.5 -84.5 -81.5 -78.5
@10 GHz -95.5 -93.5 -89 -87 -84 -81 -78
@10.5 GHz -93.5 -91.5 -87 -85 -82 -79 -76
@11 GHz -95.5 -93.5 -89 -87 -84 -81 -78
@13 GHz -95.5 -93.5 -89 -87 -84 -81 -78
@15 GHz -95.5 -93.5 -89 -87 -84 -81 -78
@18 GHz -95 -93 -88.5 -86.5 -83.5 -80.5 -77.5
@23 GHz -95 -93 -88.5 -86.5 -83.5 -80.5 -77.5
@26 GHz -94.5 -92.5 -88 -86 -83 -80 -77
@28 GHz -94 -92 -87.5 -85.5 -82.5 -79.5 -76.5
@32 GHz -93.5 -91.5 -87 -85 -82 -79 -76
@38 GHz -93 -91 -86.5 -84.5 -81.5 -78.5 -75.5
@42 GHz -91.5 -89.5 -85 -83 -80 -77 -74
Table 2-96 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave XII (ISV3 @IS3-mode, XPIC enabled)
QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QA 256QA

Strong Strong M M
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -94 -92 -86.5 -84.5 -81.5 -78.5 -75.5 -72.5
@7 GHz -94 -92 -86.5 -84.5 -81.5 -78.5 -75.5 -72.5
@8 GHz -94 -92 -86.5 -84.5 -81.5 -78.5 -75.5 -72.5
@10 GHz -93.5 -91.5 -86 -84 -81 -78 -75 -72

QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QA 256QA

Strong Strong M M
@10.5 -91.5 -89.5 -84 -82 -79 -76 -73 -70

GHz
@11 GHz -93.5 -91.5 -86 -84 -81 -78 -75 -72
@13 GHz -93.5 -91.5 -86 -84 -81 -78 -75 -72
@15 GHz -93.5 -91.5 -86 -84 -81 -78 -75 -72
@18 GHz -93 -91 -85.5 -83.5 -80.5 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5
@23 GHz -93 -91 -85.5 -83.5 -80.5 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5
@26 GHz -92.5 -90.5 -85 -83 -80 -77 -74 -71
@28 GHz -92 -90 -84.5 -82.5 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5
@32 GHz -91.5 -89.5 -84 -82 -79 -76 -73 -70
@38 GHz -91 -89 -83.5 -81.5 -78.5 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5
@42 GHz -89.5 -87.5 -82 -80 -77 -74 -71 -68
Table 2-97 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave XIII (ISV3 @IS3-mode, XPIC enabled)

Strong Strong
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -90.5 -89 -83.5 -82 -79 -75.5
@7 GHz -90.5 -89 -83.5 -82 -79 -75.5
@8 GHz -90.5 -89 -83.5 -82 -79 -75.5
@10 GHz -90 -88.5 -83 -81.5 -78.5 -75
@10.5 GHz -88 -86.5 -81 -79.5 -76.5 -73
@11 GHz -90 -88.5 -83 -81.5 -78.5 -75
@13 GHz -90 -88.5 -83 -81.5 -78.5 -75
@15 GHz -90 -88.5 -83 -81.5 -78.5 -75
@18 GHz -89.5 -88 -82.5 -81 -78 -74.5
@23 GHz -89.5 -88 -82.5 -81 -78 -74.5


Strong Strong
@26 GHz -89 -87.5 -82 -80.5 -77.5 -74
@28 GHz -88.5 -87 -81.5 -80 -77 -73.5
@32 GHz -88 -86.5 -81 -79.5 -76.5 -73
@38 GHz -87.5 -86 -80.5 -79 -76 -72.5
@42 GHz -86 -84.5 -79 -77.5 -74.5 -71
Table 2-98 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave XIV (ISV3 @IS3-mode, XPIC enabled)

Light
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -72.5 -69.5 -67.5 -66 -64
@7 GHz -72.5 -69.5 -67.5 -66 -64
@8 GHz -72.5 -69.5 -67.5 -66 -64
@10 GHz -72 -69 -67 -65.5 N/A
@10.5 GHz -70 -67 -65 -63.5 N/A
@11 GHz -72 -69 -67 -65.5 -63.5
@13 GHz -72 -69 -67 -65.5 -63.5
@15 GHz -72 -69 -67 -65.5 -63.5
@18 GHz -71.5 -68.5 -66.5 -65 -63
@23 GHz -71.5 -68.5 -66.5 -65 -63
@26 GHz -71 -68 -66 -64.5 N/A
@28 GHz -70.5 -67.5 N/A N/A N/A
@32 GHz -70 -67 N/A N/A N/A
@38 GHz -69.5 -66.5 -64.5 N/A N/A
@42 GHz -68 -65 -63 N/A N/A

Table 2-99 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave XV (ISV3 @IS3-mode, XPIC enabled)

Strong Strong
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -87.5 -86 -80.5 -79 -76 -72.5
@7 GHz -87.5 -86 -80.5 -79 -76 -72.5
@8 GHz -87.5 -86 -80.5 -79 -76 -72.5
@10 GHz -87 -85.5 -80 -78.5 -75.5 -72
@11 GHz -87 -85.5 -80 -78.5 -75.5 -72
@13 GHz -87 -85.5 -80 -78.5 -75.5 -72
@15 GHz -87 -85.5 -80 -78.5 -75.5 -72
@18 GHz -86.5 -85 -79.5 -78 -75 -71.5
@23 GHz -86.5 -85 -79.5 -78 -75 -71.5
@26 GHz -86 -84.5 -79 -77.5 -74.5 -71
@28 GHz -85.5 -84 -78.5 -77 -74 -70.5
@32 GHz -85 -83.5 -78 -76.5 -73.5 -70
@38 GHz -84.5 -83 -77.5 -76 -73 -69.5
@42 GHz -83 -81.5 -76 -74.5 -71.5 -68
Table 2-100 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave XVI (ISV3 @IS3-mode, XPIC enabled)

Light Light
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -69.5 -66.5 -64.5 -63 -61 -59.5
@7 GHz -69.5 -66.5 -64.5 -63 -61 -59.5
@8 GHz -69.5 -66.5 -64.5 -63 -61 -59.5
@10 GHz -69 -66 -64 -62.5 -60.5 -59


Light Light
@11 GHz -69 -66 -64 -62.5 -60.5 -59
@13 GHz -69 -66 -64 -62.5 -60.5 -59
@15 GHz -69 -66 -64 -62.5 -60.5 -59
@18 GHz -68.5 -65.5 -63.5 -62 -60 -58.5
@23 GHz -68.5 -65.5 -63.5 -62 -60 -58.5
@26 GHz -68 -65 -63 -61.5 -59.5 -58
@28 GHz -67.5 -64.5 -62.5 N/A N/A N/A
@32 GHz -67 -64 -62 N/A N/A N/A
@38 GHz -66.5 -63.5 -61.5 -60 N/A N/A
@42 GHz -65 -62 -60 -58.5 N/A N/A
Table 2-101 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave XVII (ISV3 @IS3-mode, XPIC enabled)

Strong Strong
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -89 -87.5 -82 -80.5 -77.5 -74
@7 GHz -89 -87.5 -82 -80.5 -77.5 -74
@8 GHz -89 -87.5 -82 -80.5 -77.5 -74
@10 GHz -88.5 -87 -81.5 -80 -77 -73.5
@11 GHz -88.5 -87 -81.5 -80 -77 -73.5
@13 GHz -88.5 -87 -81.5 -80 -77 -73.5
@15 GHz -88.5 -87 -81.5 -80 -77 -73.5
@18 GHz -88 -86.5 -81 -79.5 -76.5 -73
@23 GHz -88 -86.5 -81 -79.5 -76.5 -73
@26 GHz -87.5 -86 -80.5 -79 -76 -72.5
@28 GHz -87 -85.5 -80 -78.5 -75.5 -72


Strong Strong
@32 GHz -86.5 -85 -79.5 -78 -75 -71.5
@38 GHz -86 -84.5 -79 -77.5 -74.5 -71
@42 GHz -84.5 -83 -77.5 -76 -73 -69.5
Table 2-102 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave XVIII (ISV3 @IS3-mode, XPIC enabled)

Light
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -71 -68 -66 -64.5 -62.5
@7 GHz -71 -68 -66 -64.5 -62.5
@8 GHz -71 -68 -66 -64.5 -62.5
@10 GHz -70.5 -67.5 -65.5 -64 -62
@10.5 GHz N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
@11 GHz -70.5 -67.5 -65.5 -64 -62
@13 GHz -70.5 -67.5 -65.5 -64 -62
@15 GHz -70.5 -67.5 -65.5 -64 -62
@18 GHz -70 -67 -65 -63.5 -61.5
@23 GHz -70 -67 -65 -63.5 -61.5
@26 GHz -69.5 -66.5 -64.5 -63 -61
@28 GHz -69 -66 N/A N/A N/A
@32 GHz -68.5 -65.5 N/A N/A N/A
@38 GHz -68 -65 -63 -61.5 N/A
@42 GHz -66.5 -63.5 -61.5 -60 N/A
RFU O&M signal.

Item Performance

Item Performance

baseband signals
2.8.7.7 Technical Specifications

An ISV3 board occupies one slot. Its power consumption is less than 23 W.
Item Performance

x D)
Weight 0.46 kg
Power Consumption

2.9 ISU2
The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radiomode and SDH radio mode
at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. The ISU2 applies only to
short-haul microwave service transmission.

The functional version of the ISU2 is SL91.
2.9.2 Application
ISU2 boards apply to short-haul microwave service transmission. ISU2 boards can function as
SDH IF boards to transmit SDH radio services, or as integrated IP radio IF boards to transmit
integrated IP radio services (native E1+Ethernet or native STM-1+Ethernet).

If applied to OptiX RTN 980L NEs building TDM radio networks, ISU2 boards function as
Figure 2-47 Application scenario of ISU2 boards (1)
ISU2 CSHL ISU2
TDM radio network
E1/STM-1 TDM TDM

service ISU2 ISU2 service E1/STM-1
board CSHL CSHL board
STM-1/STM-4
STM-1/STM-4
OptiX RTN 980L

NOTE
l When working in SDH radio mode, ISU2 boards transmit 1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1 SDH radio services.
encapsulated into TDM services by EMS6/EFP8 boards before being transmitted.

ISU2 boards apply to OptiX RTN 980L NEs to transmit native E1 services, native STM-1
Figure 2-48 Application scenario of ISU2 boards (2)
ISU2 CSHL ISU2
IP radio network
E1/STM-1
FE/GE board board
ISU2 ISU2 FE/GE
STM-1/4 CSHL CSHL
STM-1/4
GE
GE
OptiX RTN 980L
NOTE
l ISU2 boards transmit native E1 services only when these boards work in native E1+Ethernet mode,
and transmit native STM-1 services only when these boards work in native STM-1+Ethernet mode.

The ISU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.

Table 2-106 lists the functions and features that the ISU2 supports. The ISU2 needs to work
with the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions.
Table 2-106 Functions and features
Basic functions l Receives and transmits one IF signal.

l Provides management channels to the ODU.
l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
Radio type l Integrated IP radio

l SDH radio
NOTE
The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
and the Packet radio.
Service categories in Integrated IP l Native E1 + Ethernet

NOTE
services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.
Service categories in SDH radio l STM-1

mode l 2xSTM-1
Backplane bus bandwidth 1 Gbit/s
ATPC Supported
AM Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode
Ethernet frame header compression Supported
E1 priority Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with native

TDM services being E1 services
Radio work mode See Microwave Work Modes and Air Interface
Capacity of the ISU2.
Link-level 1+1 HSB/FD/ Supported

protection SD protection
LAG protection Supported

at air interfaces
PLA/EPLA Supported
NOTE
Slots 1 and 2 do not support EPLA.
TDM service protection SNCP

MPLS functions See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided

in the section for the system control, switching, and
PWE3 functions timing board.
Long haul Not supported
License Air interface Supported

capacity license
AM license Supported
Clock at the Clock source Clock at the air interface

physical layer


synchronization
PTP port l When an NE using an ISU2 board works in OC or

BC mode, the IF port on the ISU2 board can
function as a PTP port.
l When an NE using an ISU2 board works in TC+BC
mode, the IF port on the ISU2 board can function
as a PTP port whose port type is BC.
DCN Inband DCN Supported
Outband DCN l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC

bytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode.
bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes for each
channel in SDH radio mode.

l Inloops and outloops at IF ports
l Inloops and outloops at composite ports

warm reset
FPGA loading

PRBS BER test Supported

at IF ports
Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query

consumption
information
query
Board Supported
temperature
detection

detection
Services Native Ethernet l E-Line services

services – Port-based E-line services
l E-LAN services


G.8032 v1/v2.

OAM l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM

function.
l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
1731.
LAG Supported
QoS See the description of QoS functions provided in the

section for the system control, switching, and timing
board.
RMON Supported

This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISU2.
NOTE
The ISU2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode
and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame
structure and processed service categories.

Figure 2-49 Functional block diagram of the ISU2

Backplane
SMODEM
HSM signal bus
unit Paired board
processing
Cross-connect unit
Logic
unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
Overhead bus
MODEM unit
IF processing
interface unit
System control and

Combiner
IF Microwave communication unit

unit
frame signal
processing
Ethernet
GE bus
unit
Packet switching unit
Control bus
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU -48 V1

Power
unit -48 V2
the other units on the board
+3.3 V power supplied to +3.3 V
Clock signal provided to the Clock
System clock signal
Table 2-108 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISU2
1 Combiner interface Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals
unit and microwave service signals.

l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system
3 IF processing unit l Filters signals.

l Performs A/D conversion.

4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation.

l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific
alarms.

specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned
microwave messages and reports the changes to the
system control and communication unit over the
control bus.
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in
microwave frames and transmits to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions in
VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic
processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated
IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and then
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if
native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are
STM-1 services.
l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave
frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.
6 Ethernet processing l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/

unit DEMUX unit.
unit.

unit l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control
NOTE
processing.

Table 2-109 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISU2


from the logic processing unit, if native TDM services
in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from the
logic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if native
TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1
services.
l Sets microwave frame overheads.
l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals,
and microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.
4 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.

6 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.

l Filters signals.
7 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the
system control and communication unit.
8 Combiner interface Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service

unit signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.


Power Supply Unit

supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DC-
DC conversion.
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after
performing DC-DC conversion.
Clock Unit
2.9.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 2-50 Front panel of the ISU2

ODU-PWR
ISU2
ISU2
WARNING
IF
STAT
I O LINK
ODU
RMT
-48V OUTPUT
ACT
SRV
PULL
Indicators
Table 2-110 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2

properly.

l There is no power




properly.

l There is no power

alarms.

300 ms intervals

reporting defects.

of defects.

active one.
the board has been
activated.

standby one.

Ports
Table 2-111 Description of the Ports

Cable
ODU-PWRa ODU power switch - -
NOTE
Labels
2.9.6 Valid Slots

The ISU2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.

Figure 2-51 Slots for the ISU2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 13 (ISU2) Slot 14 (ISU2)
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 15
An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the
ODU plus 50.

Figure 2-52 Logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS
Slot 63 (ODU) Slot 64 (ODU)

(FAN)
Item Description
2

This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

2.9.7.1 Microwave Work Modes and Air Interface Capacity

The ISU2 board supports SDH microwave work modes and Integrated IP microwave work
modes.
NOTE
frequency band.
SDH Microwave Work Modes
Table 2-113 SDH microwave work modes (ISU2 board)
STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)
2xSTM-1 128QAM 56 (55)
2xSTM-1 256QAM 50
Integrated IP Microwave Work Modes
Table 2-114 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2, E1 + Ethernet)

n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
3.5 QPSK 2 4 to 5 4 to 6 4 to 6 4 to 10
3.5 16QAM 4 9 to 11 9 to 13 9 to 13 9 to 20
7 QPSK 5 10 to 13 10 to 15 10 to 22 10 to 33
7 16QAM 10 20 to 26 20 to 30 20 to 44 20 to 66
7 32QAM 12 25 to 32 25 to 36 25 to 54 25 to 80
7 64QAM 15 31 to 40 31 to 47 31 to 67 31 to 100
7 128QAM 18 37 to 47 37 to 56 37 to 80 37 to 119
7 256QAM 20 41 to 53 41 to 62 41 to 90 42 to 134
14 (13.75) QPSK 10 20 to 26 20 to 31 20 to 44 20 to 66
14 (13.75) 16QAM 20 41 to 52 41 to 61 41 to 89 41 to 132


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
14 (13.75) 32QAM 24 51 to 65 51 to 77 51 to 110 51 to 164
14 (13.75) 64QAM 31 65 to 83 65 to 96 65 to 140 65 to 209
14 (13.75) 128QAM 37 76 to 97 76 to 113 76 to 165 76 to 245
14 (13.75) 256QAM 42 87 to 111 87 to 131 87 to 189 88 to 281
28 (27.5) QPSK 20 41 to 52 41 to 62 41 to 89 41 to 132
28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178 83 to 265
28 (27.5) 32QAM 52 107 to 136 107 to 161 107 to 230 107 to 343
28 (27.5) 64QAM 64 131 to 168 131 to 198 131 to 283 132 to 424
28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 155 to 198 155 to 233 155 to 333 156 to 495
28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 577
56 (55) QPSK 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178 83 to 265
56 (55) 16QAM 75 166 to 212 166 to 250 165 to 356 167 to 533
56 (55) 32QAM 75 206 to 262 206 to 308 206 to 437 207 to 659
56 (55) 64QAM 75 262 to 333 262 to 388 262 to 567 264 to 836
56 (55) 128QAM 75 309 to 396 309 to 466 309 to 656 311 to 983
56 (55) 256QAM 75 360 to 456 360 to 538 360 to 777 362 to 1000
40 QPSK 27 56 to 72 56 to 84 56 to 122 57 to 182
40 16QAM 55 114 to 145 114 to 172 114 to 247 114 to 366
40 32QAM 71 147 to 187 147 to 221 147 to 318 148 to 474
40 64QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 583
40 128QAM 75 215 to 272 215 to 323 215 to 456 216 to 691
40 256QAM 75 249 to 318 249 to 375 249 to 538 251 to 800
50 QPSK 35 73 to 92 73 to 107 73 to 153 73 to 235
50 16QAM 71 148 to 186 148 to 216 148 to 309 148 to 473
50 32QAM 75 191 to 240 191 to 278 191 to 398 191 to 610
50 64QAM 75 235 to 295 235 to 340 235 to 490 235 to 750


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
50 128QAM 75 275 to 345 275 to 400 275 to 570 275 to 875
50 256QAM 75 317 to 396 317 to 459 317 to 659 317 to 1000
Table 2-115 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)

n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
28 (27.5) 128QAM 1 155 to 198 155 to 233 155 to 333 156 to 495
28 (27.5) 256QAM 1 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 577
40 64QAM 1 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 583
40 128QAM 1 215 to 272 215 to 323 215 to 456 216 to 691
40 256QAM 1 249 to 318 249 to 375 249 to 538 251 to 800
50 32QAM 1 191 to 240 191 to 278 191 to 398 191 to 610
50 64QAM 1 235 to 295 235 to 340 235 to 490 235 to 750
50 128QAM 1 275 to 345 275 to 400 275 to 570 275 to 875
50 256QAM 1 317 to 396 317 to 459 317 to 659 317 to 1000
56 (55) 16QAM 1 166 to 212 166 to 250 165 to 356 167 to 533
56 (55) 32QAM 1 206 to 262 206 to 308 206 to 437 207 to 659
56 (55) 64QAM 1 262 to 333 262 to 388 262 to 567 264 to 836
56 (55) 128QAM 1 309 to 396 309 to 466 309 to 656 311 to 983
56 (55) 256QAM 1 360 to 456 360 to 538 360 to 777 362 to 1000

NOTE
For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the ISU2/ISX2 board supports:
9600 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv4): UDP messages, untagged Ethernet frames with a length
2.9.7.2 Receiver Sensitivity

This section describes the receiver sensitivity of ISU2 boards in different work modes.
NOTE
l For an XMC-2 ODU at the 18 GHz frequency band, remove 2 dB from the values specified in the table
to obtain the values of receiver sensitivity.
l The 10.5 GHz ODU with the T/R spacing of 91 MHz does not support the channel spacing of 40/56
MHz. The receiver sensitivity is not available (N/A).
l Currently the 42 GHz ODU does not support the channel spacing of 3.5 MHz. The receiver sensitivity
is not available (N/A).
SDH Microwave (ISU2 Board)
Table 2-116 Typical receiver sensitivity of the SDH microwave (ISU2)
Item Performance
1xSTM-1 2xSTM-1
128QAM/28 MHz 128QAM/56 MHz
RSL@ BER = 10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -71 -68
@7 GHz -71 -68
@8 GHz -71 -68
@10 GHz -70.5 -67.5
@10.5 GHz -68.5 N/A
@11 GHz -70.5 -67.5
@13 GHz -70.5 -67.5
@15 GHz -70.5 -67.5

Item Performance
1xSTM-1 2xSTM-1
@18 GHz -70.5 -67.5
@23 GHz -70 -67
@26 GHz -69.5 -66.5
@28 GHz -69 -66
@32 GHz -68.5 -65.5
@38 GHz -68 -65
@42 GHz -66.5 -63.5
Integrated IP Microwave (ISU2 Board)
Table 2-117 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave I (ISU2)
QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -92.5 -86.5 -82.5 -80 -77 -74
@7 GHz -92.5 -86.5 -82.5 -80 -77 -74
@8 GHz -92.5 -86.5 -82.5 -80 -77 -74
@10 GHz -92 -86 -82 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5
@10.5 -90 -84 -80 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5

GHz
@11 GHz -92 -86 -82 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5
@13 GHz -92 -86 -82 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5
@15 GHz -92 -86 -82 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5
@18 GHz -92 -86 -82 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5
@23 GHz -91.5 -85.5 -81.5 -79 -76 -73
@26 GHz -91 -85 -81 -78.5 -75.5 -72.5
@28 GHz -90.5 -84.5 -80.5 -78 -75 -72
@32 GHz -90 -84 -80 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5

@38 GHz -89.5 -83.5 -79.5 -77 -74 -71
@42 GHz -88 -82 -78 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5
Table 2-118 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave II (ISU2)
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -90.5 -83.5 -79.5 -77 -74 -71
@7 GHz -90.5 -83.5 -79.5 -77 -74 -71
@8 GHz -90.5 -83.5 -79.5 -77 -74 -71
@10 GHz -90 -83 -79 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5
@10.5 -88 -81 -77 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5

GHz
@11 GHz -90 -83 -79 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5
@13 GHz -90 -83 -79 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5
@15 GHz -90 -83 -79 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5
@18 GHz -90 -83 -79 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5
@23 GHz -89.5 -82.5 -78.5 -76 -73 -70
@26 GHz -89 -82 -78 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5
@28 GHz -88.5 -81.5 -77.5 -75 -72 -69
@32 GHz -88 -81 -77 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5
@38 GHz -87.5 -80.5 -76.5 -74 -71 -68
@42 GHz -86 -79 -75 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5
Table 2-119 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave III (ISU2)
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)

@6 GHz -87.5 -80.5 -76.5 -74 -71 -68
@7 GHz -87.5 -80.5 -76.5 -74 -71 -68
@8 GHz -87.5 -80.5 -76.5 -74 -71 -68
@10 GHz -87 -80 -76 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5
@10.5 -85 -78 -74 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5

GHz
@11 GHz -87 -80 -76 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5
@13 GHz -87 -80 -76 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5
@15 GHz -87 -80 -76 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5
@18 GHz -87 -80 -76 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5
@23 GHz -86.5 -79.5 -75.5 -73 -70 -67
@26 GHz -86 -79 -75 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5
@28 GHz -85.5 -78.5 -74.5 -72 -69 -66
@32 GHz -85 -78 -74 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5
@38 GHz -84.5 -77.5 -73.5 -71 -68 -65
@42 GHz -83 -76 -72 -69.5 -66.5 -63.5
Table 2-120 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave IV (ISU2)
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -84.5 -77.5 -73.5 -71 -68 -65
@7 GHz -84.5 -77.5 -73.5 -71 -68 -65
@8 GHz -84.5 -77.5 -73.5 -71 -68 -65
@10 GHz -84 -77 -73 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5
@10.5 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

GHz
@11 GHz -84 -77 -73 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5
@13 GHz -84 -77 -73 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5

@15 GHz -84 -77 -73 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5
@18 GHz -84 -77 -73 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5
@23 GHz -83.5 -76.5 -72.5 -70 -67 -64
@26 GHz -83 -76 -72 -69.5 -66.5 -63.5
@28 GHz -82.5 -75.5 -71.5 -69 -66 -63
@32 GHz -82 -75 -71 -68.5 -65.5 -62.5
@38 GHz -81.5 -74.5 -70.5 -68 -65 -62
@42 GHz -80 -73 -69 -66.5 -63.5 -60.5
Table 2-121 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave V (ISU2)
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -86 -79 -75 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5
@7 GHz -86 -79 -75 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5
@8 GHz -86 -79 -75 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5
@10 GHz -85.5 -78.5 -74.5 -72 -69 -66

GHz
@11 GHz -85.5 -78.5 -74.5 -72 -69 -66
@13 GHz -85.5 -78.5 -74.5 -72 -69 -66
@15 GHz -85.5 -78.5 -74.5 -72 -69 -66
@18 GHz -85.5 -78.5 -74.5 -72 -69 -66
@23 GHz -85 -78 -74 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5
@26 GHz -84.5 -77.5 -73.5 -71 -68 -65
@28 GHz -84 -77 -73 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5
@32 GHz -83.5 -76.5 -72.5 -70 -67 -64
@38 GHz -83 -76 -72 -69.5 -66.5 -63.5

@42 GHz -81.5 -74.5 -70.5 -68 -65 -62
Table 2-122 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave VI (ISU2)
Item Performance (Channel Spacing: 3.5 MHz)
QPSK 16QAM
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -95.5 -89.5
@7 GHz -95.5 -89.5
@8 GHz -95.5 -89.5
@10.5 GHz -95 -89
@11 GHz -93 -87
@11 GHz -95 -89
@13 GHz -95 -89
@15 GHz -95 -89
@18 GHz -95 -89
@23 GHz -94.5 -88.5
@26 GHz -94 -88
@28 GHz -93.5 -87.5
@32 GHz -91.5 -86
@38 GHz -91 -85.5
@42 GHz -89.5 -84
Table 2-123 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave VII (ISU2)
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@18 GHz -85 -77 -73.5 -71 -68 -65

@23 GHz -86 -78 -74.5 -72 -69 -66
RFU O&M signal.
Item Performance

Item Performance

baseband signals

An ISU2 board occupies one slot. Its power consumption is less than 22 W.

Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance

x D)
Weight 0.60 kg
Power Consumption
2.10 ISX2
The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/
received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power
distribution mode. The ISX2 applies only to short-haul microwave service transmission.

The functional version of the ISX2 is SL91.
2.10.2 Application
ISX2 boards form XPIC workgroups to expand the capacity of an SDH radio hop or Integrated
IP radio hop when transmitting native E1 services, native STM-1 services, native Ethernet
services, native MPLS/PWE3 services, or a combination of these services.

If applied to OptiX RTN 980L NEs building TDM radio networks, ISX2 boards function as

Figure 2-53 Application scenario of ISX2 boards (1)
E1/STM-1 TDM ISX2 TDM

ISX2
board board
CSHL XPIC cable XPIC cable CSHL
STM-1/4
ISX2 ISX2 STM-1/4
OptiX RTN 980L
NOTE
l When working in SDH radio mode, ISX2 boards transmit 1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1 SDH radio services.
encapsulated into TDM services by EMS6/EFP8 boards before being transmitted.

ISX2 boards apply to OptiX RTN 980L NEs to transmit native E1 services, native STM-1
Figure 2-54 Application scenario of ISX2 boards (2)
E1/STM-1
E1/STM-1
Service ISX2 Service
FE/GE ISX2
board board FE/GE
STM-1/4 CSHL XPIC cable XPIC cable CSHL
STM-1/4
GE ISX2 ISX2 GE
OptiX RTN 980L

NOTE
l ISX2 boards transmit native E1 services only when they work in native E1+Ethernet mode, and transmit
native STM-1 services only when they work in native STM-1+Ethernet mode.

The ISX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. In addition, the ISX2 provides the cross-
polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) function for IF signals by transmitting/receiving
XPIC reference signals.
Table 2-127 lists the functions and features that the ISX2 supports. The ISX2 needs to work
with the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions and packet service
functions.
Basic functions l Receives and transmits one IF signal.

l Provides management channels to the ODU.
l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
Radio type l Integrated IP radio

l SDH radio
NOTE
The integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
and the Packet radio.
Service categories in Integrated IP l Native E1 + Ethernet

NOTE
services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.
Service categories in SDH radio l STM-1

mode l 2xSTM-1
ATPC Supported
AM Supported only in integrated IP radio mode
AM Booster Supported
Ethernet frame header compression Supported

E1 priority Supported only in integrated IP radio mode with native

TDM services being E1 services
XPIC Supported
Radio work mode See 2.10.7.1 Microwave Work Modes and Air
Interface Capacity.
Link-level 1+1 HSB/FD/ Supported

protection SD protection
LAG protection Supported

at air interfaces
PLA/EPLA Supported
NOTE
Slots 1 and 2 do not support EPLA.
TDM service protection SNCP
MPLS functions See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided

in the section for the system control, switching, and
PWE3 functions timing board.
Long haul Not supported
License Air interface Supported

capacity license
AM license Supported
Clock at the Clock source Clock at the air interface

physical layer


synchronization

PTP port l When an NE using an ISX2 board works in OC or

BC mode, the IF port on the ISX2 board can function
as a PTP port.
l When an NE using an ISX2 board works in TC+BC
mode, the IF port on the ISX2 board can function as
a PTP port whose port type is BC.
DCN Inband DCN Supported
Outband DCN l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC

bytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode.
bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes, for each
SDH radio channel.

l Inloops and outloops at IF ports
l Inloops and outloops at composite ports

warm reset
FPGA loading
PRBS BER test Supported

at IF ports
Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query

consumption
information
query
Board Supported
temperature
detection

detection


l E-LAN services


G.8032 v1/v2.
OAM l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM

function.
function.
1731.
LAG Supported
QoS See the description of QoS functions provided in the

section for the system control, switching, and timing
board.
RMON Supported

This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISX2.

NOTE
The ISX2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode
and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame
structure and processed service types.
Figure 2-55 Functional block diagram of the ISX2

Backplane
SMODEM
HSM signal bus
unit
Paired board
processing
Cross-connect unit
Logic
MUX/DEMUX unit
unit
System control and
processing
Combiner
interface
IF communication unit
Microwave MODEM Overhead
unit
unit
IF
frame signal unit bus

Ethernet GE bus
unit
Paired XPIC XPIC signal
board
Control bus
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU Power -48 V1

supply
+3.3 V power supplied to the
unit -48 V2
other units on the board
+3.3 V
Clock signal provided to the Clock

System clock signal
Table 2-129 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISX2
1 Combiner interface Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals
unit and microwave service signals.

l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system

3 IF processing unit l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to two
channels of signals.
– Performs A/D conversion for one channel of
filtered signals and transmits the converted signals
to the MODEM unit.
– Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as the
XPIC signals.
l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signals
transmitted from the paired ISX2 and transmits the
converted signals to the MODEM unit.
4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IF

signals transmitted from the paired ISX2 as reference
signals.
l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific
alarms.

l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned
microwave messages and reports the changes to the
system control and communication unit over the
control bus.
l Extracts auxiliary channel bytes including orderwire
bytes, F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in
microwave frames and transmits to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions in
VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic
processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated
IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and then
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if
native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are
STM-1 services.
l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave
frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.

6 Ethernet processing l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/

unit DEMUX unit.
unit.

unit l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control
NOTE
processing.
Table 2-130 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISX2


from the logic processing unit, if native TDM services
in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from the
logic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if native
TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1
services.
l Sets microwave frame overheads.
l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals,
and microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.
4 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.


5 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.

l Filters signals.
6 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the
system control and communication unit.
7 Combiner interface Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service

unit signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.

Power Supply Unit

supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DC-
DC conversion.
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after
performing DC-DC conversion.
Clock Unit
2.10.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the
front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 2-56 Front panel of the ISX2

ODU-PWR
ISX2
ISX2
WARNING
IF
STAT
XPIC
I O
LINK
ODU
RMT
-48V OUTPUT
ACT
SRV

PULL X-IN X-OUT

Indicators
Table 2-131 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2
XPIC On (green) The XPIC input signal is

normal.
On (red) The XPIC input signal is lost.
Off The XPIC function is

disabled.

properly.

l There is no power



properly.

l There is no power

alarms.

300 ms intervals


reporting defects.

of defects.

active one.
the board has been
activated.

standby one.
Ports

Cable
ODU-PWRa ODU power switch - -
X-IN XPIC signal input SMA XPIC cable

port
X-OUT XPIC signal output SMA

port
NOTE
Labels

2.10.6 Valid Slots

The ISX2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS are the same
Figure 2-57 Slots for the ISX2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 13 (ISX2) Slot 14 (ISX2)
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 15
An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the
ODU plus 50.

Figure 2-58 Logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS

(FAN)
Item Description
2
One ISX2 pair for implementing the XPIC function must be installed on the same row or
adjacently in the same column.

This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

2.10.7.1 Microwave Work Modes and Air Interface Capacity

The ISX2 board supports SDH microwave work modes and Integrated IP microwave work
modes.
NOTE
frequency band.
SDH Microwave Work Modes
Table 2-134 SDH microwave work modes (ISX2 board@IS2-mode)
STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)
2xSTM-1 128QAM 56 (55)
2xSTM-1 256QAM 50
NOTE
For the ISX2 board in SDH service mode, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether
the XPIC function is enabled or disabled.
Integrated IP Microwave Work Modes
Table 2-135 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, E1 + Ethernet service, XPIC disabled)

n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
7 QPSK 5 10 to 13 10 to 15 10 to 22 10 to 33
7 16QAM 10 20 to 26 20 to 30 20 to 44 20 to 66
7 32QAM 12 25 to 32 25 to 36 25 to 54 25 to 80
7 64QAM 15 31 to 40 31 to 47 31 to 67 31 to 100
7 128QAM 18 37 to 47 37 to 56 37 to 80 37 to 119
7 256QAM 20 41 to 53 41 to 62 41 to 90 42 to 134
14 (13.75) QPSK 10 20 to 26 20 to 31 20 to 44 20 to 66


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
14 (13.75) 16QAM 20 41 to 52 41 to 61 41 to 89 41 to 132
14 (13.75) 32QAM 24 51 to 65 51 to 77 51 to 110 51 to 164
14 (13.75) 64QAM 31 65 to 83 65 to 96 65 to 140 65 to 209
14 (13.75) 128QAM 37 76 to 97 76 to 113 76 to 165 76 to 245
14 (13.75) 256QAM 42 87 to 111 87 to 131 87 to 189 88 to 281
28 (27.5) QPSK 20 41 to 52 41 to 62 41 to 89 41 to 132
28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178 83 to 265
28 (27.5) 32QAM 52 107 to 136 107 to 161 107 to 230 107 to 343
28 (27.5) 64QAM 64 131 to 168 131 to 198 131 to 283 132 to 424
28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 155 to 198 155 to 233 155 to 333 156 to 495
28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 577
56 (55) QPSK 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178 83 to 265
56 (55) 16QAM 75 166 to 212 166 to 250 165 to 356 167 to 533
56 (55) 32QAM 75 206 to 262 206 to 308 206 to 437 207 to 659
56 (55) 64QAM 75 262 to 333 262 to 388 262 to 567 264 to 836
56 (55) 128QAM 75 309 to 396 309 to 466 309 to 656 311 to 983
56 (55) 256QAM 75 360 to 456 360 to 538 360 to 777 362 to 1000
40 QPSK 27 56 to 72 56 to 84 56 to 122 57 to 182
40 16QAM 55 114 to 145 114 to 172 114 to 247 114 to 366
40 32QAM 71 147 to 187 147 to 221 147 to 318 148 to 474
40 64QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 583
40 128QAM 75 215 to 272 215 to 323 215 to 456 216 to 691
40 256QAM 75 249 to 318 249 to 375 249 to 538 251 to 800
50 QPSK 35 73 to 92 73 to 107 73 to 153 73 to 235
50 16QAM 71 148 to 186 148 to 216 148 to 309 148 to 473
50 32QAM 75 191 to 240 191 to 278 191 to 398 191 to 610


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
50 64QAM 75 235 to 295 235 to 340 235 to 490 235 to 750
50 128QAM 75 275 to 345 275 to 400 275 to 570 275 to 875
50 256QAM 75 317 to 396 317 to 459 317 to 659 317 to 1000
Table 2-136 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2, E1 + Ethernet, XPIC enabled)

n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
7 QPSK 4 10 to 13 10 to 15 10 to 22 10 to 33
7 16QAM 9 20 to 26 20 to 30 20 to 44 20 to 66
7 32QAM 11 25 to 32 25 to 36 25 to 54 25 to 80
7 64QAM 14 31 to 40 31 to 47 31 to 67 31 to 100
14 (13.75) QPSK 9 20 to 26 20 to 31 20 to 44 20 to 66
14 (13.75) 16QAM 19 41 to 52 41 to 61 41 to 89 41 to 132
14 (13.75) 32QAM 24 51 to 65 51 to 77 51 to 110 51 to 164
14 (13.75) 64QAM 30 65 to 83 65 to 96 65 to 140 65 to 209
14 (13.75) 128QAM 36 76 to 97 76 to 113 76 to 165 76 to 245
28 (27.5) QPSK 20 41 to 52 41 to 62 41 to 89 41 to 132
28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178 83 to 265
28 (27.5) 32QAM 52 107 to 136 107 to 161 107 to 230 107 to 343
28 (27.5) 64QAM 64 131 to 168 131 to 198 131 to 283 132 to 424
28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 155 to 198 155 to 233 155 to 333 156 to 495
28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 577
56 (55) QPSK 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178 83 to 265


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
56 (55) 16QAM 75 166 to 212 166 to 250 165 to 356 167 to 533
56 (55) 32QAM 75 206 to 262 206 to 308 206 to 437 207 to 659
56 (55) 64QAM 75 262 to 333 262 to 388 262 to 567 264 to 836
56 (55) 128QAM 75 309 to 396 309 to 466 309 to 656 311 to 983
56 (55) 256QAM 75 360 to 456 360 to 538 360 to 777 362 to 1000
40 QPSK 27 56 to 72 56 to 84 56 to 122 57 to 182
40 16QAM 55 114 to 145 114 to 172 114 to 247 114 to 366
40 32QAM 71 147 to 187 147 to 221 147 to 318 148 to 474
40 64QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 583
40 128QAM 75 215 to 272 215 to 323 215 to 456 216 to 691
40 256QAM 75 249 to 318 249 to 375 249 to 538 251 to 800
50 QPSK 35 73 to 92 73 to 107 73 to 153 73 to 235
50 16QAM 71 148 to 186 148 to 216 148 to 309 148 to 473
50 32QAM 75 191 to 240 191 to 278 191 to 398 191 to 610
50 64QAM 75 235 to 295 235 to 340 235 to 490 235 to 750
50 128QAM 75 275 to 345 275 to 400 275 to 570 275 to 875
50 256QAM 75 317 to 396 317 to 459 317 to 659 317 to 1000

NOTE
When the channel spacing is 7 MHz or 14 MHz and the XPIC function is enabled, the ISX2 board only supports the XMC-2 ODU.
When the XPIC function is enabled and the frequency band is 26 GHz to 42 GHz, the 7MHz/64QAM and 14MHz/128QAM work
modes are not supported.

Table 2-137 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)

n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
28 (27.5) 128QAM 1 155 to 198 155 to 233 155 to 333 156 to 495
28 (27.5) 256QAM 1 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 577
40 64QAM 1 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 583
40 128QAM 1 215 to 272 215 to 323 215 to 456 216 to 691
40 256QAM 1 249 to 318 249 to 375 249 to 538 251 to 800
50 32QAM 1 191 to 240 191 to 278 191 to 398 191 to 610
50 64QAM 1 235 to 295 235 to 340 235 to 490 235 to 750
50 128QAM 1 275 to 345 275 to 400 275 to 570 275 to 875
50 256QAM 1 317 to 396 317 to 459 317 to 659 317 to 1000
56 (55) 16QAM 1 166 to 212 166 to 250 165 to 356 167 to 533
56 (55) 32QAM 1 206 to 262 206 to 308 206 to 437 207 to 659
56 (55) 64QAM 1 262 to 333 262 to 388 262 to 567 264 to 836
56 (55) 128QAM 1 309 to 396 309 to 466 309 to 656 311 to 983
56 (55) 256QAM 1 360 to 456 360 to 538 360 to 777 362 to 1000
NOTE
For the ISX2 board in STM-1 + Ethernet service mode, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether the XPIC
function is enabled or disabled.

NOTE
For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the ISU2/ISX2 board supports:
9600 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv4): UDP messages, untagged Ethernet frames with a length
2.10.7.2 Receiver Sensitivity

This section describes the receiver sensitivity of ISX2 boards in different work modes.
NOTE
l For an XMC-2 ODU at the 18 GHz frequency band, remove 2 dB from the sensitivity values specified
in the table.
l The 10.5 GHz ODU with the T/R spacing of 91 MHz does not support the channel spacing of 40/56
MHz. The receiver sensitivity is not available (N/A).
l When the XPIC function is enabled, the ISX2 board does not support the 7MHz/128QAM, 7MHz/
256QAM, and 14MHz/256QAM working modes at frequency bands from 7 GHz to 23 GHz. The
receiver sensitivity is not available (N/A).
l When the XPIC function is enabled, the ISX2 board does not support the 7MHz/64QAM, 7MHz/
128QAM, 7MHz/256QAM, 14MHz/128QAM, and 14MHz/256QAM working modes at frequency
bands from 26 GHz to 42 GHz. The receiver sensitivity is not available (N/A).
l For an XMC-2 ODU at the 38 GHz frequency band, when the XPIC function is enabled, remove 2 dB
from the sensitivity value specified in the table when the ISX2 board is at 28MHz/256QAM working
mode.
SDH Microwave (ISX2 Board)
Table 2-138 Typical receiver sensitivity of the SDH microwave (ISX2 Board, XPIC disabled)
Item Performance
1xSTM-1 2xSTM-1
@6 GHz -71 -68
@7 GHz -71 -68
@8 GHz -71 -68
@10 GHz -70.5 -67.5

Item Performance
1xSTM-1 2xSTM-1
@10.5 GHz -68.5 N/A
@11 GHz -70.5 -67.5
@13 GHz -70.5 -67.5
@15 GHz -70.5 -67.5
@18 GHz -70.5 -67.5
@23 GHz -70 -67
@26 GHz -69.5 -66.5
@28 GHz -69 -66
@32 GHz -68.5 -65.5
@38 GHz -68 -65
@42 GHz -66.5 -63.5
Table 2-139 Typical receiver sensitivity of the SDH microwave (ISX2 Board, XPIC enabled)
Item Performance
1xSTM-1 2xSTM-1
@6 GHz -71 -68
@7 GHz -71 -68
@8 GHz -71 -68
@11 GHz -70.5 -67.5
@13 GHz -70.5 -67.5
@15 GHz -70.5 -67.5
@18 GHz -70.5 -67.5
@23 GHz -70 -67
@26 GHz -69.5 -66.5
@28 GHz -69 -66

Item Performance
1xSTM-1 2xSTM-1
@32 GHz -68.5 -65.5
@38 GHz -68 -65
@42 GHz -66.5 -63.5
Integrated IP Microwave (ISX2 Board)
Table 2-140 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave I (ISX2 Board, XPIC
disabled)
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -92.5 -86.5 -82.5 -80 -77 -74
@7 GHz -92.5 -86.5 -82.5 -80 -77 -74
@8 GHz -92.5 -86.5 -82.5 -80 -77 -74
@10 GHz -92 -86 -82 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5
@10.5 -90 -84 -80 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5

GHz
@11 GHz -92 -86 -82 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5
@13 GHz -92 -86 -82 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5
@15 GHz -92 -86 -82 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5
@18 GHz -92 -86 -82 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5
@23 GHz -91.5 -85.5 -81.5 -79 -76 -73
@26 GHz -91 -85 -81 -78.5 -75.5 -72.5
@28 GHz -90.5 -84.5 -80.5 -78 -75 -72
@32 GHz -90 -84 -80 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5
@38 GHz -89.5 -83.5 -79.5 -77 -74 -71
@42 GHz -88 -82 -78 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5

Table 2-141 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave II (ISX2 Board, XPIC
disabled)
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -90.5 -83.5 -79.5 -77 -74 -71
@7 GHz -90.5 -83.5 -79.5 -77 -74 -71
@8 GHz -90.5 -83.5 -79.5 -77 -74 -71
@10 GHz -90 -83 -79 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5
@10.5 -88 -81 -77 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5

GHz
@11 GHz -90 -83 -79 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5
@13 GHz -90 -83 -79 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5
@15 GHz -90 -83 -79 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5
@18 GHz -90 -83 -79 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5
@23 GHz -89.5 -82.5 -78.5 -76 -73 -70
@26 GHz -89 -82 -78 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5
@28 GHz -88.5 -81.5 -77.5 -75 -72 -69
@32 GHz -88 -81 -77 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5
@38 GHz -87.5 -80.5 -76.5 -74 -71 -68
@42 GHz -86 -79 -75 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5
Table 2-142 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave III (ISX2 Board, XPIC
disabled)
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -87.5 -80.5 -76.5 -74 -71 -68
@7 GHz -87.5 -80.5 -76.5 -74 -71 -68
@8 GHz -87.5 -80.5 -76.5 -74 -71 -68
@10 GHz -87 -80 -76 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5

@10.5 -85 -78 -74 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5

GHz
@11 GHz -87 -80 -76 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5
@13 GHz -87 -80 -76 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5
@15 GHz -87 -80 -76 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5
@18 GHz -87 -80 -76 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5
@23 GHz -86.5 -79.5 -75.5 -73 -70 -67
@26 GHz -86 -79 -75 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5
@28 GHz -85.5 -78.5 -74.5 -72 -69 -66
@32 GHz -85 -78 -74 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5
@38 GHz -84.5 -77.5 -73.5 -71 -68 -65
@42 GHz -83 -76 -72 -69.5 -66.5 -63.5
Table 2-143 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave IV (ISX2 Board, XPIC
disabled)
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -84.5 -77.5 -73.5 -71 -68 -65
@7 GHz -84.5 -77.5 -73.5 -71 -68 -65
@8 GHz -84.5 -77.5 -73.5 -71 -68 -65
@10 GHz -84 -77 -73 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5

GHz
@11 GHz -84 -77 -73 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5
@13 GHz -84 -77 -73 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5
@15 GHz -84 -77 -73 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5
@18 GHz -84 -77 -73 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5
@23 GHz -83.5 -76.5 -72.5 -70 -67 -64

@26 GHz -83 -76 -72 -69.5 -66.5 -63.5
@28 GHz -82.5 -75.5 -71.5 -69 -66 -63
@32 GHz -82 -75 -71 -68.5 -65.5 -62.5
@38 GHz -81.5 -74.5 -70.5 -68 -65 -62
@42 GHz -80 -73 -69 -66.5 -63.5 -60.5
Table 2-144 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave V (ISX2 Board, XPIC
disabled)
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -86 -79 -75 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5
@7 GHz -86 -79 -75 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5
@8 GHz -86 -79 -75 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5
@10 GHz -85.5 -78.5 -74.5 -72 -69 -66

GHz
@11 GHz -85.5 -78.5 -74.5 -72 -69 -66
@13 GHz -85.5 -78.5 -74.5 -72 -69 -66
@15 GHz -85.5 -78.5 -74.5 -72 -69 -66
@18 GHz -85.5 -78.5 -74.5 -72 -69 -66
@23 GHz -85 -78 -74 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5
@26 GHz -84.5 -77.5 -73.5 -71 -68 -65
@28 GHz -84 -77 -73 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5
@32 GHz -83.5 -76.5 -72.5 -70 -67 -64
@38 GHz -83 -76 -72 -69.5 -66.5 -63.5
@42 GHz -81.5 -74.5 -70.5 -68 -65 -62

Table 2-145 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave VI (ISX2 Board, XPIC
disabled)
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@18 GHz -85 -77 -73.5 -71 -68 -65
@23 GHz -86 -78 -74.5 -72 -69 -66
Table 2-146 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwaveI (ISX2 board, XPIC
enabled)
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -92.5 -86.5 -82.5 -79.5 N/A N/A
@7 GHz -92.5 -86.5 -82.5 -79.5 N/A N/A
@8 GHz -92.5 -86.5 -82.5 -79.5 N/A N/A
@10 GHz -92 -86 -82 -79 N/A N/A
@10.5 -90 -84 -80 -77 N/A N/A

GHz
@11 GHz -92 -86 -82 -79 N/A N/A
@13 GHz -92 -86 -82 -79 N/A N/A
@15 GHz -92 -86 -82 -79 N/A N/A
@18 GHz -92 -86 -82 -79 N/A N/A
@23 GHz -91.5 -85.5 -81.5 -78.5 N/A N/A
@26 GHz -91 -85 -81 N/A N/A N/A
@28 GHz -90.5 -84.5 -80.5 N/A N/A N/A
@32 GHz -90 -84 -80 N/A N/A N/A
@38 GHz -89.5 -83.5 -79.5 N/A N/A N/A
@42 GHz -88 -82 -78 N/A N/A N/A

Table 2-147 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave II (ISX2 board, XPIC
enabled)
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -90.5 -83.5 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 N/A
@7 GHz -90.5 -83.5 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 N/A
@8 GHz -90.5 -83.5 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 N/A
@10 GHz -90 -83 -79 -76 -73 N/A
@10.5 -88 -81 -77 -74 -71 N/A

GHz
@11 GHz -90 -83 -79 -76 -73 N/A
@13 GHz -90 -83 -79 -76 -73 N/A
@15 GHz -90 -83 -79 -76 -73 N/A
@18 GHz -90 -83 -79 -76 -73 N/A
@23 GHz -89.5 -82.5 -78.5 -75.5 -72.5 N/A
@26 GHz -89 -82 -78 -75 N/A N/A
@28 GHz -88.5 -81.5 -77.5 -74.5 N/A N/A
@32 GHz -88 -81 -77 -74 N/A N/A
@38 GHz -87.5 -80.5 -76.5 -73.5 N/A N/A
@42 GHz -86 -79 -75 -72 N/A N/A
Table 2-148 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave III (ISX2 board, XPIC
enabled)
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -87.5 -80.5 -76.5 -74 -71 -68
@7 GHz -87.5 -80.5 -76.5 -74 -71 -68
@8 GHz -87.5 -80.5 -76.5 -74 -71 -68
@10 GHz -87 -80 -76 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5

@10.5 -85 -78 -74 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5

GHz
@11 GHz -87 -80 -76 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5
@13 GHz -87 -80 -76 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5
@15 GHz -87 -80 -76 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5
@18 GHz -87 -80 -76 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5
@23 GHz -86.5 -79.5 -75.5 -73 -70 -67
@26 GHz -86 -79 -75 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5
@28 GHz -85.5 -78.5 -74.5 -72 -69 -66
@32 GHz -85 -78 -74 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5
@38 GHz -84.5 -77.5 -73.5 -71 -68 -65
@42 GHz -83 -76 -72 -69.5 -66.5 -63.5
Table 2-149 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave IV (ISX2 board, XPIC
enabled)
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -84.5 -77.5 -73.5 -71 -68 -65
@7 GHz -84.5 -77.5 -73.5 -71 -68 -65
@8 GHz -84.5 -77.5 -73.5 -71 -68 -65
@10 GHz -84 -77 -73 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5

GHz
@11 GHz -84 -77 -73 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5
@13 GHz -84 -77 -73 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5
@15 GHz -84 -77 -73 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5
@18 GHz -84 -77 -73 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5
@23 GHz -83.5 -76.5 -72.5 -70 -67 -64

@26 GHz -83 -76 -72 -69.5 -66.5 -63.5
@28 GHz -82.5 -75.5 -71.5 -69 -66 -63
@32 GHz -82 -75 -71 -68.5 -65.5 -62.5
@38 GHz -81.5 -74.5 -70.5 -68 -65 -62
@42 GHz -80 -73 -69 -66.5 -63.5 -60.5
Table 2-150 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave V (ISX2 board, XPIC
enabled)
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@6 GHz -86 -79 -75 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5
@7 GHz -86 -79 -75 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5
@8 GHz -86 -79 -75 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5
@10 GHz -85.5 -78.5 -74.5 -72 -69 -66

GHz
@11 GHz -85.5 -78.5 -74.5 -72 -69 -66
@13 GHz -85.5 -78.5 -74.5 -72 -69 -66
@15 GHz -85.5 -78.5 -74.5 -72 -69 -66
@18 GHz -85.5 -78.5 -74.5 -72 -69 -66
@23 GHz -85 -78 -74 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5
@26 GHz -84.5 -77.5 -73.5 -71 -68 -65
@28 GHz -84 -77 -73 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5
@32 GHz -83.5 -76.5 -72.5 -70 -67 -64
@38 GHz -83 -76 -72 -69.5 -66.5 -63.5
@42 GHz -81.5 -74.5 -70.5 -68 -65 -62

Table 2-151 Typical receiver sensitivity of the Integrated IP microwave VI (ISX2 board, XPIC
enabled)
RSL@ BER=10-6 (dBm)
@18 GHz -85 -77 -73.5 -71 -68 -65
@23 GHz -86 -78 -74.5 -72 -69 -66
RFU O&M signal.
Item Performance

Item Performance

baseband signals


An ISX2 board occupies one slot. Its power consumption is less than 23 W.
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance

x D)
Weight 0.60 kg
Power Consumption
2.11 EM6T/EM6F
The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical ports and two
GE ports. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as follows: The
GE ports on the EM6T use fixed electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F use the SFP
modules and therefore can function as two FE/GE optical or GE electrical ports. The GE
electrical ports on the EM6F and the EM6T are compatible with the FE electrical ports.

The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91.
2.11.2 Application
EM6F/EM6T boards receive and transmit Ethernet services or carry MPLS tunnels. The
selection of EM6F, EM6T boards depends on desired port types.
NOTE
For the OptiX RTN 980L, configure EM6F/EM6T boards only when Ethernet ports on system control,
switching, and timing boards cannot meet customers' requirements.
Receiving and Transmitting Ethernet Services

EM6F/EM6T boards apply to OptiX RTN 980L NEs to receive and transmit FE/GE services
over Integrated IP radio. The FE/GE services come from customer premises or Layer 2 networks.

Figure 2-59 Application scenario of EM6F/EM6T boards (1)
IP radio network
FE/GE IF IF
EM6x CSHL CSHL EM6x FE/GE
board board
OptiX RTN 980L EM6x: EM6T/EM6F
NOTE
l IF boards shown in the preceding figure must be general-purpose IF boards or XPIC IF boards working
in native E1+Ethernet mode or native STM-1+Ethernet mode.
l In the preceding figure, if transmitted over Integrated IP radio, Ethernet services can be native Ethernet
services or ETH PWE3 services.
Carrying MPLS Tunnels

EM6F/EM6T boards carry MPLS tunnels when required, allowing MPLS/PWE3 services
traversing radio networks and regional backhaul networks to be transmitted in end-to-end mode.

Figure 2-60 Application scenario of EM6F/EM6T boards (2)
IF
CSHL EM6x FE/GE
board
MPLS tunnel
PW1
...
PWn
Packet radio network Regional backhaul network
CES/ATM E1
Service CES/ATM E1
IF Service
FE/GE FE/GE EM6x
board board FE/GE
board
CSHL CSHL
GE
GE
OptiX RTN 980L EM6x: EM6T/EM6F
NOTE
l If required, create two MPLS tunnels on both the packet radio network and regional backhaul network
so PWE3 services are transmitted on MS-PWs in end-to-end mode.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure can be Smart E1 processing boards or Ethernet interface
boards.

The EM6T/EM6F receives/transmits, processes, and converges four FE signals and two GE
signals. The GE port on the EM6F can receive/transmit 2xFE optical signals using FE small
form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical modules.
Table 2-155 lists the functions and features that the EM6T/EM6F supports. The EM6T/EM6F
needs to work with the packet switching unit of the system control, switching, and timing board
to implement Ethernet service functions.
EM6T EM6F
Basic functions Receives/Transmits FE/GE service signals and works

with the packet switching unit to process the received
FE/GE service signals.

EM6T EM6F
Port FE electrical Provides four Provides four

specifications port 10/100BASE-T(X) ports. 10/100BASE-T(X) ports.
GE port Provides two Provides two GE ports by

10/100/1000BASE-T(X) using SFP modules of any
ports (fixed). of the following types:
l Dual-fiber
bidirectional FE/GE
optical module
l Single-fiber
bidirectional FE/GE
module
l 10/100/1000BASE-T
(X) GE electrical
module
Backplane bus bandwidth 1 Gbit/s 1 Gbit/s
Switching mode l Centralized mode

l Distributed mode
NOTE
The centralized and distributed modes are available only for
native E-Line services.
l When a board applies the centralized mode, its carried
native E-Line services must be forwarded by the packet
switching unit of the cooperating system control board,
doubling the backplane-provided bandwidths used in
distributed mode.
l When a board applies the distributed mode, its carried
native E-Line services are forwarded by its switching unit,
resulting in deficiencies in functions that depend on the
packet switching unit of the cooperating system control
board.
l Ethernet services of other types must be forwarded by
system control boards' packet switching units. That is,
only the centralized mode is available for Ethernet
services of other types.

EM6T EM6F
Port attributes Working mode l FE electrical ports on EM6T/EM6F boards support

10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-
duplex, 100M half-duplex, and auto-negotiation.
l GE electrical ports on EM6T/EM6F boards support
10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-
duplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and
auto-negotiation.
l FE optical ports on EM6F boards support 100M
full-duplex.
l GE optical ports support 1000M full-duplex and
auto-negotiation.
TAG attributes l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,
or hybrid.
l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet
port.
Jumbo frame Supports jumbo frames with a maximum length of 9600

bytes.


l E-LAN services

LAG Inter-board Supported

LAG
LAG

G.8032 v1/v2.

EM6T EM6F
LPT Supported
LLDP Supported
QoS DiffServ Supports simple traffic classification by specifying

PHB service classes for service flows based on their
QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN
priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values) carried
by the packets.
Complex traffic Supports traffic classification at Ethernet ports based

classification on SMAC, DMAC, C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-
VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs +
C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN
priorities, or DSCP values carried by packets.
CAR Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports.
Queue Supports the following queue scheduling policies:

scheduling l SP
policies
l WRR
l SP+WRR
Congestion Supports tail drop and weighted random early detection

avoidance (WRED).
Traffic shaping Supports shaping for a specified port, priority queue,

or service flow, and supports a step of 64 kbit/s for the
peak information rate (PIR) and committed
information rate (CIR).
ETH OAM Ethernet service l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM

OAM function.
1731.
Ethernet port Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM

OAM function.
RMON Supported

EM6T EM6F
IEEE 1588v2 Time The EM6T does not The EM6F does not
synchronization support IEEE 1588v2 support IEEE 1588v2
time synchronization. time synchronization.
Frequency The EM6T does not The EM6F does not

synchronization support IEEE 1588v2 support IEEE 1588v2
frequency frequency
synchronization. synchronization.
PTP port Ports on the EM6T cannot Ports on the EM6F cannot
be used as PTP ports. be used as PTP ports.
1588 ACR The EM6T does not The EM6F does not
support 1588 ACR. support 1588 ACR.
Clock Clock source Synchronous Ethernet Synchronous Ethernet

(not supported by SFP
electrical modules)

DCN Inband DCN Each FE/GE port provides one inband DCN channel.

Warm reset and Supported

cold reset
Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query

consumption
information
query
Board voltage Supported

detection
Board Supported
temperature
detection

EM6T EM6F
Query of SFP Not supported Supported

module
information

This section describes how to process one GE signal on the EM6T, and it serves as an example
to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.
Figure 2-61 Functional block diagram

Backplane
GE signal
GE signal
GE signal
Control signal Ethernet Ethernet
access unit
Ethernet signal Logic signal
processing processing Packet switching unit
unit unit
FE signal Control signal
access unit
FE signal
FE signal
Control bus of the board
Control bus
Logic System control and
control unit communication unit
+3.3 V power supplied to the Power -48 V1

board supply unit
-48 V2
+3.3 V power supplied to some I/O
circuits on the board +3.3 V
Clock signal provided to the Clock unit System clock signal


Table 2-156 Signal processing in the receive direction
1 GE signal access l Receives/Transmits GE/FE signals.

unit/FE signal access l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
unit conversion for GE/FE signals.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping,
CRC checks, and Ethernet performance measurement
for frame signals.
2 Ethernet processing l Adds tags identifying ingress ports to Ethernet data

unit frames.
l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames.
l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification
and CAR traffic monitoring for Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the logic processing
unit.
3 Logic processing Transmits Ethernet data frames to the main and standby
unit packet switching units.
Table 2-157 Signal processing in the transmit direction
1 Logic processing unit l Selects Ethernet data frames from the packet
switching unit.
l Transmits Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet
processing unit.
2 Ethernet processing l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets.

unit l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and
queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to proper egress ports
based on egress tags contained in the Ethernet data
frames.

3 GE signal access l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC

unit/FE signal access code computing, and Ethernet performance
unit measurement.
l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for
Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated GE/
FE signals through Ethernet ports.

The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit by using management control
signals.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit and logic processing unit over the
control bus on the board.
The logic control unit communicates with the system control and communication units over the
system control bus. The configuration data and query commands from the system control and
communication unit are issued to the various units of the board through the logic control unit.
The command response reported by each unit on the board, and the alarms and performance
events are reported to the system control and communication unit also through the logic control
unit.
Power Supply Unit

l Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies
into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
l Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and then supplies the +3.3 V power
to some I/O circuits on the board.
Clock Unit
2.11.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, FE service ports, and GE service ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 2-62 Front panel of the EM6T

EM6T
PROG
STAT
SRV
GE1 GE2 FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4

Figure 2-63 Front panel of the EM6F
EM6F
LINK1
LINK2
PROG
STAT
SRV
GE1 GE2 FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4
Indicators
Table 2-158 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F


system.
board.
the board.

being initialized.


board.
board.


data.



data.

NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE ports.
Ports
Table 2-159 Description of the ports on the EM6T

Cable
GE1 GE service port (fixed RJ45 8.10 Network Cable

electrical port)
GE2
FE1 FE service port
FE2
FE3
FE4

Table 2-160 Description of the ports on the EM6F

Cable
GE1 GE service port (using SFP RJ45 SFP electrical 8.10 Network Cable/
modules) module/LC SFP optical 8.6 Fiber Jumper
GE2 module
FE1 FE service port RJ45 8.10 Network Cable
FE2
FE3
FE4
NOTE
On the NMS, GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively; FE1 to FE4 correspond to
PORT3 to PORT6 respectively.
The performance of the FE service ports on the EM6T/EM6F complies with the 10/100BASE-
T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service ports on the EM6T complies with the
10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service ports on the EM6F
complies with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard if SFP electrical modules are used. All
service ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. For the pin assignments
for the ports, see Table 2-161 and Table 2-162. For the front view of an RJ45 connector, see
Figure 2-64.
87654321
1 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A

(+)
2 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A

(-)

3 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B

(+)
4 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C

(+)
5 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C

(-)
6 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B

(-)
7 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D

(+)
8 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D

(-)

(+)

(-)

(+)

(+)

(-)

(-)

(+)

(-)

The RJ45 connector has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table
2-163.

data.

receiving data.
When the SFP ports on the EM6F function as optical ports, optical modules are required.
l When dual-fiber bidirectional SFP optical modules are used to provide ports, one SFP
optical module provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 2-65, in
which TX represents the transmit port and RX represents the receive port. One optical fiber
is connected to each port.
l When single-fiber bidirectional optical modules are used to provide ports, one optical
module provides only the port on the left. This port is an optical port that can receive and
transmit service signals. One optical fiber is connected to this port.
Figure 2-65 Ports of an SFP optical module
TX RX
2.11.6 Valid Slots

The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the
NMS are the same as the physical slots.

Figure 2-66 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis
Slot 13 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 14 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 15
Figure 2-67 Logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS

(FAN)
Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 3 and 5 >
Slots 12 and 14 > Slots 11 and 13 > Slots 8 and
10 > Slots 7 and 9


The FE/GE small form-factor pluggable (SFP) ports on the EM6F/EM6T support multiple types
of SFP modules.
Table 2-165 Types of SFP modules that the FE/GE port supports

Transmission
Distance
Dual-fiber 34060286 1000Base-SX 850 nm, 0.5 km

bidirectional GE
module 34060473 1000Base-LX 1310 nm, 10 km
34060298 1000BASE-VX 1310 nm, 40 km
34060513 1550 nm, 40 km
34060360 1000BASE-ZX 1550 nm, 80 km
Single-fiber 34060475 1000BASE-BX-D Transmit: 1490 nm;

bidirectional GE receive: 1310 nm
module 10 km

receive: 1490 nm
10 km

receive: 1310 nm
40 km

receive: 1490 nm
40 km

bidirectional FE
34060281 100BASE-VX 1310 nm, 40 km
34060282 100BASE-ZX 1550 nm, 80 km
Single-fiber 34060364 100BASE-BX-D Transmit: 1550 nm;

bidirectional FE receive: 1310 nm
module 15 km

receive: 1550 nm
15 km


Transmission
Distance

receive: 1310 nm
40 km

receive: 1550 nm
40 km
Electrical 34100052 10/100/1000BASE-T -

module (X)
NOTE
For the specifications for each type of optical module, see Table 2-167-Table 2-171 in 2.11.8 Technical
Specifications.
The types of SFP modules listed in the following table can be identified by board feature codes
in the bar codes of EM6F boards. A board feature code refers to the number next to the board
name in a bar code. The bar code of the EM6T does not contain a board feature code.
Table 2-166 Board feature code of the EM6F
Board Feature Code Module Type Part Number of the

Module
01 1000BASE-SX 34060286
02 1000BASE-LX 34060473
03 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) 34100052
10 100BASE-FX 34060287
11 100BASE-LX 34060276

This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port
performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Performance of FE/GE Optical Ports

The FE/GE optical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists
the main specifications for the FE/GE optical ports.

NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980L uses SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces. Users can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

transmission)
Item Performance

power (dBm)
Overload (dBm) 0 -3
Item Performance

km) km) km)

(dBm)


Item Performance

Rx: 1310 Rx: 1490 Rx: 1310 Rx: 1490
Rx: 1260 to 1360 Rx: 1480 to Rx: 1260 to
1360 Rx: 1480 to 1500 1360
1500

(dBm)

Item Performance

(2 km) (15 km) (40 km) (80 km)

(dBm)
Overload (dBm) -14 -8 -10 -10

Item Performance

BX-D (15 BX-U (15 BX-D (40 BX-U (40
km) km) km) km)
Rx: 1310 Rx: 1550 Rx: 1310 Rx: 1550
1580 1360 1580 1360
1360 1580 1360 1580

power (dBm)
Overload (dBm) -8 -8 -10 -10
Performance of GE Electrical Ports

The GE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists
the main specifications for the GE electrical ports.
Item Performance

100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)

Interface type RJ45

Performance of FE Electrical Ports

The FE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists
the main specifications for the FE electrical ports.
Table 2-173 FE electrical interface performance
Item Performance

100 (100BASE-TX)

Interface type RJ45
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
EM6T EM6F
Dimensions(H x W x D) 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight 0.37 kg 0.40 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EM6T: < 10.4 W
Power consumption of the EM6F: < 11.3 W
2.12 EG4
EG4 boards are 4xGE interface boards, which provide flexible combinations of port types to
meet a wide variety of service requirements. One EG4 board provides a maximum of four ports,
two always being RJ45 electrical ports and the other two being small form-factor pluggable
(SFP) ports or RJ45 electrical ports.

The functional version of EG4 boards is SL91.

2.12.2 Application
EG4 boards receive and transmit GE services or carry Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS)
tunnels.
Receiving and Transmitting Ethernet Services

EG4 boards apply to OptiX RTN 980L NEs to receive and transmit Ethernet services over
Integrated IP radio. The GE services come from user-side equipment (such as base stations,
routers, and switches) or Layer 2 networks.
Figure 2-68 Application scenario of EG4 boards (1)
IP radio network
IF IF
GE EG4 CSHL CSHL EG4 GE
board board
OptiX RTN 980L
NOTE
l In the preceding figure, if transmitted over Integrated IP radio, Ethernet services can be native Ethernet
services or ETH pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) services.
Carrying MPLS Tunnels

EG4 boards can carry MPLS tunnels when required, allowing MPLS/PWE3 services traversing
radio networks and regional backhaul networks to be transmitted in end-to-end mode.

Figure 2-69 Application scenario of EG4 boards (2)
IF
CSHL EG4 GE
board
MPLS Tunnel
PW1
...
PWn
Packet radio network Regional Backhaul network
CES/ATM E1
Service CES/ATM E1
IF Service
FE/GE GE EG4
board board FE/GE
board
CSHL CSHL
GE
GE
OptiX RTN 980L
NOTE
l If required, two MPLS tunnels can be created on both the packet radio network and regional backhaul
network, so PWE3 services can be transmitted on multi-segment pseudo wires (MS-PWs) in end-to-
end mode.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure can be either Smart E1 processing boards or Ethernet
interface boards.

EG4 boards receive/transmit, process, and converge 4xGE service signals. They also can receive/
transmit 2xFE optical signals using FE SFP optical modules installed at their SFP ports.
Table 2-175 lists the functions and features supported by EG4 boards. EG4 boards implement
Ethernet service functions by working with packet switching units on the system control,
Table 2-175 Functions and features that EG4 boards support
Basic functions Receives/Transmits GE service

signals, and processes these signals by
working with the packet switching
unit.

Port specifications GE port Provides four GE ports.

l Provides two fixed GE electrical
ports.
l Provides two fixed GE electrical
ports or two SFP optical ports.
Supports the following types of
SFP modules:
– Dual-fiber bidirectional FE/GE
optical module
– Single-fiber bidirectional FE/
GE module
Backplane bus bandwidth 2.5 Gbit/s for slots 1 to 2 and 1 Gbit/s

for slots 3 to 14
Switching mode Centralized mode

NOTE
When a board works in centralized mode,
all Ethernet services carried on the board
must be forwarded by the packet switching
unit of the cooperating system control
board.
Port attributes Working mode l GE electrical ports support 10M/

100M/1000M full-duplex and
auto-negotiation.
l GE optical ports support 1000M
full-duplex and auto-negotiation.
l FE optical ports support 100M full-
duplex.
Tag attributes l The tag attribute can be tag aware,

access, or hybrid.
l Sets and queries the tag attribute of
a port.
Jumbo frames Supports jumbo frames with a

maximum length of 9600 bytes.
Traffic control Supports port-based traffic control that

complies with IEEE 802.3x.

Services Native Ethernet services l E-Line services

– Port-based E-line services
– E-Line services carried by
QinQ links
l E-LAN services
– E-LAN services based on IEEE
802.1d bridges
802.1q bridges
802.1ad bridges
PWE3 Ethernet services l E-Line services carried by PWs

l E-Aggr services carried by PWs
l E-LAN services carried by PWs,
that is, virtual private LAN
services (VPLSs)
Link aggregation group Inter-board LAG Supported

(LAG)
Intra-board LAG Supported
Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) Supported (complies with ITU-T G.

8032 v1/v2)
MPLS functions Refer to the description of MPLS/

PWE3 functions provided in the
PWE3 functions sections about system control,
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Supports Multiple Spanning Tree

Protocol (MSTP) that runs only
Common and Internal Spanning Tree
(CIST) instances. This type of MSTP
provides the same functions as Rapid
Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).
Link-state pass through (LPT) Supported
LLDP Supported
IEEE 1588v2 clock Time synchronization Supported
Frequency Supported
synchronization

Precision Time Protocol l The Ethernet ports of EG4 boards

(PTP) port can work as PTP ports if the NEs
housing the boards work in
ordinary clock (OC), boundary
clock (BC), or transparent clock
(TC) mode.
l The Ethernet ports of EG4 boards
can work as PTP BC ports or PTP
TC ports if the NEs housing the
boards work in TC+BC mode.
Quality of service (QoS) DiffServ Supports simple traffic classification

by specifying per-hop behaviors
(PHBs) for traffic flows based on their
QoS information, such as C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP
values, or MPLS EXP values.
Complex traffic Supports traffic classification based on

classification the following information carried by
packets: SAMC, DMAC, C-VLAN
IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-
VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-
VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or
DSCP values.
Committed access rate Provides the CAR function for traffic

(CAR) flows at ports.
Shaping Supports traffic shaping for a specific

port, prioritized queue, or traffic flow.
Queue scheduling l Strict-priority (SP)

policies l Weighted round robin (WRR)
l SP+WRR
Congestion avoidance Supports tail drop and weighted

random early detection (WRED).
Traffic shaping Supports shaping for a specified port,

priority queue, or service flow, and
supports a step of 64 kbit/s for the peak
information rate (PIR) and committed

ETH OAM functions Ethernet service OAM l Supports ETH OAM functions that
comply with IEEE 802.1ag.
l Supports frame loss measurement,
frame delay measurement, and
delay variation measurement
functions that comply with ITU-T
Y.1731.
Ethernet port OAM Supports ETH OAM functions that

comply with IEEE 802.3ah.
Remote network monitoring (RMON) Supported
Clock protection l Protection implemented by

providing clock sources with
different priorities
l Protection implemented by
running the Synchronization Status
Message (SSM) protocol
running the extended SSM
protocol
Data communication Inband DCN Each port provides one inband DCN
network (DCN) channel.
Operation and Loopback l Supports inloops at the PHY layer

management of Ethernet ports.
l Supports inloops at the MAC layer
of Ethernet ports.
Warm and cold resetting Supported
information query
Power consumption Supported

query
Voltage monitoring Supported
Temperature monitoring Supported
SFP module information Supported

query


This section describes how the function units of an EG4 board process GE signals.
Figure 2-70 EG4 board function block diagram

Backplane
GE signal GE
access signal Ethernet Ethernet
GE optical signal unit Ethernet signal Logic signal
GE electrical signal Management unit unit
control signal
Control bus of
the board
Control bus
+3.3 V power
+3.3 V
supplied to the board
Clock signal provided to System clock signal

Clock unit
Table 2-176 Signal processing in the receive direction of an EG4 board
1 GE signal access unit l Receives GE signals.

l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for GE signals.
cyclic redundancy check (CRC), and Ethernet
performance measurement for frame signals.

unit frames.
unit.

Table 2-177 Signal processing in the transmit direction of an EG4 board
switching unit.
processing unit.

based on egress tags contained in Ethernet data
frames.
3 GE signal access unit l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC

code computing, and Ethernet performance
measurement.
Ethernet data frames.
l GE electrical ports transmit GE electrical signals.
l GE optical ports convert optical signals into electrical
signals and transmit the electrical signals.

The Ethernet processing unit controls the GE signal access unit using management control
signals.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit and logic processing unit using the
control bus.
The logic control unit communicates with the main and standby system control and
communication units using the system control bus. Specifically, the logic control unit transmits
configuration data and query commands from the main and standby system control and
communication units to other units on the EG4; it also transmits response messages, alarms, and
performance events from other units on the EG4 to the main and standby system control and
communication units.

Clock Unit
2.12.5 Front Panel

An EG4 board has indicators, GE service ports, and a power caution label on its front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 2-71 Front panel of an EG4 board

EG4
STAT
SRV
L/A1
L/A2
L/A3
L/A4
OUT1/IN1 OUT2/IN2 1 2 3 4
Indicators
Table 2-178 Status explanation for indicators on an EG4 board
Off The board is not working, not created, or not

powered on.
On (red) A critical or major alarm has been reported.
On (yellow) A minor alarm has been reported.

electrical
port).
intervals


connected.

electrical
port).
intervals

connected.

port 3)

connected.

port 4)

connected.
Ports
Table 2-179 Ports on an EG4 board
Port Description Connector Required Cable

Type
OUT1/IN1 FE/GE optical port LC SFP 8.6 Fiber Jumper

optical
OUT2/IN2 module
1 GE service port (fixed electrical RJ45 8.10 Network

port) Cable

Port Description Connector Required Cable

Type
2 NOTE
Optical port 1 and electrical port 1 share
one physical channel, and optical port
2 and electrical port 2 share another
physical channel.
3 GE service port (fixed electrical RJ45

port)
4
GE electrical ports on EG4 board comply with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard in

performance and support the medium dependent interface (MDI), MDI crossover (MDI-X), and
auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. All GE electrical ports on EG4 board use RJ45 connectors. For the
front view of an RJ45 connector, see Figure 2-72. For pin assignments for RJ45 connectors, see
Table 2-180 and Table 2-181.
87654321
Table 2-180 Pin assignments for RJ45 connectors in MDI mode

(+) wire A (+)

(-) wire A (-)

wire B (+)

wire C (+)

wire C (-)


wire B (-)

wire D (+)

wire D (-)
Table 2-181 Pin assignments for RJ45 connectors in MDI-X mode

wire B (+)

wire B (-)

(+) wire A (+)

wire D (+)

wire D (-)

(-) wire A (-)

wire C (+)

wire C (-)
An RJ45 connector has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table
2-182.


data.

receiving data.
EG4 boards require SFP optical modules to provide GE optical ports.

l When dual-fiber bidirectional SFP optical modules are used, one optical module provides
one OUT port and one IN port. For details, see Figure 2-73, in which OUT represents the
transmit port and IN represents the receive port. One optical fiber is connected to each port.
l When single-fiber bidirectional optical modules are used, one optical module provides only
port, which can both receive and transmit service signals. One optical fiber is connected to
this port.
OUT IN
2.12.6 Valid Slots

An EG4 board can be inserted in any of slots 1 to 14. Its logical slot on the network management
Figure 2-74 Slots for EG4 boards in a chassis
Slot 13 (EG4) Slot 14 (EG4)
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 15

Figure 2-75 Logical slots of EG4 boards on the NMS

(FAN)
Item Description
10 > Slots 7 and 9
NOTE
When working with an CSHL board, if an EG4 board is inserted in any of slots 1 to 2, the backplane bandwidth
is 2.5 Gbit/s; if an EG4 board is inserted in any of slots 3 to 14, the backplane bandwidth is 1.0 Gbit/s. It is
recommended to insert EG4 boards in slots 1 to 2.

FE/GE SFP ports on EG4 boards support multiple types of SFP modules.
Table 2-184 Types of SFP modules that FE/GE ports support

Transmission
Distance
Dual-fiber 34060286 1000BASE-SX 850 nm, 0.5 km

bidirectional GE
34060298 1000BASE-VX 1310 nm, 40 km
34060513 1550 nm, 40 km


Transmission
Distance
34060360 1000BASE-ZX 1550 nm, 80 km

bidirectional GE 1490 nm; receive
10 km

1310 nm; receive
wavelength: 1490 nm
10 km
34060540 1000BASE-BX-D Transmit wavelength:

1490 nm; receive
wavelength: 1310 nm
40 km

1310 nm; receive
wavelength: 1490 nm
40 km

bidirectional FE
34060281 100BASE-VX 1310 nm, 40 km
34060282 100BASE-ZX 1550 nm, 80 km

bidirectional FE 1550 nm; receive
15 km

1310 nm; receive
wavelength: 1550 nm
15 km

receive: 1310 nm
40 km

receive: 1550 nm
40 km

NOTE
For specifications for each type of optical module, see Table 2-186 to Table 2-190 in 2.12.8 Technical
Specifications.
The types of SFP modules listed in the following table can be identified by feature codes in the
bar codes of EG4 boards. A feature code refers to the number next to the board name in a bar
code.
Table 2-185 Feature codes of EG4 boards
Feature Code Module Type Part

Number
of the
Module
01 1000Base-SX 34060286
02 1000Base-LX 34060473
10 100BASE-FX 34060287
11 100BASE-LX 34060276

This section describes board specifications, including the Ethernet service port performance,
mechanical behaviors, and power consumption.
FE/GE Optical Port Performance

FE/GE optical ports on EG4 boards comply with IEEE 802.3. The following tables list main
specifications for the FE/GE optical ports.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980L uses SFP modules to provide GE optical ports. Different types of SFP optical
modules can be used to provide GE optical ports with different classification codes and transmission
distances.

transmission)
Item Performance

Item Performance

power (dBm)
Overload (dBm) 0 -3
Item Performance

km) km) km)

(dBm)
Item Performance

Rx: 1310 Rx: 1490 Rx: 1310 Rx: 1490

Item Performance

Rx: 1260 to 1360 Rx: 1480 to Rx: 1260 to
1360 Rx: 1480 to 1500 1360
1500

(dBm)
Item Performance

(2 km) (15 km) (40 km) (80 km)

(dBm)
Overload (dBm) -14 -8 -10 -10

Item Performance

BX-D (15 BX-U (15 BX-D (40 BX-U (40
km) km) km) km)
Rx: 1310 Rx: 1550 Rx: 1310 Rx: 1550
1580 1360 1580 1360
1360 1580 1360 1580

power (dBm)
Overload (dBm) -8 -8 -10 -10
GE Electrical Port Performance

GE electrical ports on EG4 boards comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists main
specifications for the GE electrical ports.
Item Performance

100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)

Interface type RJ45

Item Performance
Weight 0.3 kg
Power Consumption
Table 2-193 Power consumption
Board Power Consumption (W)
EG4 <6W
2.13 EX1
EX1 boards are 1x10GE processing boards.

The functional version of EX1 boards is SL91.
2.13.2 Application
EX1 boards provide large-capacity Ethernet aggregation links between a microwave network
and the local metropolitan area network.
Access of Ethernet Services at an Aggregation Site for Upstream Transmission

The upstream capacity of a high-density aggregation site is usually higher than 1 Gbit/s. A single
port on an EX1 board can provide a 10 Gbit/s bandwidth. It is unnecessary to configure multiple
GE ports into a LAG for load sharing. The use of EX1 boards can reduce deployment costs and
simplify installation.

Figure 2-76 Access of Ethernet services at an aggregation site for upstream transmission
Regional
network
RTN PTN/ATN/OSN RTN PTN/ATN/OSN
GE board
GE board EX1
GE board 10GE board
10GE board 10GE
GE board
LAG (nxGE)
RTN 980L RTN 900 RTN 300

EX1 board receive/transmit, process, and converge 1x10GE service signals.
Table 2-194 lists the functions and features supported by EX1 boards.
Table 2-194 Functions and features that EX1 boards support
Basic functions Receives/Transmits 10GE service

signals, and processes these signals by
working with the packet switching
unit.
Port specifications 10GE port One (XFP optical module)
Switching mode Centralized mode

NOTE
When a board works in centralized mode,
all Ethernet services carried on the board
must be forwarded by the packet switching
unit of the cooperating system control
board.

Port attributes Working mode Supports the 10 Gbit/s full-duplex

mode and supports the LAN or WAN
mode.
Tag attributes l The tag attribute can be tag aware,

access, or hybrid.
l Sets and queries the tag attribute of
a port.
Jumbo frames Supports jumbo frames with a

maximum length of 9600 bytes.
Traffic control Supports port-based traffic control that

complies with IEEE 802.3x.
Services Native Ethernet services l E-Line services

– Port-based E-line services
– E-Line services carried by
QinQ links
l E-LAN services
802.1d bridges
802.1q bridges
802.1ad bridges
PWE3 Ethernet services l E-Line services carried by PWs

l E-Aggr services carried by PWs
l E-LAN services carried by PWs,
that is, virtual private LAN
services (VPLSs)
LAG Inter-board LAG Supported
ERPS Supported (complies with ITU-T G.

8032 v1/v2)
MPLS functions Refer to the description of MPLS/

PWE3 functions provided in the
PWE3 functions sections about system control,

Spanning Tree Protocol Supports Multiple Spanning Tree

(STP) Protocol (MSTP) that runs only
Common and Internal Spanning Tree
(CIST) instances. This type of MSTP
provides the same functions as Rapid
Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).
IGMP Snooping Supported
LPT Supported
LLDP Supported
1588 V2 Time synchronization Supported
Frequency Supported
synchronization
Precision Time Protocol l The Ethernet ports of EG4 boards

(PTP) port can work as PTP ports if the NEs
housing the boards work in
ordinary clock (OC), boundary
clock (BC), or transparent clock
(TC) mode.
l The Ethernet ports of EG4 boards
can work as PTP BC ports or PTP
TC ports if the NEs housing the
boards work in TC+BC mode.
QoS DiffServ Supports simple traffic classification

by specifying per-hop behaviors
(PHBs) for traffic flows based on their
QoS information, such as C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP
values, or MPLS EXP values.
Complex traffic Supports traffic classification based on

classification the following information carried by
packets: SAMC, DMAC, C-VLAN
IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-
VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-
VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or
DSCP values.
Committed access rate Provides the CAR function for traffic

(CAR) flows at ports.

Queue scheduling l SP
policies l WRR
l SP+WRR
Congestion avoidance Supports tail drop and weighted

random early detection (WRED).
Traffic shaping Supports shaping for a specified port,

priority queue, or service flow, and
supports a step of 64 kbit/s for the peak
information rate (PIR) and committed
ETH OAM Ethernet service OAM l Supports ETH OAM functions that
comply with IEEE 802.1ag.
l Supports frame loss measurement,
frame delay measurement, and
delay variation measurement
functions that comply with ITU-T
Y.1731.
Ethernet port OAM Supports ETH OAM functions that

comply with IEEE 802.3ah.
Remote network monitoring (RMON) Supported

running the Synchronization Status
running the extended SSM
protocol
Data communication Inband DCN Each port provides one inband DCN
network (DCN) channel.
Operation and Loopback l Supports inloops at the PHY layer

management of Ethernet ports.
l Supports inloops at the MAC layer
of Ethernet ports.
information query


query
Voltage monitoring Supported
Temperature monitoring Supported
XFP module Supported

information query

This section describes how the function units of an EX1 board process 10GE signals.
Figure 2-77 EX1 board function block diagram

Backplane
10 GE 10 GE
signal signal Ethernet Ethernet
10 GE optical
access unit Ethernet signal Logic signal
signal
Management unit unit
control signal
Control bus of
the board
Control bus
+3.3 V power
+3.3 V
Clock signal provided to System clock signal

Clock unit

Table 2-195 Signal processing in the receive direction of an EX1 board
1 10GE signal access l Receives 10GE signals.

unit l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for 10GE signals.
cyclic redundancy check (CRC), and Ethernet
performance measurement for frame signals.

unit frames.
unit.
Table 2-196 Signal processing in the transmit direction of an EX1 board
switching unit.
processing unit.

based on egress tags contained in Ethernet data
frames.

3 GE signal access unit l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC

measurement.
l Transmits 10GE signals through an Ethernet port.

The Ethernet processing unit controls the GE signal access unit using management control
signals.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit and logic processing unit using the
control bus.
The logic control unit communicates with the main and standby system control and
communication units using the system control bus. Specifically, the logic control unit transmits
configuration data and query commands from the main and standby system control and
communication units to other units on the EX1; it also transmits response messages, alarms, and
performance events from other units on the EX1 to the main and standby system control and
communication units.
Clock Unit
2.13.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 2-78 Front panel of the EX1

OUT IN
EX1
STAT
SRV
L/A

Indicators
Table 2-197 Status explanation for indicators on an EX1

properly.
Off l The board is not working

or created.
l There is no power
SRV On (green) The system/service is

normal.


L/A On (green) The port is connected

correctly (link up), but is not
receiving or transmitting
data.
Blinks (red) three times every The port on the board

second, 300 ms on and 300 receives too strong power.
ms off
Blinks (red) once every The port on the board

second, 300 ms on and 700 receives too weak power.
ms off
Blinks (orange) The port is connected

correctly (link up), and is
receiving and transmitting
data.
Off The optical fiber is not

connected to the port, or the
port is abnormal (link down/
LOS).

Ports
Table 2-198 Ports on an EX1 board
Port Descripti Connector Type Pin Required

on Assignment Cable
IN Receives XFP optical module l OUT 8.6 Fiber

10GE OUT IN represents the Jumper
signals. transmit port.
l IN represents
OUT Transmits
the receive
10GE
port.
signals.
2.13.6 Valid Slots

An EX1 board can be inserted in any of slots 1 to 2. Its logical slot on the network management
Figure 2-79 Slots for EX1 boards in a chassis
Slot 13 Slot 14
Slot 11 Slot 12
Slot 9 Slot 10
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 7 Slot 8
Slot 15
Slot 5 Slot 6
Slot 3 Slot 4
Slot 1 (EX1) Slot 2 (EX1)

Figure 2-80 Logical slots of EX1 boards on the NMS
Slot 13 Slot 14
Slot 11 Slot 12
Slot 9 Slot 10

(FAN)
Slot 7 Slot 8
Slot 5 Slot 6
Slot 3 Slot 4
Slot 1 (EX1) Slot 2 (EX1)
Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slot 1, slot 2
2.13.7 Types of XFP Modules

The 10GE XFP port on an EX1 board supports multiple types of XFP optical modules.
Table 2-200 Types of XFP modules supported by a 10GE port
Category BOM Number Module Type Wavelength and

Transmission
Distance
Dual-fiber 34060362 10GBase-SW/SR 850 nm, 0.3 km

bidirectional
10GE module 34060313 10GBASE-LW/LR 1310 nm, 10 km
34060322 10GBASE-EW/ER 1550 nm, 40 km
34060361 10GBASE-ZW/ZR 1550 nm, 80 km
34060577 10GBASE-EW/ER 1550 nm, 40 km
Single-fiber 34060780 10GBASE-LW-D, Transmit wavelength:

bidirectional 10GBASE-LR-D 1330 nm; receive
10GE module wavelength: 1270 nm
10 km

Category BOM Number Module Type Wavelength and

Transmission
Distance
34060781 10GBASE-LW-U, Transmit wavelength:

10GBASE-LR-U 1270 nm; receive
wavelength: 1330 nm
10 km
NOTE
For the detailed specifications of each type of optical module, see Table 2-201 to Table 2-202 in 2.13.8
Technical Specifications.

This section describes board specifications, including the Ethernet service port performance,
mechanical behaviors, and power consumption.
Table 2-201 10GE optical interface performance(two-fiber bidirectional)
Item Performance
Classification 10GBASE-SW 10GBASE-LW 10GBASE-EW 10GBASE-ZW

code 10GBASE-SR 10GBASE-LR 10GBASE-ER 10GBASE-ZR
Nominal 850 1310 1550 1550

wavelength
(nm)
Transmission 0.3 10 40 80
distance (km)
Operating 840 to 860 1260 to 1355 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565

wavelength
(nm)
Average optical –1.3 to -7.3 -8.2 to 0.5 -4.7 to 4 0 to 4

output power
(dBm)
Receiver –7.5 -12.6 -14.1 -21

sensitivity
(dBm)
Overload (dBm) –1 0.5 -1 -7
Extinction ratio 3 3.5 3 3

(dB)

Table 2-202 10GE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional)
Item Performance
Classification 10GBASE-LW-D 10GBASE-LW-U 10GBASE-EW-D 10GBASE-EW-U

code 10GBASE-LR-D 10GBASE-LR-U 10GBASE-ER-D 10GBASE-ER-U
Nominal Tx: 1330 Tx: 1270 Tx: 1330 Tx: 1270

wavelength (nm) Rx: 1270 Rx: 1330 Rx: 1270 Rx: 1330
Transmission 10 10 40 40
distance (km)
Operating Tx: 1320 to 1340 Tx: 1260 to 1360 Tx: 1320 to 1340 Tx: 1260 to 1360
wavelength (nm) Rx: 1260 to 1280 Rx: 1480 to 1500 Rx: 1260 to 1280 Rx: 1480 to 1500
Average optical -5 to 0 -5 to 0 1 to 5 1 to 5
output power (dBm)
Receiver sensitivity -14 -14 -15 -15

(dBm)
Overload (dBm) 0.5 0.5 –3 –3
Extinction ratio (dB) 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
Item Performance
Weight 0.5 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption ≤ 13.1 W
2.14 EMS6
The EMS6 is an FE/GE EoSDH processing board providing the L2 switching function. It
provides four FE electrical ports and two GE ports using small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
optical/electrical modules.


The functional version of the EMS6 is SL91.
2.14.2 Application
EMS6 boards transmit Ethernet services on TDM radio networks or native Ethernet services
from Hybrid radio networks through third-party SDH optical networks.
Transmitting Ethernet Services over SDH/PDH Radio

If OptiX RTN 980L NEs transmit Ethernet services over SDH/PDH radio, EMS6 boards receive,
transmit, encapsulate, and map Ethernet services that come from customer premises or Layer 2
networks.
Figure 2-81 Application scenario of EMS6 boards (1)
TDM radio network SDH network
IF
board Service
FE/GE STM-N
IF board
EMS6 CSHL CSHL
board
IF STM-N
board
OptiX RTN 980L MSTP
NOTE
l IF boards shown in the preceding figure can be TDM IF boards, or general-purpose IF boards or XPIC
IF boards working in SDH radio mode.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure are STM-1 interface boards.
Helping Hybrid Radio Services Traverse Third-Party SDH Optical Networks

If OptiX RTN 980L NEs converge Ethernet services over Hybrid radio and the converged
Ethernet services need to traverse third-party SDH optical networks, EMS6 boards can apply to
the NEs to encapsulate and map converged and locally received Ethernet services.

Figure 2-82 Application scenario of EMS6 boards (2)
Hybrid radio network SDH network
EMS6
IF CSHL
board Service STM-N
board
STM-N
OptiX RTN 980L MSTP Traffic flow
NOTE
l As shown in the preceding figure, the traffic flow is as follows: Hybrid IF board sends received Ethernet
services to the packet switching unit of the CSHL board, the packet switching unit sends the Ethernet
services to the EMS6 board, the EMS6 board encapsulates the Ethernet services into VC-4s and
transmits the VC-4s to the cross-connect unit of the CSHL board, the cross-connect unit grooms the
VC-4s to SDH service ports, and the ports send the VC-4s to the third-party SDH optical network.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure are STM-1 interface boards.

The EMS6 receives/transmits 4xFE signals and 2xGE signals from the front panel and 1xGE
packet plane signals from the backplane, and encapsulates these Ethernet signals into
synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) signals to transmit the Ethernet signals on the SDH
network. The EMS6 supports transparent service transmission and Layer 2 switching.
Table 2-204 lists the functions and features that the EMS6 supports.

Basic functions Receives/transmits 4xFE signals, 2xGE signals, and

1xGE packet plane signals, and performs EoSDH
processing.
Port specifications FE Provides four 10/100BASE-T(X) ports.

electrical
port
GE port Provides two GE ports by using small form-factor

pluggable (SFP) modules of any of the following types:
l 1000Base-SX
l 1000Base-LX
l 1000Base-VX
l 1000Base-ZX
l 10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
Port attributes Working l The FE ports support 10M full-duplex, 100M full-
mode duplex, and auto-negotiation.
l The GE electrical ports support 10M full-duplex,
10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-
duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.
l The GE optical ports support 1000M full-duplex
and auto-negotiation.
TAG l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet

attributes port.
or hybrid.
Jumbo Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length

frame of 9600 bytes.
Traffic Supports the port-based traffic control function that

control complies with IEEE 802.3x.
function
Services Ethernet Supports the EPL services based on ports.

private line
(EPL)
services
Ethernet Supports the following types of EVPL services:

virtual l EVPL services based on port+VLAN
private line
(EVPL) l EVPL services based on QinQ
services

Ethernet Supports the EPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1d

private bridges.
LAN
(EPLAN)
services
Ethernet Supports the following types of EVPLAN services:

virtual l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
private
LAN l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
(EVPLAN)
services
Encapsulation and Encapsulati Supports the following encapsulation formats:

mapping on format l Generic Framing Procedure (GFP)
l High Level Data Link Control (HDLC)
l Link Access Protocol-SDH (LAPS)
Maximum 4xVC-4
TDM
service
capacity
supported
by the
backplane
Maximum 8
number of
VCTRUN
Ks
supported
by the board
Maximum l VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK7: 100 Mbit/s

bandwidth l VCTRUNK8: 622 Mbit/s
supported
by each
VCTRUN
K
Link Supported
capacity
adjustment
scheme
(LCAS)
Link aggregation Inter-board Not supported

group (LAG) LAG

LAG NOTE
Port 7 (bridging port) on the EMS6 does not support intra-
board LAG.
Ethernet ring protection switching Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T
(ERPS) G.8032 v1.
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Supports the STP and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP), which comply with IEEE 802.1w.
IGMP Snooping Supported
Link state pass through (LPT)a Supported

NOTE
Port 7 (bridging port) on the EMS6 does not support LPT.
QoS Traffic Supports the following traffic classification modes:

classificatio l Traffic classification based on ports
n
l Traffic classification based on port+C-VLAN ID
l Traffic classification based on port+S-VLAN ID
+S-VLAN ID
CoS Schedules packets in traffic flows to eight egress

queues of different CoSs by:
l Simple
l VLAN priority
l IP TOS value
l DSCP value
Committed Provides the CAR function for traffic flows.

access rate
(CAR)
Shaping Supports traffic shaping for a specific port or egress

queue.
Queue Supports the following scheduling policies:

scheduling l SP
policy
l WRR
l SP+WRR

ETH OAM l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM

function.
function.
NOTE
Port 7 (bridging port) on the EMS6 does not support IEEE
802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM function.
Remote monitoring (RMON) Supported
Clock Clock Synchronous Ethernet

source NOTE
Ports 7 and 8 (bridging ports) on the EMS6 board do not
support synchronous Ethernet.

l Protection by running the Synchronization Status
OM Loopback Supports the following loopback types:

l Supports inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports
excluding ports 7 and 8 (bridging ports).
l Supports inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports
excluding port 8 (bridging port).
l Supports inloops on VC-3 paths.
Traffic Supported
monitoring
Warm reset Supported

and cold
reset
Board Supported
manufactur
ing
information
query
Board Supported
power
consumptio
n
information
query

Board Supported
temperature
detection
NOTE
a: The LPT function is used to detect faults that occur on a service access node or an intermediate
transmission network, and instruct the service access node to immediately start the backup network for
communication. The LPT function ensures the normal transmission of important data.

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the EMS6, using FE/GE signal
processing as an example.
Figure 2-83 Functional block diagram of the EMS6

Backplane
Ethernet signal SDH signal

FE signal
FE signal access Ethernet Logic
unit Encapsulation Mapping
processing processing Cross-connect
unit unit
unit unit unit
GE signal
GE signal access
unit
GE signal Packet
switching unit
Management
control signal
Control signal of the board
Logic Control bus System control and

control communication unit
unit
-48 V1
+3.3 V power supplied Power
to the board supply unit -48 V2
+3.3 V backup power
supplied to certain auxiliary +3.3 V
circuits on the board


Table 2-205 Signal processing in the receive direction
1 FE/GE signal access l Receives FE/GE signals. If GE signals are received

unit through a GE optical port, O/E conversion is required.
conversion for FE/GE signals.
cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code processing, and
Ethernet performance measurement for frames.
2 Ethernet processing l Receives Ethernet signals from the FE/GE signal

unit access unit and GE signals from the packet switching
unit.
l Performs QoS processing, such as traffic
classification and committed access rate (CAR)
control, for Ethernet data frames based on service
types.
l Processes tags based on service types.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames based on service types.
3 Encapsulation unit Performs the High Level Data Link Control (HDLC),
Link Access Protocol-SDH (LAPS), or Generic Framing
Procedure (GFP) encapsulation for Ethernet frames.
4 Mapping unit Maps encapsulated Ethernet data frames into VC-12s,

VC-3s, VC-12-Xvs, or VC-3-Xvs.
5 Logic processing Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to

unit the cross-connect unit.
Table 2-206 Signal processing in the transmit direction
1 Logic processing unit Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
2 Mapping unit Demaps encapsulated Ethernet data frames from VC-12s,

VC-3s, VC-12-Xvs, or VC-3-Xvs.
3 Encapsulation unit Decapsulates Ethernet data frames after they are

demapped.

4 Ethernet processing l Processes tags based on service types.

unit l Performs QoS processing, such as traffic shaping and
queue scheduling, for Ethernet data frames.
l Performs Ethernet data frame delimitation, preamble
addition, CRC code computation, and Ethernet
performance measurement.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the FE/GE signal
access unit or the GE port connected to the packet
switching unit based on egress tags contained in the
5 FE signal access unit Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for

Ethernet data frames, and transmits generated FE/GE
signals through Ethernet ports. For a GE optical port, the
FE signal access unit needs to perform E/O conversion
before transmitting signals through the GE optical port.

The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit by using management control
signals.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit, encapsulation unit, mapping unit,
and logic processing unit using the control bus on the board.
The logic control unit communicates with the system control and communication unit using the
system control bus. The logic control unit issues configuration and query commands from the
system control and communication unit to various units on the board, and reports command
responses, alarms, and performance events reported by various units on the board to the system
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48
V power into +3.3 V power using the DC-DC module, and supplies the +3.3 V power to the
other units on the board.
The power supply unit receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and supplies the
+3.3 V power to certain auxiliary circuits on the board.
Clock Unit
2.14.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, four FE ports, and two small form-factor pluggable (SFP) GE ports on the
front panel.

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 2-84 Front panel of the EMS6
EMS6
LINK1
PROG
LINK2
STAT
ACT1
ACT2
SRV
GE1 GE2
FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4
Indicators
Table 2-207 Status explanation for indicators on the EMS6

board.
the board.
On (green) l The upper layer software is being

initialized during the power-on or
resetting process of the board.
l The software is running properly during
the running process of the board.

board.
board.
SRV On (green) The system is working normally.


system.


data.

transmitting data.


data.

transmitting data.
Ports
Table 2-208 Description of the ports on the EMS6
Port Description Connector Type Corresponding Cable
GE1 GE service port RJ45 SFP electrical module/LC 8.10 Network Cable/8.6 Fiber
(using SFP SFP optical module Jumper
GE2 modules)
FE1 FE service port RJ45 8.10 Network Cable

FE2
FE3
FE4
NOTE
On the network management system (NMS), GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively,
and FE1 to FE4 correspond to PORT3 to PORT6 respectively.
The performance of the FE electrical ports on the EMS6 complies with the 10/100BASE-T(X)
standard, and the performance of the GE electrical ports on the EMS6 complies with the
10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard if SFP electrical modules are used. The two types of ports
support the MDI, MDI-X, auto-MDI, and auto-MDI-X modes. For the front view of an RJ45
connector, see Figure 2-85. For the pin assignments for the ports, see Table 2-209 and Table
2-210.
87654321

(+)

(-)

(+)

(+)

(-)


(-)

(+)

(-)

(+)

(-)

(+)

(+)

(-)

(-)

(+)

(-)
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table
2-211.


data.

receiving data.
SFP optical modules are used to provide GE ports on the EMS6. One SFP optical module
provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 2-86, in which TX represents the
transmit port and RX represents the receive port.
TX RX
2.14.6 Valid Slots

The EMS6 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the EMS6 on the network management
system (NMS) are the same as the physical slots.
Figure 2-87 Slots for the EMS6 in the IDU chassis
Slot 13 Slot 14
Slot 11 Slot 12
Slot 9 Slot 10
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 7 Slot 8
Slot 15
Slot 5 (EMS6) Slot 6 (EMS6)

Figure 2-88 Logical slots for the EMS6 on the NMS
Slot 13 Slot 14
Slot 11 Slot 12
Slot 9 Slot 10

(FAN)
Slot 7 Slot 8
Table 2-212 Slot configuration for the EMS6
Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 3 and 5

The GE port on the EMS6 board supports multiple types of small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
modules.
Table 2-213 Types of SFP modules that the GE port supports
Part Number Type
34060286 1000Base-SX
34060473 1000Base-LX
34060298 1000Base-VX (40 km, 1310 nm)
34060513 1000Base-VX (40 km, 1550 nm)
34060360 1000Base-ZX
34100052 10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
The types of SFP modules listed in the following table can be identified by board feature codes
in the bar codes of EMS6 boards. A board feature code refers to the number next to the board
name in a bar code.

Table 2-214 Board feature codes of the EMS6
Board Feature Code Module Type
01 1000Base-SX
02 1000Base-LX
03 10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
NOTE
If the board feature code in the bar code of the EMS6 is empty, no SFP module is installed on the EMS6.

This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port
Performance of GE Optical Ports

The GE optical ports on the EMS6 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main
specifications for the GE optical ports.

transmission)
Item Performance

power (dBm)
Overload (dBm) 0 -3

Item Performance

km) km) km)

(dBm)
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980L uses SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces. Users can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Performance of GE Electrical Ports

The GE electrical ports on the EMS6 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the
main specifications for the GE electrical ports.
Item Performance

100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)

Interface type RJ45


The FE electrical ports on the EMS6 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main
specifications for the FE electrical ports.
Item Performance

100 (100BASE-TX)

Interface type RJ45
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
Weight 0.50 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EMS6: < 16.5 W
2.15 EFP8
The EFP8 is an 8-port FE EoPDH processing board. The EFP board is connected to the packet
plane through its bridging GE port.

The functional version of the EFP8 is SL91.
2.15.2 Application
EFP8 boards help transmit a small number of Ethernet services on TDM radio networks, or
transmit native Ethernet services from Hybrid radio networks on third-party TDM networks.

Helping Transmit Ethernet Services over SDH/PDH Radio

If OptiX RTN 980L NEs transmit Ethernet services over SDH/PDH radio, EFP8 boards receive,
transmit, encapsulate, and map Ethernet services that come from customer premises or Layer 2
networks.
Figure 2-89 Application scenario of EFP8 boards (1)
E1
TDM transmission
TDM radio network network
FE E1
IF IF Service
EFP8 CSHL CSHL
board board board
OptiX RTN 980L
NOTE
l IF boards shown in the preceding figure can be TDM IF boards, or general-purpose IF boards or XPIC
IF boards working in SDH radio mode.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure are E1 interface boards.
Helping Hybrid Radio Services Traverse Third-Party TDM Networks

If OptiX RTN 980L NEs converge Ethernet services over Hybrid radio and the converged
Ethernet services need to traverse third-party SDH/PDH networks, EFP8 boards can apply to
the NEs to encapsulate and map converged and locally received Ethernet services.

Figure 2-90 Application scenario of EFP8 boards (2)
E1
Hybrid radio network TDM transmission
network
EFP8
IF CSHL
board Service
board E1
OptiX RTN 980L Traffic flow
NOTE
l As shown in the preceding figure, the traffic flow is as follows: Hybrid IF board sends received Ethernet
services to the packet switching unit of the CSHL board, the packet switching unit sends the Ethernet
services to the EFP8 board, the EFP8 board encapsulates the Ethernet services into E1s and transmits
the E1s to the cross-connect unit of the CSHL board, the cross-connect unit grooms the E1s to E1
service ports, and the ports then send the E1s to the third-party TDM network.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure are E1 interface boards.

The EFP8 receives/transmits 8xFE signals from its front panel and 1xGE packet plane signals
from the backplane, and encapsulates the Ethernet signals into E1 signals, and transmits the
Ethernet signals on the PDH network.
Table 2-220 lists the functions and features that the EFP8 supports.
Basic functions Receives/Transmits 8xFE signals and 1xGE packet

plane signals and performs EoPDH processing.
Port FE electrical port: 8

specifications 10/100BASE-T
(X)

Port attributes Working mode The FE port supports 10M full-duplex, 100M full-
duplex, and auto-negotiation.
TAG attributes l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet

port.
or hybrid.
Jumbo frame Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame

length of 2000 bytes.

Services EPL services Supports the EPL services that are based on port.
EVPL services Supports the following types of EVPL services:

l EVPL services based on port+VLAN
l EVPL services based on QinQ
EPLAN services Supports the EPLAN services that are based on IEEE
802.1d bridges.
EVPLAN services Supports the following types of EVPLAN services:

l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad
bridges
Encapsulation Encapsulation Generic framing procedure (GFP)

and mapping format
Maximum number 16
of VCTRUNKs
supported by the
board
Maximum TDM 1xVC-4 (63xE1)

service capacity
supported by the
backplane
Maximum number 16xE1

of E1s that can be
bound with a
single VCTRUNK
Link capacity Supported

adjustment
scheme (LCAS)
LAG Inter-board LAG Not supported


NOTE
Port 9 (bridging port) on the EFP8 does not support intra-
board LAG.
Ethernet ring protection switching Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-
(ERPS) T G.8032 v1.
IGMP snooping function Supported
LPTa Supported
NOTE
Port 9 (bridging port) on the EFP8 does not support LPT.
QoS Traffic l Traffic classification based on ports

classification l Traffic classification based on port+VLAN ID
l Traffic classification based on port+VLAN ID
+VLAN PRI
l Traffic classification based on port+S-VLAN ID
+S-VLAN ID
CoS Grooms packets in traffic flows to eight egress

queues that belong to different service classes based
on the following conditions:
l Simple
l VLAN priority
l IP TOS value
l DSCP value
CAR Provides the CAR function for traffic flows.
Shaping Supports traffic shaping for queues at ports.
Queue scheduling Supports SP+WRR.

policies
ETH OAM l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM

function.
function.
NOTE
Port 9 (bridging port) of the EFP8 does not support the
OAM function that complies with IEEE 802.3ah.
RMON Supported


NOTE
Ports 9 and 10 (bridging ports) on the EFP8 board do not
support synchronous Ethernet.
Clock protection Supports the following clock protection schemes:

l Protection based on clock source priorities

excluding ports 9 and 10 (bridging ports)
excluding port 10 (bridging port)

cold reset
Board Supported
manufacturing
information query

consumption
information query
Board temperature Supported

detection
NOTE
a: The LPT function is used to detect faults that occur at a service access node and in an intermediate
transmission network. If a fault is detected, the LPT notifies the equipment that receives the service of
starting the backup network at the earliest time for communication, ensuring normal transmission of
important data.

This section describes how to process one FE signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the EFP8.

Figure 2-91 Functional block diagram of the EFP8

Backplane
Ethernet signal PDH signal
FE signal FE
Ethernet Logic
signal Encapsulation Mapping
processing processing Cross-connect
access unit unit
unit unit unit
unit
Management
control signal
GE signal Packet
switching unit
Control signal of the board
Logic Control bus System control and

control communication unit
unit
-48 V1
+3.3 V power supplied Power
to the board supply unit -48 V2
+3.3 V backup power +3.3 V


Table 2-221 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EFP8
1 FE signal access unit l Receives/Transmits FE signals.

conversion for FE signals.
CRC code checks, and Ethernet performance
measurement for frame signals.
2 Ethernet processing l Receives/Transmits GE signals from the packet

unit switching unit.
and CAR for Ethernet data frames based on service
categories.
l Processes tags based on service categories.
l Forwards data frames based on service categories.
3 Encapsulation unit Performs GFP encapsulation for Ethernet frames.

4 Mapping unit l Maps encapsulated data frames based on E1 virtual

concatenation and then encapsulates the data frames
to proper VC-12s.
l Processes pointers to form TU-12s.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form
one TUG-2.
l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to form
one TUG-3.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form
one C-4.
l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to
form one VC-4.
5 Logic processing Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to

unit the main and standby cross-connect units.
Table 2-222 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EFP8
1 Logic processing unit Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
2 Mapping unit l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.

l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.
l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.
l Extracts E1 payload from VC-12s and demaps the E1
payload based on E1 virtual concatenation.
3 Encapsulation unit Decapsulates signals after demapping.
4 Ethernet signal l Processes tags based on service categories.

processing unit l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC
measurement for Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the FE signal access
unit or the GE port that is connected to the packet
switching unit according to the egress flag.

5 FE signal access unit Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for

Ethernet data frames, and sends the generated FE signals
to an Ethernet port.

The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE signal access unit by using management control
signals.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit, encapsulation unit, mapping unit,
and logic processing unit over the control bus on the board.
The logic control unit communicates with the system control and communication unit over the
system control bus. The configuration data and query commands from the system control and
communication unit are issued to the various units of the board through the logic control unit.
The command response reported by each unit on the board, and alarms and performance events
are reported to the system control and communication unit also through the logic control unit.
Power Supply Unit

l Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power
backup for the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
2.15.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and eight FE ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 2-92 Front panel of the EFP8

EFP8
PROG
STAT
SRV
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Indicators
Table 2-223 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8

board.
the board.

being initialized.

board.
board.

system.

Ports
Table 2-224 Description of the ports on the EFP8
FE1 to FE port
RJ45 8.10 Network Cable
FE8
The FE electrical ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. For the pin
assignments for the ports, see Table 2-225 and Table 2-226. For the front view of an RJ45
connector, see Figure 2-93.
87654321
Pin 10/100BASE-T(X)
Signal Function
1 TX+ Transmitting data (+)
2 TX- Transmitting data (-)
3 RX+ Receiving data (+)
4 Reserved -
5 Reserved -
6 RX- Receiving data (-)
7 Reserved -
8 Reserved -

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X)
Signal Function
1 RX+ Receiving data (+)
2 RX- Receiving data (-)
3 TX+ Transmitting data (+)
4 Reserved -
5 Reserved -
6 TX- Transmitting data (-)
7 Reserved -
8 Reserved -
The RJ45 port has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table 2-227.

data.

receiving data.
2.15.6 Valid Slots

The EFP8 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS are the same

Figure 2-94 Slots for the EFP8 in the IDU chassis
Slot 13 (EFP8) Slot 14 (EFP8)
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 15
Figure 2-95 Logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS

(FAN)
Item Description
10 > Slots 7 and 9


This section describes the board specifications, including the FE port performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

The FE electrical ports on the EFP8 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main
specifications for the FE electrical ports.
Item Performance

100 (100BASE-TX)

Interface type RJ45
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
Weight 0.6 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EFP8: < 13.5 W
2.16 SL1DA
The SL1DA is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board.The SL1DA can also provide STM-1 electrical
ports by using SFP electrical modules.

The functional version of the SL1DA is SL91.

2.16.2 Application
SL1DA boards help OptiX RTN 980L NEs converge TDM services from radio networks before
forwarding the services to SDH networks, or help OptiX RTN 980L NEs build SDH networks
together with SDH equipment.
Converging TDM Services from Radio Networks

SL1DA boards converge TDM services from radio networks before forwarding the services to
SDH networks.
Figure 2-96 Application scenario of SL1DA boards (1)
Radio network SDH network
IF
CSHL SL1DA STM-N
board
OptiX RTN 980L MSTP
NOTE
l Converged services shown in the preceding figure can be SDH/PDH services from TDM radio networks
or native E1/STM-1 services from IP radio networks.
l Transmission lines between the OptiX RTN equipment and the SDH network can be configured with
linear MSP.
l OptiX RTN 980L NEs can work as nodes on SDH rings, as shown in Figure 2-97. Services on such
SDH rings can be configured with SNCP.

Radio network SDH network
SL1DA STM-N
IF
CSHL
board
SL1DA STM-N
OptiX RTN 980L MSTP
Helping OptiX RTN 980L NEs Build SDH Networks Together with SDH
Equipment
OptiX RTN 980L NEs using SL1DA boards can build SDH networks together with SDH
equipment. In this scenario, radio links function as dark fibers.

SDH network
IF IF
STM-N SL1DA CSHL CSHL SL1DA STM-N
board board
OptiX RTN 980L MSTP
NOTE
l IF boards shown in the preceding figure can be TDM IF boards working in SDH radio mode, or general-
purpose IF boards or XPIC IF boards working in SDH radio or native STM-1+Ethernet mode.
l Radio links can form SDH rings together with SDH fiber links. Services on such SDH rings can be
configured with SNCP.

The SL1DA receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals.
Table 2-231 lists the functions and features that the SL1DA supports.
Basic functions Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical

signals.
Port Optical ports l Adopts SFP optical modules and supports the
specifications optical ports of Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types.
l The characteristics of all the optical ports comply
with ITU-T G.957.
Electrical ports l Adopts SFP electrical modules.

l The performance of the electrical ports complies
with ITU-T G.703.
Protection Linear MSP Supported

SNCP Supported
Clock Clock source Each line port provides one SDH line clock signal.

DCN Outband DCN Each SDH line port can provide one DCC that is
composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or
twelve DCC bytes.

l Outloops at optical/electrical ports
l Inloops at optical/electrical ports
l Outloops on VC-4 paths

cold reset
Setting of the Supported

on/off state of a
laser
ALS functiona Supported
FPGA loading
Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query

consumption
information
query
Detection and Supported

query of SFP
module
information

NOTE
a: The ALS function is implemented as follows:

l When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500
ms, the laser at the specific transmit port is automatically shut down.
l The laser starts to launch laser pulses at a specified interval; that is, the laser emits light for two seconds
and stops emission for 60 seconds.
l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser works properly and emits continuous light.

This section describes how to process one STM-1 optical signal, and it serves as an example to
describe the working principle and signal flow of the SL1DA.
Figure 2-99 Functional block diagram of the SL1DA

Backplane
Logic processing
Cross-
O/E conversion
processing unit
STM-1 Service bus connect unit

Overhead
unit
unit
STM-1 System control and

Overhead bus communication unit
System control and

Control bus communication unit
Logic control
unit
Power supplied to the +3.3 V

Clock signal provided to the

Clock unit System clock signal
Table 2-232 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1DA
1 O/E conversion unit l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals.

l Detects R_LOS alarms.
l Converts STM-1 optical signals into electrical signals.

2 Overhead processing l Restores clock signals.

unit l Aligns frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF alarms.
l Performs descrambling.
l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms
and performance events.
l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and
generates specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and
reports the SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K
bytes and transmits the overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific
performance events.
l Checks higher order path overheads and generates
to the logic processing unit.

unit l Ttransmits the overhead signals to the system control
Table 2-233 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1DA


2 Overhead processing l Sets higher order path overheads.

unit l Sets AU pointers.
l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes.
l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes.
l Performs scrambling.
3 O/E conversion unit Converts electrical signals into optical signals.

control and communication unit and enables FPGA loading.
Clock Unit
2.16.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, STM-1 ports, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 2-100 Front panel of the SL1DA (with optical ports)

SL1DA
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
LOS1
LOS2
STAT
SRV
TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2
Figure 2-101 Front panel of the SL1DA (with electrical ports)

SL1DA
LOS1
LOS2
STAT
SRV
TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2

Indicators
Table 2-234 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1DA

properly.

l There is no power



configured.
LOS1 On (red) The first port of the SL1D/

SL1DA is reporting the
R_LOS alarm.
Off The first port of the SL1D/

SL1DA is free of R_LOS
alarms.
LOS2 On (red) The second port of the

SL1D/SL1DA is reporting
the R_LOS alarm.
Off The second port of the

SL1D/SL1DA is free of
R_LOS alarms.

Ports

Cable
TX1 Transmit port of the l SFP optical l SFP optical

first STM-1 port module: LC module: 8.6
l SFP electrical Fiber Jumper
RX1 Receive port of the
module: SAA l SFP electrical
first STM-1 port
straight/female module: 8.7
STM-1 Cable
TX2 Transmit port of the l SFP optical
second STM-1 port module: LC
l SFP electrical
RX2 Receive port of the
module: SAA
second STM-1 port
straight/female
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel.
The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1.
That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
2.16.6 Valid Slots

An SL1DA can be inserted in any of slots 1 to 6. Its logical slot on NMS is the same as its
physical slot.
Figure 2-102 Slots for SL1DA boards in an IDU chassis
Slot 13 Slot 14
Slot 11 Slot 12
Slot 9 Slot 10
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 7 Slot 8
Slot 15
Slot 5 (SL1DA) Slot 6 (SL1DA)

Figure 2-103 Logical slots of SL1DA boards on the NMS
Slot 13 Slot 14
Slot 11 Slot 12
Slot 9 Slot 10

(FAN)
Slot 7 Slot 8
Item Description
Slot allocation priority SL1DA: Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 3
and 5
2.16.7 Board Feature Code

The board feature code of the SL1DA indicates the type of SFP module. The board feature code
refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
Table 2-237 Board feature code of the SL1DA
Feature Code Type of Optical Module Part Number of the

Optical Module
01 Ie-1 34060287
02 S-1.1 34060276
03 L-1.1 34060281
04 L-1.2 34060282
05 STM-1e 34100104


This section describes the board specifications, including the STM-1 optical/electrical port

Item Performance

(km)
(nm)

(dBm)

sensitivity (dBm)

(dB)
NOTE
distances.


Item Performance
Code type CMI

Impedance (ohm) 75
NOTE
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
SL1DA
Weight 0.30 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the SL1DA: < 3.3 W
2.17 ML1/MD1
The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service
processing board.

The functional version of the ML1 is SL92. The functional version of the MD1 is SL91.
2.17.2 Application
ML1/MD1 boards receive and transmit E1 services on OptiX RTN 980L NEs that transmit E1-
carried ATM/CES services in PWE3 mode. The selection of MD1 or ML1 boards depends on
desired port quantities.
The ML1/MD1 board are used to:

l Transmit CES/ATM E1 services in PWE3 mode.

l Allow an MPLS tunnel to traverse a TDM network
Transmitting CES/ATM E1 Services in PWE3 Mode
Figure 2-104 Transmitting CES/ATM E1 services in PWE3 mode
MPLS tunnel
PW1
...
PWn
Packet radio network
CES E1
CES E1
ML1/ IF IF ML1/
CSHL CSHL
ATM E1 MD1 board board MD1
ATM E1
OptiX RTN 980L
Allowing an MPLS Tunnel to Traverse a TDM Network
Figure 2-105 Allowing an MPLS tunnel to traverse a TDM network

Payload
PW
Payload MPLS Payload
PW ML_PPP PW
MPLS MPLS
E1
ETH ETH
PSN TDM network PSN

PW1
...
PWn
MPLS Tunnel
E1 E1
IF ML1/M ML1/M ETH
CSHL CSHL FE/GE
board D1 D1 board
OptiX RTN 980L

NOTE
l IF boards shown in Figure 2-104 and Figure 2-105 must be general-purpose IF boards or XPIC IF
boards working in native E1+Ethernet mode or native STM-1+Ethernet mode.

The ML1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The MD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
Table 2-241 lists the functions and features that the ML1/MD1 supports.
ML1 MD1
Basic functions Receives and transmits E1 signals, and supports

flexible configuration of E1 service categories.
E1 service categories Supports the following E1 service categories:

l CES E1
l ATM/IMA E1
l ML-PPP E1
Port 75-ohm/120- 16 32
specifications ohm E1 port
Fractional E1 Supports transparent service transmission at the 64

kbit/s level.
ATM/IMA Maximum 64
number of ATM
services
Maximum 256
number of ATM
connections
ATM traffic Supported

management
ATM Supports the following ATM encapsulation modes:

encapsulation l N-to-one VPC
mode
l N-to-one VCC
l One-to-one VPC
l One-to-one VCC
Maximum 31
number of
concatenated
ATM cells

ML1 MD1
ATM OAM Supports F4 OAM (VP level) and F5 OAM (VC level),
including the following functions:
l Alarm indication signal (AIS)/Remote defect
indication (RDI)
l Continuity check test
l Loopback test
Maximum 16 32
number of IMA
groups
Maximum 16
number of
members in an
IMA group
CES Maximum 16 32
number of
services
Encapsulation Supports the following encapsulation modes:

mode l CESoPSN
l SAToP
Service Point-to-point services

category
Compression of Supported (applicable to CESoPSN only)

vacant slots
Jitter buffering 375-16000

time (us)
Packet loading 125-5000

time (us)
CES ACR Supported
Retiming Supported
MLPPP MLPPP link E1

type
Maximum 16 32
number of PPP
links
Maximum 8 16
number of
MLPPP groups

ML1 MD1
Maximum 16
number of links
in an MLPPP
Clock Clock source Supports a tributary clock source extracted from the
first or fifth E1 signal.
Clock Supports clock protection based on clock source

protection priorities.
E1 retiming Supported
function
OM Loopback Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.

warm reset
PRBS tests at E1 Supported

ports
Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query

consumption
information
query

This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the ML1/MD1.

Figure 2-106 Functional block diagram of the ML1/MD1

Backplane
Logic processing
Signal interface
processing unit
E1
Service
Service GE bus
unit
unit
Packet switching unit

bus
E1
Control bus System control and

communication unit
Logic
control unit
+3.3 V power Power -48 V1

supplied to the board supply unit -48 V2
+3.3 V backup power
supplied to the board +3.3 V
other units of the board
Table 2-242 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ML1/MD1
1 Signal interface unit l Receives external E1 signals.

l Matches the resistance.
l Equalizes signals.
l Converts the level.
l Recovers clock signals.
l Buffers the received data.
l Performs HDB3 decoding.
2 Service processing l Frames E1 signals.

unit l Performs CES emulation or processes ATM/IMA
services.
l Encapsulates PWE3 services and converts the PWE3
services into Ethernet services.

3 Logic processing l Implements the conversion from the internal service

unit bus into the GE bus in the backplane.
l Sends service signals to the packet switching unit.
Table 2-243 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ML1/MD1
1 Logic processing l Receives service signals from the packet switching

unit unit.
l Implements the conversion from the GE bus in the
backplane into the internal service bus.
2 Service processing l Decapsulates service signals.

unit l Re-forms CES packets or processes ATM/IMA
services.
l Converts signals into E1 signals and sends the E1
signals to the signal interface unit.
3 Signal interface unit l Performs HDB3 coding.

l Performs clock re-timing.
l Performs pulse shaping.
l Drives the line.
l Sends E1 signals to a port.

Power Supply Unit


Clock Unit
2.17.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 2-107 Front panel of the ML1

ML1
16
STAT
E1 1
SRV
Figure 2-108 Front panel of the MD1

MD1
16 32
STAT
SRV
1 17
Indicators
Table 2-244 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1

properly.

l There is no power




configured.
Ports
Table 2-245 Description of the ports on the ML1
Port Description Connector Corresponding Cable

Type
1 to 16 The first to sixteenth Anea 96 8.8.1 E1 Cable Connected to

E1 ports the External Equipment or
8.8.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel
Table 2-246 Description of the ports on the MD1

Type
1 to 16 The first to sixteenth Anea 96 8.8.1 E1 Cable Connected to

the E1 Panel
17 to 32 The seventeenth to Anea 96 8.8.1 E1 Cable Connected to

thirty-second E1 the External Equipment or
ports 8.8.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel
The ports on the ML1/MD1 use the Anea 96 connector. Figure 2-109 shows the front view of
an Anea 96 connector and Table 2-247 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.
Figure 2-109 Front view of an Anea 96 connector

POS.1
POS.96

Table 2-247 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector
Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 The first received E1 25 The first transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (+) signal (+)

differential signal (-) signal (-)
3 The second received E1 27 The second transmitted E1 differential


5 The third received E1 29 The third transmitted E1 differential


7 The fourth received E1 31 The fourth transmitted E1 differential


9 The fifth received E1 33 The fifth transmitted E1 differential


11 The sixth received E1 35 The sixth transmitted E1 differential


13 The seventh received E1 37 The seventh transmitted E1

differential signal (+) differential signal (+)

differential signal (-) differential signal (-)
15 The eighth received E1 39 The eighth transmitted E1 differential


17 The ninth received E1 41 The ninth transmitted E1 differential



19 The tenth received E1 43 The tenth transmitted E1 differential


21 The eleventh received E1 45 The eleventh transmitted E1


23 The twelfth received E1 47 The twelfth transmitted E1


49 The thirteenth received E1 73 The thirteenth transmitted E1


51 The fourteenth received E1 75 The fourteenth transmitted E1


53 The fifteenth received E1 77 The fifteenth transmitted E1


55 The sixteenth received E1 79 The sixteenth transmitted E1


2.17.6 Valid Slots

The ML1/MD1 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS
are the same as the physical slots.

Figure 2-110 Slots for the ML1/MD1 in the IDU chassis
Slot 13 (ML1/MD1) Slot 14 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 15
Figure 2-111 Logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS

(FAN)
Item Description
10 > Slots 7 and 9


The board feature code of the ML1/MD1 indicates the port impedance. The board feature code
refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
Table 2-249 Board feature code of the ML1/MD1
Board Feature Code Port Impedance (Ohm)
A 75
B 120

This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board
E1 Interface Performance
Table 2-250 E1 interface performance
Item Performance
Code pattern HDB3
Impedance (ohm) 75 120
Wire pair in each One coaxial wire pair One symmetrical wire pair
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
ML1 MD1
Dimensions (H x W x 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

D)
Weight 0.45 kg 0.50 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the ML1: < 7.0 W
Power consumption of the MD1: < 12.2 W
2.18 CQ1
CQ1 boards are 4-port channelized STM-1 processing boards.

The functional version of CQ1 boards is SL91.
2.18.2 Application
CQ1 boards apply to OptiX RTN 980L NEs to transparently transmit STM-1 services over packet
radio networks. CQ1 boards receive/transmit only channelized STM-1 services.
CQ1 boards are used in the following scenarios:

l STM-1 services are transparently transmitted over packet radio networks.
l Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) tunnels traverse a TDM network.
l Circuit emulation service (CES) E1 services are converged to channelized STM-1s.
Transparently Transmitting STM-1 Services over Packet Radio Networks
Figure 2-112 Application scenario of CQ1 boards (1)
MPLS Tunnel
PW1
...
PWn
IF IF
STM-1 CQ1 CSHL CSHL CQ1 STM-1
board board
OptiX RTN 980L

Carrying MPLS Tunnels over a TDM Network

Payload
PW
Payload MPLS Payload
PW ML_PPP PW
MPLS E1 of MPLS
ETH Channelized ETH
STM-1
PSN TDM network PSN

PW1
...
PWn
MPLS Tunnel
STM-1 STM-1
IF ETH
CSHL CQ1 CQ1 CSHL FE/GE
board board
OptiX RTN 980L

Converging CES E1 Services to Channelized STM-1s
CES E1 ML1/M IF
CSHL
D1 board
PW1
...
PWn
MPL
S Tu
nnel
PW1
...
PWn MPLS Tunnel
ML1/M IF IF
CES E1 CSHL
D1 board board
CSHL CQ1 STM-1
IF
board
OptiX RTN 980L
NOTE
l The IF boards shown in Figure 2-112 to Figure 2-114 must be general-purpose IF boards or cross
polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) IF boards working in native E1+Ethernet or native
STM-1+Ethernet mode.

CQ1 boards receive and transmit four channels of channelized STM-1 optical/electrical signals.
Table 2-252 lists the functions and features supported by CQ1 boards.
Table 2-252 Functions and features that CQ1 boards support
Basic functions Receives and transmits four channels

of channelized STM-1 optical/
electrical signals.
Supported packet service types l Circuit emulation service (CES) E1

l ML-PPP E1

Port specifications Optical ports l Use small form-factor pluggable

(SFP) optical modules and support
optical ports of the Ie-1, S-1.1,
L-1.1, and L-1.2 types.
l Comply with ITU-T G.957.
Electrical ports l Use SFP electrical modules.

l Comply with ITU-T G.703.
Fractional E1 Transparently transmits 64 kbit/s CES

services.
CES Maximum number of 252

services
Encapsulation mode l CESoPSN (CESoPSN stands for

circuit emulation services over
packet switch networks)
l SAToP (SAToP stands for
Structure-Agnostic Time Division
Multiplexing over Packet)
Idle timeslot Supported only in CESoPSN mode

compression
Jitter buffering time (us) 875 to 16,000
Packet loading time (us) 125 to 5,000
CES ACR(ACR stands Supported, but the NE can only

for adaptive clock function as a master node
recovery)
Transparent Supported
transmission of SDH
overheads
ML-PPP Type of links carrying E1s in channelized STM-1s

ML-PPP links
Maximum number of 252

supported PPP links
supported ML-PPP
groups
links in one ML-PPP
group

Clock Clock source l Each line port provides one

channel of SDH line clock signals.
l Each board supports two channels
of E1 clock signals over its STM-1
ports.

running Synchronization Status
running extended SSM protocol
SDH line clock retiming Supported
Linear multiplex section protection (MSP) 1:1 linear MSP
DCN Outband DCN Each SDH line port can provide one
data communications channel (DCC)
that is composed of three DCC bytes,
nine DCC bytes, or 12 DCC bytes.
Inband DCN Transmits DCN information over ML-

PPP links.
Operation and Loopback l Supports inloops at STM-1 ports.

maintenance l Supports outloops at STM-1 ports.
l Supports inloops over E1 channels.
l Supports outloops over E1
channels.
Switching a laser on or Supported

off
information querying

querying
SFP module information Supported

detecting and querying


This section describes how the function units of a CQ1 board process channelized STM-1 optical
signals.
Figure 2-115 CQ1 board function block diagram

Backplane
Channelized STM-1
STM-1 E1 GE
signal
signal signal signal GE bus
Signal SDH Packet Logic
interface processing processing processing Packet switching unit
unit unit unit unit
Control bus
System control and
communication unit
Logic
Line clock signal control
unit
Line clock signal

Clock unit
Clock signal provided to other units on the System clock signal
board
+3.3 V power supplied to other Power supply -48 V 1

units on the board unit -48 V 2
Table 2-253 Signal processing in the receive direction of a CQ1 board
1 Signal interface unit l Receives channelized STM-1 signals.

l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals.
l Checks for R_LOS alarms.
l Converts STM-1 optical signals into STM-1 electrical
signals.

2 SDH processing unit l Restores clock signals.

l Synchronizes frames and checks for R_LOS and
R_LOF alarms.
l Descrambles signals.
l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates alarms and
performance events, if any.
l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and
generates alarms and performance events, if any.
l Checks for changes in Synchronization Status
Messages (SSMs) in the S1 byte and reports the SSM
status to the system control and communication unit.
(including F1 and serial bytes), DCC bytes, and K
bytes, and transmits the bytes to the logic processing
unit.
l Adjusts AU pointers and generates performance
events, if any.
l Checks higher order path overheads and generates
l Decapsulates E1 signals from the STM-1 signals.
3 Packet processing l Frames E1 signals.

unit l Performs CES emulation.
l Performs Multilink Point-to-Point Protocol (MP-PPP)
processing.
l Encapsulates PWE3 services and converts them into
Ethernet services.
4 Logic processing l Grooms services from service buses to the GE bus on

unit the backplane.
l Sends service signals to the packet switching unit.
Table 2-254 Signal processing in the transmit direction of a CQ1 board
1 Logic processing l Receives service signals from the packet switching

unit unit.
l Grooms services from the GE bus on the backplane to
service buses.

2 Packet processing l Decapsulates service signals.

unit l Restructures CES packets.
l Converts signals into E1 signals and sends the E1
signals to the SDH processing unit.
3 SDH processing unit l Multiplexes E1 signals into STM-1 signals.

l Sets higher order path overheads.
l Sets AU pointers.
l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes.
l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes.
l Scrambles signals.
4 Signal interface unit Converts electrical signals into optical signals.

The CQ1 board is directly controlled by a CPU on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU issues configuration and query commands to other units of the board over the control
bus. These units send command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over
the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane. It then converts
the -48 V power supplies into +3.3 V power and supplies the +3.3 V power to other units on the
board.
Clock Unit
The clock unit performs the following operations:
l Extracts line clock signals or E1 clock signals and transmits them to the system control and
communication unit.
l Receives system clock signals from the control bus on the backplane and supplies clock
signals to other units on the board.
2.18.5 Front Panel

A CQ1 board has indicators and STM-1 ports on its front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 2-116 Front panel of a CQ1 board providing optical ports

OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4
CQ1
STAT
LOS1
LOS2
LOS3
LOS4
SRV

Figure 2-117 Front panel of a CQ1 board providing electrical ports

OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4
CQ1
STAT
LOS1
LOS2
LOS3
LOS4
SRV
Indicators
Table 2-255 Status explanation for indicators on a CQ1 board

properly.


been reported.

been reported.
LOS1 On (red) The first port has reported an

R_LOS alarm.
Off The first port does not report

any R_LOS alarms.
LOS2 On (red) The second port has reported

an R_LOS alarm.
Off The second port does not

LOS3 On (red) The third port has reported an

R_LOS alarm.
Off The third port does not report

any R_LOS alarms.
LOS4 On (red) The fourth port has reported

an R_LOS alarms.

Off The fourth port does not

Ports
Table 2-256 Ports on a CQ1 board
Port Description Connector Type Required Cable
OUT1 to OUT4 Transmit ports of the l LC (with an SFP l 8.6 Fiber

first to fourth STM-1 optical module) Jumper for SFP
ports l SAA straight optical modules
female (with an l 8.7 STM-1
IN1 to IN4 Receive ports of the
SFP electrical Cable for SFP
first to fourth STM-1
module) electrical
ports
modules
2.18.6 Valid Slots

A CQ1 board can be inserted in any of slots 1 to 14. Its logical slot on the network management
Figure 2-118 Slots for CQ1 boards in a chassis
Slot 13 (CQ1) Slot 14 (CQ1)
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 15

Figure 2-119 Logical slots of CQ1 boards on the NMS

(FAN)
Item Description
10 > Slots 7 and 9

STM-1 ports on CQ1 boards support multiple types of small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
modules.
Table 2-258 Types of SFP modules that STM-1 ports support

Transmission
Distance
Dual-fiber 34060287 Ie-1 1310 nm, 2 km

bidirectional STM-1
module 34060276 S-1.1 1310 nm, 15 km
34060281 L-1.1 1310 nm, 40 km
34060282 L-1.2 1550 nm, 80 km


Transmission
Distance
Single-fiber 34060363 S-1.1-BX-U Transmit

bidirectional STM-1 wavelength: 1310
module nm; receive
wavelength: 1550
nm
15 km
34060364 S-1.1-BX-D Transmit

wavelength: 1550
nm; receive
wavelength: 1310
nm
15 km
34060328 L-1.1-BX-U Transmit

wavelength: 1310
nm; receive
wavelength: 1550
nm
40 km
34060329 L-1.1-BX-D Transmit

wavelength: 1550
nm; receive
wavelength: 1310
nm
40 km
Electrical STM-1 34100104 STM-1e Transmission

module distance: 300 m
NOTE
For specifications for each type of SFP module, see STM-1 Optical Interface Performance and STM-1
Electrical Interface Performance in 2.18.8 Technical Specifications.
The types of SFP modules listed in the following table can be identified by feature codes in the
bar codes of CQ1 boards. A feature code refers to the number next to the board name in a bar
code.
Table 2-259 Feature codes of CQ1 boards
Feature Code Module Type Part Number of the

Module
01 Ie-1 34060287

Feature Code Module Type Part Number of the

Module
02 S-1.1 34060276
03 L-1.1 34060281

This section describes board specifications, including the STM-1 optical/electrical port
performance, mechanical behaviors, and power consumption.

Item Performance

(km)
(nm)

(dBm)

sensitivity (dBm)

(dB)
NOTE
distances.

Table 2-261 STM-1 optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional)
Item Performance
Classification code S-1.1-BX-D S-1.1-BX-U L-1.1-BX-D L-1.1-BX-U

(km)
Rx: 1310 Rx: 1550 Rx: 1310 Rx: 1550
Operating wavelength Tx: 1480 to Tx: 1260 to Tx: 1480 to Tx: 1260 to
(nm) 1580 1360 1580 1360
1360 1580 1360 1580

(dBm)

sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum extinction ratio 8.5 8.5 10 10

(dB)
NOTE
distances.

Item Performance
Code type CMI


Item Performance
Impedance (ohm) 75
NOTE
Item Performance
Weight 0.47 kg
Power Consumption
2.19 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.

The SP3S has two functional versions: SL91SP3SVER.B and SL91SP3SVER.C. The SP3D also
has two functional versions: TNH1SP3DVER.B and TNH1SP3DVER.C. The difference
between VER.B and VER.C is that path indication on the front panel is optimized and the board
power consumption is reduced.
2.19.2 Application
SP3S/SP3D boards receive and transmit E1 services on OptiX RTN 980L NEs that transmit E1
services in native mode. The E1 services come from customer premises or TDM networks.
NOTE
For the OptiX RTN 980L, configure SP3S/SP3D boards only if E1 ports on system control, switching, and
timing boards cannot meet customers' requirements.

Figure 2-120 Application scenario of SP3S/SP3D boards
Radio network
E1 SP3S/ SP3S/
CSHL IFU2 IFU2 CSHL E1
SP3D SP3D
OptiX RTN 980L

The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
Table 2-264 lists the functions and features that the SP3S/SP3D supports.
SP3S SP3D
Basic functions Receives and transmits E1 signals.
Port 75-ohm/120- 16 32
specifications ohm E1 port
Clock Clock source Supports a tributary clock source extracted from the
first or fifth E1 signal.
Clock Supports clock protection based on clock source

protection priorities.
E1 retiming Supported
function
OM Loopback Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.

warm reset

SP3S SP3D
PRBS tests at E1 Supported

ports
Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query

consumption
information
query

This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.
Figure 2-121 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D

Backplane
Mapping/Demapping
E1 signal Service bus

Logic processing
E1
Interface unit
Codec unit
unit
unit
Cross-connect unit
E1
Control bus
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit
+3.3 V power supplied Power -48 V1

to the board supply unit
-48 V2
+3.3 V backup power

+3.3 V
Clock signal provided to the Clock System clock signal

NOTE
The power supply units on the SP3SVER.C and SP3DVER.C boards do not support conversion from -48
V power into +3.3 V power.

Table 2-265 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D
1 Interface unit External E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and

then transmitted to the board.
2 Codec unit l Equalizes the received signals.

l Recovers clock signals.
l Detects T_ALOS alarms.
l Performs HDB3 decoding.
3 Mapping/ l Asynchronously maps signals into C-12s.

Demapping unit l Adds path overhead bytes to C-12s to form VC-12s.
l Processes pointers to form TU-12s.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form
one TUG-2.
l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to form
one TUG-3.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form
one C-4.
l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to
form one VC-4.

unit l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the main and standby cross-connect units.
Table 2-266 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D

unit l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals

2 Mapping/ l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.

Demapping unit l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.
l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.
l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects
l Extracts E1 signals.
3 Codec unit Performs HDB3 coding.
4 Interface unit E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and then

transmitted to an external cable.

Power Supply Unit

l Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power into +3.3
V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board. The power
supply units on the SP3SVER.C and SP3DVER.C boards do not support conversion from
-48 V power into +3.3 V power.
Clock Unit
2.19.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 2-122 Front panel of the SP3SVER.B

SP3S
SP3S
STAT
E1
SRV
1-16

Figure 2-123 Front panel of the SP3SVER.C
SP3S
16
STAT
SRV
1
Figure 2-124 Front panel of the SP3DVER.B

SP3D
SP3D
21 42
STAT
SRV
1 22
Figure 2-125 Front panel of the SP3DVER.C

SP3D
16 32
STAT
SRV
1 17
Indicators
Table 2-267 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D

properly.

l There is no power




configured.
Ports
Table 2-268 Description of the ports on the SP3S(VER.B and VER.C)

Type
1-16 The first to sixteenth Anea 96 8.8.1 E1 Cable Connected to

the E1 Panel
Table 2-269 Description of the ports on the SP3DVER.B

Type

the E1 Panel
22-42 The seventeenth to Anea 96 8.8.1 E1 Cable Connected to

the E1 Panel
NOTE
On the OptiX RTN 980L, only ports 1-16 and 22-37 of the SP3D are used. Ports 1-16 correspond to E1
signals 1-16 and ports 22-37 correspond to E1 signals 17-32.
Table 2-270 Description of the ports on the SP3DVER.C

Type

the E1 Panel


Type
17-32 The seventeenth to Anea 96 8.8.1 E1 Cable Connected to

the E1 Panel
The ports on the SP3S/SP3D use Anea 96 connectors. Figure 2-126 shows the front view of an
Anea 96 connector and Table 2-271 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.
Figure 2-126 Front view of an Anea 96 connector

POS.1
POS.96
Table 2-271 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector


































2.19.6 Valid Slots

The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS
are the same as the physical slots.
Figure 2-127 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU chassis
Slot 13 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 14 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 15

Figure 2-128 Logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS

(FAN)
Item Description
10 > Slots 7 and 9

The board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D indicates the E1 port impedance. The board feature
code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
Table 2-273 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D
Board Feature Code Port Impedance (Ohm)
A 120
B 75

This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board

E1 Interface Performance
Table 2-274 E1 interface performance
Item Performance
Code pattern HDB3
Impedance (ohm) 75 120
Wire pair in each One coaxial wire pair One symmetrical wire pair
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
SP3SVER.B SP3SVER.C SP3DVER.B SP3SVER.C
Dimensio 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

ns (H x W
x D)
Weight 0.50 kg 0.40 kg 0.64 kg 0.54 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the SP3SVER.B: < 5.7 W
Power consumption of the SP3SVER.C: < 4.8 W
Power consumption of the SP3DVER.B: < 9.6 W
Power consumption of the SP3DVER.C: < 8.3 W
2.20 AUX
The AUX is an auxiliary management interface board of the OptiX RTN 980L. One NE can
house only one AUX.

The functional version of the AUX is SL91.


The AUX provides the system with one orderwire phone port, one synchronous data port, one
asynchronous data port, and one four-input/two-output external alarm port.
Table 2-276 lists the functions and features that the AUX supports.
Orderwire phone port 1
Synchronous data port 1

The transmission rate of the port is 64 kbit/s and its
specifications comply with ITU-T G.703.
Asynchronous data port 1

The transmission rate of the port is equal to or less than 19.2
kbit/s and the interfacing level complies with RS-232.
External alarm port Four inputs and two outputs
Hot swapping function Supported
Board power consumption Supported

information query
Power detection Supported

The AUX consists of the orderwire unit, logic control unit, and clock unit.
Figure 2-129 Functional block diagram of the AUX

Backplane
Power
supply unit +3.3 V
Power dip
4-input/2-output alarm port detection signal
One orderwire phone port

Orderwire System bus
64 kbit/s unit Logic control System control and
synchronous data port unit communication unit
19.2 kbit/s
asynchronous data port
Clock unit Clock Board status System control and

signal detection unit communication unit

Power Supply Unit

l Receives the +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and supplies it to the other units on
the AUX.
l Receives and shuts down control signals.
Orderwire Unit
l Supports the input of four channels of alarms.
l Supports the output of two channels of alarms.
l Provides one orderwire port.
l Provides one 64 kbit/s synchronous transparent data port.
l Provides one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port.
NOTE
The 64 kbit/s synchronous data port can transparently transmit orderwire byte. One port, however, can implement
only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data port and transparent transmission of orderwire byte.
Logic Control Unit

l Provides an interface with the CPU unit and works with the CPU unit to implement the
board control function.
l Processes orderwire bytes and overhead bytes.
l Processes clock signals.
l Provides board status information.
l Checks the status of the main and standby system control, switching, and timing boards.
l Checks the status of the main and standby clocks.
l Supports the switching of system clock reference sources automatically and by running
specific commands.
l Supports the detection and reporting of the key clock status of each board in the system.
Board Status Detection Unit

l Detects board performance data such as board voltage.
l Stores board manufacturing information.
Clock Unit
Provides clock signals to the logic control unit.
2.20.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, management ports, and auxiliary ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 2-130 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AUX.

Figure 2-130 Front panel of the AUX
AUX
STAT
SRV
F1/S1 PHONE ALMO ALMI
Indicators
Table 2-277 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX

board.

system.

system.
Auxiliary Ports and Management Ports
Table 2-278 Description of the auxiliary ports and management ports
F1/S1 Synchronous/Asynchronous data port RJ45
ALMI Alarm input port
ALMO Alarm output port
PHONE Orderwire phone port
The auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the
ports, however, are different. Figure 2-131 shows the front view of an RJ45 connector.

Figure 2-131 Front view of an RJ45 connector
87654321
Table 2-279 provides the pin assignments for the F1/S1 port.
Table 2-279 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port
Port Pin Signal
F1/S1 1 Transmitting asynchronous data signals
2 Grounding end
3 Receiving asynchronous data signals
4 Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP)
5 Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING)
6 Grounding end
7 Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP)
8 Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)
For the pin assignments for the ALMI and ALMO ports, see Table 2-280 and see Table
2-281.
Table 2-280 Pin assignments for the ALMI port
Port Pin Signal
ALMI 1 The first external alarm input signal
2 Grounding end for the first external alarm input signal
3 The second external alarm input signal
4 The third external alarm input signal
5 Grounding end for the third external alarm input signal
6 Grounding end for the second external alarm input

signal
7 The forth external alarm input signal

Port Pin Signal
8 Grounding end for the forth external alarm input signal
Table 2-281 Pin assignments for the ALMO port

Port Pin Signal
ALMO 1 The first external alarm output signal (+)
2 The first external alarm output signal (-)
3 The second external alarm output signal (+)
4 Connected in parallel with pin 1
6 The second external alarm output signal (-)
External alarms are also called housekeeping alarms or relay alarms. OptiX RTN 980L provides
external alarms.
Figure 2-132 shows an interface circuit for external alarm input. When the relay of the external
system is switched off, the IDU interface circuit detects a high-level signal. When the relay of
the external system is switched on, the IDU interface circuit detects a low-level signal. The board
generates corresponding alarms based on the level signals detected by the IDU interface circuit.
External alarm input mainly achieves access of the relay alarms generated by the environmental
alarm generator.
Figure 2-132 Interface circuit for external alarm input

IDU External system
Circuit for external alarm input

+3.3 V/+5 V
Pull-up
Input level resistance Relay
Alarm
input
Figure 2-133 shows an interface circuit for external alarm output. When the external alarm
output conditions are met, the equipment switches on or off the relay depending on the conditions

that result in the alarm. External alarm output helps to provide equipment alarms to the
centralized alarming device.
Figure 2-133 Interface circuit for external alarm output

IDU
Circuit for external alarm output
Relay +
Output control Alarm

output
2.20.5 Valid Slots

The AUX can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the AUX on the NMS are the same
Figure 2-134 Slots for the AUX in the IDU chassis
Slot 13 (AUX) Slot 14 (AUX)
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 15

Figure 2-135 Logical slots of the AUX on the NMS

(FAN)
Item Description
10 > Slots 7 and 9

This section describes the board specifications, including auxiliary port performance, board
Orderwire Interface Performance
Table 2-283 Orderwire interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-
defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Orderwire type Addressing call
Wire pair in each One symmetrical wire pair

Impedance (ohm) 600

NOTE
The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when OptiX RTN
equipment calls 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire phones in the
orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is established.
Synchronous Data Interface Performance
Table 2-284 Synchronous data interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined
byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Interface type Codirectional
Interface characteristics Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.
Asynchronous Data Interface
Table 2-285 Asynchronous data interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the

microwave frame.
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) ≤ 19.2
Interface characteristics Meets the RS-232 standard.
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
Weight 0.27 kg
Power Consumption

2.21 PIU

The functional version of the PIU is SLB1.

The PIU supports power access, power protection, surge protection status monitoring, power
detection, filtering, and information reporting.
Table 2-287 lists the functions and features that the PIU supports.
Basic functions Power access Two PIUs are provided and each accesses one -48 V
DC or -60 V DC power input.
Power output The PIU provides other boards with+3.3 V power or

-48 V power.
Protection Protection Supports 1+1 HSB protection.
Power l Protection against overcurrent

protection l Protection against short circuits
Surge Supported
protection
Power detection Supported
Board power consumption Supported

information query
Surge protection status monitoring Supported
EMI filtering Supported

The PIU consists of the protection and detection unit, power detection unit, DC/DC unit, EMI
filtering unit, and communication control unit.

Figure 2-136 shows the functional block diagram of the PIU.

Figure 2-136 Functional block diagram of the PIU

Backplane
-48 V/-60 V -48 V Board operating in distributed

Protection and EMI filtering power supply mode
detection unit unit -48 V
Power Fan
detection unit
Detection signal +5.0 V

+3.3 V +3.3 V
DC/DC unit Other boards
Communication
Detection signal control unit Detection signal System control and
communication unit
Protection and Detection Unit

The protection and detection unit primarily protects and detects the PIU. It performs the
following functions:
l Provides protection against lightning strike and surge.

l Detects whether the surge-protection circuit fails and reports a surge-protection failure
alarm.
l Monitors PIU temperature in real time and reports it to the system control and
communication unit through the communication control unit.
l Detects whether -48 V power is available.
l Performs soft-start and mis-connection prevention functions.
Power Detection Unit

The power detection unit detects the voltage, current, and power consumption, and reports the
information to the system control unit through the communication control unit.
EMI Filtering Unit

The EMI filtering unit performs electro-magnetic interference (EMI) filteringand low-frequency
interference filtering.
DC/DC Unit
The DC/DC unit converts the input -48 V power into the voltages that each part of the system
requires. The DC/DC unit performs the following functions:
l Converts -48 V power into +3.3 V power and supplies +3.3 V power to the communication
control unit of the PIU.
l Converts -48 V power into +3.3 V power and supplies +3.3 V power to other boards.
l Converts -48 V power into +5.0 V power and supplies +5.0 V power to the power detection
unit of the PIU.

Communication Control Unit

The communication control unit achieves communication between the system control and
communication unit and the PIU and reports the following information to the system control
and communication unit:
l PIU manufacturing information

l PCB version information
l Power detection information
l Surge-protection failure information
l PIU temperature
2.21.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, power access ports, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 2-137 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU.
Figure 2-137 Front panel of the PIU

NEG(-) RTN(+)
PIU
ALM
PWR
-48V/-60V
Indicators
Table 2-288 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU
PWR On (green) The power supply is normal.
Off There is no power supply.
ALM On (orange) The board is in the initialization state.
On (red) An alarm is reported on the PIU.
Off No alarm occurs.
Ports
The PIU accesses one power supply. Table 2-289 lists the types of the ports on the PIU and their
respective usage.

Table 2-289 Description of the ports on the PIU
Port Port Connector Type Corresponding Cable

Description
NEG -48 V power M6 screws, which can be 8.1 Power Cable

(-) input port installed with OT terminals
RTN BGND power

(+) input port
Labels
Caution label for power operations: prompting you to read the operation guide before any power
operations.
NOTICE
Do not remove or install a PIU while the equipment is powered on. That is, turn off all the power
supplies of the PIU before removing or installing it.
2.21.5 Valid Slots

The PIU can be inserted in slots 26 and 27.
Figure 2-138 Slots for the PIU in the IDU chassis
Slot 13 Slot 14
Slot 11 Slot 12
Slot 9 Slot 10
Slot 28 Slot 20
Slot 7 Slot 8
Slot 15
Slot 5 Slot 6
Slot 3 Slot 4
Slot 1 Slot 2

Figure 2-139 Logical slots of the PIU on the NMS
Slot 13 Slot 14
Slot 11 Slot 12
Slot 9 Slot 10
Slot 7 Slot 8
Slot 5 Slot 6
Slot 3 Slot 4
Slot 1 Slot 2

This section describes the board specifications, including input voltage, board mechanical
behavior, and board power consumption.
Table 2-290 lists the technical specifications for the PIU.
Table 2-290 Technical specifications for the PIU
Item Performance
Dimensions 27.2 mm x 193.4 mm x 196.5 mm
Weight 1.00 kg
Power consumption < 25.0 W
Input voltage -38.4 V to -72.0 V
Fuse capacity 40.0 A
2.22 FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.

The functional version of the FAN is SLBE1.


The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.
Table 2-291 lists the functions and features that the FAN supports.
Power input Accesses the -48 V power from the PIU through the power
bus in the backplane.
Number of fans 9
Intelligent fan speed Supports pulse-width modulation (PWM) speed adjustment.

adjustment
Protection Provides soft-start for the power supply of the fans, protects
fans against overcurrent, and filters out high-frequency
signals.
O&M l Reports the information about the fan rotating speed,

alarms, version number, and board in-position status.
l Provides alarm indicators.
l Supports board power consumption information query
NOTE
l When one fan fails, it is recommended that you replace it within 96 hours if the ambient temperature
reaches 40°C; it is recommended that you replace it within 24 hours if the ambient temperature exceeds
40°C.
l When more than one fan fails, it is recommended that you replace the failed fans immediately.

The FAN consists of the fan unit, power unit, and communication monitoring unit.
Figure 2-140 shows the functional block diagram of the FAN.

Figure 2-140 Functional block diagram of the FAN

Backplane
-48 V
-48 V
Fan unit Power unit
-48 V
Communication
detection signal
Communication
Communication detection signal System control and
monitoring unit communication unit
Power Unit
l Receives -48 V power from the backplane.

l Provides the fan unit with the following functions: soft-start, filtering, supply combining,
and overcurrent protection.
Fan Unit
Nine air-cooling fans dissipate the heat generated by the system.
Communication Monitoring Unit

Detects the manufacturing information, PCB version information, environmental temperature,
and rotating status of the FAN, and reports the information to the system control and
communication unit.
Speed Adjustment Mechanism

The system control and communication unit detects the fan rotating speed and delivers the pulse-
width modulation signal to adjust the fan rotating speed. The system adjusts the fan rotating
speed based on the working temperature, as listed in Table 2-292.
Table 2-292 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed
Working Temperature Rotating Speed
≤ 25°C 3600 rounds/minute
25°C to 60°C Linear increase in accordance with the

temperature
≥ 60°C 12000 rounds/minute

2.22.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 2-141 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FAN.
Figure 2-141 Front panel of the FAN
NOTE
Because the RTN 980L and RTN 980 use the same FAN, the silk print is still RTN 980 on the front panel.

Indicators
Table 2-293 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN
FAN On (green) The fan is working properly.
On (red) The fan is faulty.
Off The fan is not powered on or is not installed.
ESD Wrist Strap Jack

An ESD wrist strap needs to be connected to the ESD wrist strap jack to achieve the proper
grounding of the human body.
Labels
The front panel of the FAN has the following labels:
l ESD protection label: indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive.

l Fan warning label: warns you not to touch fan leaves when a fan is rotating.
2.22.5 Valid Slots

The FAN can be inserted in slot 28 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS
is the same as the physical slot.
Figure 2-142 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis
Slot 26 Slot 27
Slot 13 Slot 14
Slot 11 Slot 12
Slot 9 Slot 10
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 7 Slot 8
Slot 15
Slot 5 Slot 6
Slot 3 Slot 4
Slot 1 Slot 2

Figure 2-143 Logical slot of the FAN on the NMS
Slot 26 Slot 27
Slot 13 Slot 14
Slot 11 Slot 12
Slot 9 Slot 10

(FAN)
Slot 7 Slot 8
Slot 5 Slot 6
Slot 3 Slot 4
Slot 1 Slot 2

This section describes the board specifications, including board mechanical behavior and board
power consumption.
Table 2-294 lists the technical specifications for the FAN.
Table 2-294 Technical specifications for the FAN
Item Performance
Weight 1.66 kg
Power consumption l < 15.9 W (room temperature)

l < 103.5 W (high temperature)

Hardware Description 3 RFU
3 RFU
About This Chapter
A radio frequency unit (RFU) is an RF transceiver mainly used to convert the frequency and
amplify the power of signals.
RFUs are available in two types:
l RFU-SD: supports reception SD and IF combination.

l RFU-NonSD: does not support reception SD.
3.1 Appearance
An RFU is used outdoors and has an integrated structure.
3.2 Functions and Features

A radio frequency unit (RFU) is mainly used to convert the frequency and amplify the power of
signals.
3.3 Working Principles

For RFU-SD and RFU-NonSD models, signal processing is the same in the transmit direction
but are different in the receive direction.
3.4 Installation Mode

An RFU is directly installed to the corresponding port on the branching unit.
3.5 Ports
An RFU provides the RF port, IF port, RSSI port, and ground screw.
3.6 Labels
The following labels are attached to an RFU: nameplate label, bar code, radiation label, and
overtemperature label.
3.7 Technical Specifications

This section describes the RFU specifications, including frequency information, modulation
schemes, transceiver performance, IF performance, mechanical behavior, and power
consumption.

3.1 Appearance
An RFU is used outdoors and has an integrated structure.
Mechanical specifications of an RFU-SD and an RFU-NonSD are the same. Figure 3-1 shows
the appearance of an RFU.
Figure 3-1 Appearance of an RFU
Table 3-1 Appearance description
Item Description
Handle A handle helps engineers hold an RFU and facilitates RFU's

installation.
Guide pin A guide pin is fit into the guide trough on the branching unit to facilitate
positioning and installation of an RFU.
RF port An RF port is connected to the corresponding port on the branching

unit to receive and transmit RF signals.
Captive screw A captive screw fastens an RFU.
Ventilation valve A ventilation valve keeps pressure the same inside and outside an RFU,
preventing explosion. In addition, a ventilation valve prevents
moisture.
RSSI port An RSSI port is used to test RSSI voltage.
IF port An IF port is connected to an IDU through IF cables.
Ground screw A ground screw is connected to a protection ground cable.


A radio frequency unit (RFU) is mainly used to convert the frequency and amplify the power of
signals.
An RFU performs the following functions:
l Up converts upstream IF signals into RF signals to be transmitted and amplifies the RF

signals.
l Down converts the received RF signals into downstream IF signals and amplifies the IF
signals.
l Separates and combines upstream IF signals, downstream IF signals, upstream O&M
signals, downstream O&M signals, and -48 V power in IF cables.
l Performs control and monitoring functions.
An RFU supports the following features:
l Separate setting of the transmit frequency and receive frequency to adapt to various channel
spacing settings, so that one frequency band requires only two types of RFUs (TX high site
and TX low site types)
l Receiving of space diversity (SD) signals and IF combination (only by RFU-SD models)
l Adaptive modulation
l Automatic transmit power control (ATPC) and remote transmission power control (RTPC)
l Transmit power detection
l Receive power detection
l Received signal strength indicator (RSSI) used to indicate the current receive power using
voltage values
l Transmitter muting
l Temperature detection

For RFU-SD and RFU-NonSD models, signal processing is the same in the transmit direction
but are different in the receive direction.
Block Diagram
Figure 3-2 shows the block diagram of an RFU-SD.
NOTE
An RFU-NonSD processes signals in a similar way as an RFU-SD except for that the RFU-NonSD does
not have an SD receiver and IF combination module.

Figure 3-2 Block diagram of an RFU-SD

RFU-SD
Tx IF RF Tx
Up-conversion AMP
O&M
uplink
CTRL
O&M
downlink
IF Cable Synthesizers
port
DC PWR
RF Rx-Main
Down-conversion LNA
SD receiver and IF
Rx IF
combination module
IF combiner
Multiplexer Rx-SD
RF
Down-conversion LNA

The multiplexer splits the signal from the IF cable into a 350 MHz IF signal, a 5.5 MHz O&M
uplink signal, and a -48 V DC power signal.
In the transmit direction, an RFU-SD processes signals as follows:
1. After the up-conversion, filtering, and amplification are completed, the IF signal is
converted into the RF signal and is sent to the amplifier unit (AMP).
2. The AMP amplifies the RF signal and outputted from the Tx port.The output power of the
signal can be controlled by the IDU software.
The O&M uplink signal is a 5.5 MHz ASK-modulated signal and is demodulated in the CTRL
control unit.
The -48 V DC power signal is sent to the PWR power unit where the secondary power supply
of a different voltage is generated and provided to the modules of the RFU.

In the receive direction, an RFU-SD processes signals as follows:
1. The RF signal received by a main antenna is inputted to the RFU through the Rx-Main port,
and that received by an SD antenna is inputted to the RFU through the Rx-SD port.
2. The RF signal is amplified in the low noise amplifier (LNA). Through the down-conversion,
filtering, and amplification, the RF signal is converted into a 140 MHz IF signal.

3. The IF combiner performs adaptive signal processing for the main and SD IF signals,
combines them to a channel of IF signals, and send them to the multiplexer.
In the receive direction, an RFU-NonSD processes signals as follows:
1. The RF signal received by a main antenna is inputted to the RFU through the Rx-Main port.
2. The RF signal is amplified in the low noise amplifier (LNA). Through the down-conversion,
filtering, and amplification, the RF signal is converted into a 140 MHz IF signal, and send
them to the multiplexer.
The O&M downlink signal is modulated under the ASK mode in the CTRL unit. The 10 MHz
signal is generated through the modulation and sent to the multiplexer. The CTRL unit also
detects the receive signal level through the RSSI detection circuit and provides the RSSI
interface.
The IF signal and the O&M downlink signal are combined in the multiplexer and sent to the
IDU through the IF cable.

An RFU is directly installed to the corresponding port on the branching unit.
Figure 3-3 Installation mode of RFUs
3.5 Ports
An RFU provides the RF port, IF port, RSSI port, and ground screw.
Figure 3-4 shows the ports on the RFU (take the RFU-SD as an example).

Figure 3-4 Ports on an RFU
Table 3-2 describes the ports on an RFU.
Table 3-2 Port description
Port Name Description Connector Type Remarks
TX RF transmit port 153IEC-R70 (L6/U6 An RF port is

GHz) connected to the
Main RX RF receive port corresponding port
153IEC-R84 (7/8
(main) on the branching
GHz)
SD RX (available RF receive port (SD) unit.
153IEC-R120 (11
only on RFU-SD GHz)
models)
IF IF port Type-N (female) An IF port is

connected to an IF
cable.
RSSI RSSI port BNC type, two pins, The received signal
(female) strength can be
calculated based on
the voltage that is
measured at this port
using a multimeter.
PGND Ground screw M5 screw A ground screw is

connected to a
protection ground
cable.
As shown in Figure 3-4, an RFU provides two types of RSSI ports: RSSI (main) and RSSI (SD).

l For an RFU-SD, the RSSI (main) port is used to measure the level of the main received
signals and the RSSI (SD) port is used to measure the level of the SD received signals.
l For an RFU-NonSD, only the RSSI (main) port is used to measure the level of received
signals.
Figure 3-5 RSSI port
3.6 Labels
The following labels are attached to an RFU: nameplate label, bar code, radiation label, and
overtemperature label.
Nameplate Label
Figure 3-6 Nameplate label of an RFU

Table 3-3 Meanings of the parameters in a nameplate label
Label Example of the Label Content Parameter Meaning

Informati
on
RFU name (1): RFU type XMC-LH: split-structured

RFU
(2): frequency band Operating frequency band of

the RFU (GHz)
(3): diversity type l SD: space diversity (SD)

supported
l NonSD: SD not supported
(4): component name A radio frequency unit (RFU)
Part - RFU type

number
(ITEM)
Operating - l TX: transmit frequency

frequency range
l RX: receive frequency
range
TX high/ - l High Site: TX high site

low site l Low Site: TX low site
CMIIT ID - - ID of radio transmission

equipment type approval
certificate (in China)
Bar Code, Radiation Label, and Overtemperature Label
Table 3-4 Bar code, radiation label, and overtemperature label
Label Name Appearance Meaning
Bar code Bar code of an RFU's serial number,

which is used to uniquely identify each
RFU
Radiation label Used to warn users that

electromagnetic radiation is generated
while the device is working.

Label Name Appearance Meaning
Overtemperatu Used to warn users that high

re label temperature conditions may occur
while the device is working and proper
protection measures should be taken.

This section describes the RFU specifications, including frequency information, modulation
schemes, transceiver performance, IF performance, mechanical behavior, and power
consumption.
Frequency Information
Table 3-5 Operating frequency band (XMC-LH RFU)
Operating Frequency Range (GHz)

Frequency Band
Transmit Frequency of a TX Transmit Frequency of a TX
High Site (Receive Frequency Low Site (Receive Frequency
of a TX Low Site) of a TX High Site)
L6 GHz 6.175 to 6.425 5.925 to 6.173
U6 GHz 6.765 to 7.125 6.425 to 6.785
7 GHz 7.275 to 7.897 7.093 to 7.707
8 GHz 8.0165 to 8.497 7.725 to 8.377
11 GHz 11.199 to 11.745 10.675 to 11.215
NOTE
l Frequency ranges shown in the table are Tx/Rx signal frequencies lower / upper limits, that is, not the
channel center frequencies. The minimum central frequency is at least half of the channel spacing
higher than the minimum transmit frequency. The maximum central frequency is at least half of the
channel spacing lower than the maximum transmit frequency.
l The frequencies of an RFU's transmitter and receiver are separately set and they support multiple T/R
spacing values. Therefore, the transmit frequency ranges of the TX high and TX low sites are not strictly
symmetrical.
Typical T/R spacings include:
l L6 GHz frequency band: 252.04 MHz
l U6 GHz frequency band: 340 MHz
l 7GHz frequency band: 154 MHz, 161 MHz, 168 MHz, 196 MHz, 245 MHz
l 8GHz frequency band: 208 MHz, 266 MHz, 310 MHz, 311.32 MHz
l 11GHz frequency band: 490 MHz, 530 MHz

Modulation Schemes
Table 3-6 Modulation scheme (XMC-LH RFU)
Item Performance
Modulation QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM/512QAM/1024QAM
Channel 28/40/56 MHz (U6/8/11 GHz)

spacing 28/56 MHz (L6/7 GHz)
NOTE
Cooperated with IF boards, RFUs also support QPSK Strong, 16QAM Strong, and 512QAM Light working
modes. Strong and light indicate FEC coding strength. Strong FEC improves receiver sensitivity by
increasing error-correcting codes. Light FEC expands service capacity by reducing error-correcting codes.
Transceiver Performance
NOTE
The allowed maximum difference between the actual transmit power of an RFU and the preset value on
the NMS is ±2 dB.
If the receive power of an RFU is in the range from –70 dBm to –30 dBm, the allowed maximum difference
between the actual receive power and the preset value on the NMS is ±2 dB.
Table 3-7 Transceiver performance (XMC-LH RFU)
Item Performance
QPSK/ 64QAM/ 256QAM/ 1024QAM

16QAM/ 128QAM 512QAM
32QAM
Nominal maximum transmit power (dBm)
@L6 GHz 31.5 31.5 29.5 27.5
@U6 GHz 31.5 31.5 29.5 27.5
@7 GHz 31.5 31.5 29.5 27.5
@8 GHz 31.5 31.5 29.5 27.5
@11 GHz 29.5 29.5 27.5 26.5
Nominal minimum transmit power (dBm)
@L6 GHz 6
@U6 GHz 6
@7 GHz 6
@8 GHz 6

Item Performance
QPSK/ 64QAM/ 256QAM/ 1024QAM

16QAM/ 128QAM 512QAM
32QAM
@11 GHz 6
Nominal -20 -25

maximum
receive power
(dBm)
Frequency ±5
stability (ppm)
NOTE
When the T/R spacing is not a integer in unit of MHz, the frequency accuracy is not ±5 ppm but meets the
requirement of the ETSI.
IF Performance
Item Performance
Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption
Table 3-9 Mechanical behavior and power consumption (XMC-LH RFU)
Item Specification
Dimensions (H x W x 228 mm x 228 mm x 91 mm

D)
Weight ≤ 5.5 kg
Power -48 V (–36 V to –60 V) DC

Item Specification
Power consumption ≤ 50 W (RFU-SD)

≤ 45 W (RFU-NonSD)

Hardware Description 4 Branching Unit
4 Branching Unit
About This Chapter
A branching unit is a radio frequency (RF) divider/combiner.
Branching units are available in BU-SD and BU-NonSD models, which apply to RFU-SDs and
RFU-NonSDs respectively.
4.1 Appearance
A branching unit is used outdoors and has an integrated structure.

A branching unit combines and divides RF signals, and performs duplex isolation for received
and transmitted signals.

A branching unit performs duplex isolation and signal combination and division using circulators
and filters.

A branching unit is installed separately from antennas and is installed directly to RFU.
4.5 Ports
A branching unit provides one group of RFU ports, one group of antenna ports, and one group
of cascade ports.
4.6 Labels
The nameplate label and port labels are attached to a branching unit to provide equipment and
port information.

The technical specifications of a branching unit include insertion loss, mechanical behavior, and
power consumption.

4.1 Appearance
A branching unit is used outdoors and has an integrated structure.
Branching Unit
Figure 4-1 Appearance of a branching unit
Table 4-1 Appearance description
Item Description
RFU port A branching unit provides four RFU ports so that RFUs can
mount to it.
Main antenna port The main antenna port is connected to the main antenna.
Main cascade port The main cascade port is connected to the main antenna port
on the secondary branching unit
SD antenna port (available The SD antenna port is connected to the SD antenna.

only on BU-SD models)
SD cascade port (available The SD cascade port is connected to the SD antenna port on
only on BU-SD models) the secondary branching unit
Lifting eye The lifting eye is used to tie with the lifting sling.

Item Description
Bracket and hold hoop The bracket and hold hoop fix a branching unit onto a pole.
NOTE
When two branching units are cascaded, the branching unit that is directly connected to an antenna is called
the main branching unit and the other one that is not directly connected to an antenna is called the secondary
branching unit.
Mapping Loads
When an RFU port or an antenna/cascade port on a branching unit is not used, install a mapping
load onto the port to prevent signal reflection and provide waterproof and dustproof functions.
Figure 4-2 and Figure 4-3 show the appearance of two types of load.
Figure 4-2 Load for an RFU port
Figure 4-3 Load for an antenna/cascade port

A branching unit combines and divides RF signals, and performs duplex isolation for received
and transmitted signals.
A branching unit performs the following functions:
l In the transmit direction, combines RF signals from four RFU ports and cascade ports (if
there are signals) into one signal and send the signal to the antenna.

l In the receive direction, divides the RF signal received from the antenna into signals based
on channels and sends these signals to corresponding RFU ports and cascade ports (if there
are cascade signals).
Figure 4-4 Combining and dividing signals

A branching unit performs duplex isolation and signal combination and division using circulators
and filters.
A branching unit provides four tributary ports, one group of antenna ports, and one group of
cascade ports. The signals are processed in a branching unit as follows:
l In the transmit direction, four channels of tributary and cascade signals are combined by
circulators after being filtered and then sent out through the antenna port.
l In the receive direction, the RF signals received at the antenna port are divided by circulators
and signals that match corresponding filters of tributary channels are sent out through
mapping tributary ports. Signals that do not find matching filters continue to be transmitted.
When there are cascade signals, the cascade signals are finally sent out through the cascade
port as they cannot match the tributary filters of the main branching unit.
NOTE
The design of a branching unit is optimized so that all channels are attenuated equally. Figure 4-5 shows
the functional block diagram of a branching unit functioning as the TX low site. The channel numbers for
a branching unit functioning as the TX high site are the opposite (that is, ch4, ch3, ch2, and ch1).

Figure 4-5 Block diagram of a BU

Braching unit without SD Braching unit with SD
Ch 1
Main
Antenna
Ch 2 antenna
Ch 3
Ch 1
Ch 4
Cascading
Cascading Ch 2
(main)
Ch 3
Ch 4
Diversity
antenna
Circulator
Cascading
Filter (SD)
Ch n Radio channel n

A branching unit is installed separately from antennas and is installed directly to RFU.
Figure 4-6 and Figure 4-7 show a branching unit that is installed in typical scenarios.
l A branching unit is connected to the main antenna using flexible waveguides.

l In SD configuration, a branching unit is connected to SD antennas using elliptical
waveguides.
l Two cascaded branching units are connected using flexible waveguides.
NOTE
If a dual-polarized antenna is used, one branching unit is connected to each polarization direction.

Figure 4-6 Installing a single branching unit
Figure 4-7 Installing two branching units

4.5 Ports
A branching unit provides one group of RFU ports, one group of antenna ports, and one group
of cascade ports.
Figure 4-8 Ports on a branching unit
Table 4-2 Port description
Port Name Port Label Function Connector Type
RFU port 1 RFU Port1 A branching unit provides four RFU 154IEC-UDR70 (L6/U6 GHz)
ports so that RFUs can mount to it. 154IEC-UBR84 (7/8 GHz)
RFU port 2 RFU Port2
154IEC-UBR120 (11 GHz)

Port Name Port Label Function Connector Type
Main antenna Main Antenna l On a main branching unit, it is 154IEC-UDR70 (L6/U6 GHz)
port connected to the main antenna. 154IEC-UBR84 (7/8 GHz)
l On a secondary branching unit, 154IEC-UBR100 (11 GHz)
it is connected to the main
cascade port on the main
branching unit.
SD antenna port SD Antenna l On a main branching unit, it is

(available only connected to the SD antenna.
on BU-SD l On a secondary branching unit,
models) it is connected to the SD cascade
port on the main branching unit.
Main cascade Main Cascade The main cascade port is connected

port to the main antenna port on the
secondary BU.
SD cascade port SD Cascade The SD cascade port is connected to

(available only the SD antenna port on the
on BU-SD secondary BU.
models)
4.6 Labels
The nameplate label and port labels are attached to a branching unit to provide equipment and
port information.
Nameplate Label
Figure 4-9 Nameplate label of a branching unit

Table 4-3 Meanings of the parameters in a nameplate label

Informati
on
Component - A branching unit of outdoor

name type
Part (1): type of component B: branching unit

number
(2): application O: outdoor
(MODEL)
scenario
(3): frequency band Operating working

frequency of a branching unit
(GHz), value range: L6/
U6/07/08/11
(4): channel spacing Channel spacing (MHz),

value range: 28, 40, 56
(5): channel C: adjacent channel co-

configuration polarized (ACCP)
application
(6): diversity type N: space diversity (SD) not

supported
S: SD supported
(7): number of channels Number of tributary channels

supported by a single
branching unit
Part - Type of a branching unit

number
(ITEM)
Part (1): frequency band Operating frequency band of

description a branching unit
(DEP)
(2): channel spacing Channel spacing
(3): channel ACCP: ACCP application

configuration
(4): diversity type NonSD: SD not supported

SD: SD supported
(5): number of channels Number of tributary channels

supported by a single
branching unit
(6): TX high/low site High: TX high site

Low: TX low site


Informati
on
Bar code - Bar code for the serial

area number of the part, and QR
code indicating part number
and serial number
RFU-side Port Label

A channel label is attached above each RFU port to provide channel information.
Figure 4-10 Channel label
RFU Port x: RFU port for channel x 28MHz: channel bandwidth of each channel, with other available
values 40 MHz and 56 MHz
Tx: central TX frequency of the channel Rx: central RX frequency of the channel
Antenna-side Port Label

Labels are attached to antenna ports and cascade ports in the bottom of a branching unit to identify
various ports.
Figure 4-11 Antenna label and cascade port label
Main Antenna: main antenna port Main Cascade: main cascade port
SD Antenna: SD antenna port (available only on BU- SD Cascade: SD cascade port (available only on BU-
SD models) NonSD models)


The technical specifications of a branching unit include insertion loss, mechanical behavior, and
power consumption.
Insertion Loss
NOTE
l Insertion loss data is provided by hop, including TX insertion loss and RX insertion loss.
l The insertion loss data for 8+0 configuration counts in the insertion loss of the 1.8-m flexible waveguide
that connects cascaded BUs.
l The following table provides the specifications of generalized BUs, generalized BUs can be used for
channel configuration no matter there are adjacent channels or not.
Table 4-4 Insertion loss
Frequency Band Channel Insertion Loss Per Hop (dB)

Bandwidth (MHz)
4+0 (single BU) 8+0 (two BUs
cascading)
L6 GHz 28 5.7 7.6
56 5.3 7.2
U6 GHz 28 5.9 7.8
40 5.5 7.4
56 5.5 7.4
7 GHz 28 6.3 8.4
56 5.9 8
8 GHz 28 6.7 8.8
40 6.1 8.2
56 6.1 8.2
11 GHz 28 7.1 9.4
40 6.5 8.8
56 6.5 8.8

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption
Table 4-5 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of a branching unit
Item Specification
Dimensions (H x W x 400 mm x 700 mm x 400 mm

D)
Weight ≤ 40 kg

Hardware Description 5 Antennas
5 Antennas
About This Chapter
The microwave device uses the parabolic antennas to transmit and receive electromagnetic
waves.
5.1 Device Type

Antennas are classified into two types, namely, the single-polarized antenna and dual-polarized
antenna.
5.2 Functions
The microwave antenna is used to convert between the RF signals transmitted from the
Branching unit and electromagnetic waves radiated in the air.
5.3 Working Principle

An antenna comprises the reflector, feed boom, radome, shield, and mounting brackets.
5.4 Interfaces
The feed boom interface of the single-polarized antenna in direct mounting mode is a waveguide
interface. The feed boom interfaces of the single-polarized antenna in separate mounting mode
and of the dual-polarized antenna are flange interfaces.
5.5 Antenna Diameters

The antenna diameters vary according to the antenna type and the frequency band where the
antenna operates.

Huawei provides a complete series of antennas. To obtain the technical documents about the
specifications of a specific antenna, contact the respective Huawei local office.

5.1 Device Type

Antennas are classified into two types, namely, the single-polarized antenna and dual-polarized
antenna.
NOTE
By installation mode between the antenna and the transceiver, antennas are classified to direct-mount
antennas and separate-mount antennas. The Long haul microwave system supports only separate-mount
antennas.
l The single-polarized antenna transmits or receives electromagnetic waves in a specific
polarization direction. The single-polarized antenna provides a feed boom interface. The
feed boom interface can be set to be vertically polarized or horizontally polarized.
Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2 show the feed booms of the single-polarized antennas.
Figure 5-1 Feed boom of the single-polarized antenna (diameter ≤ 1.8 m)

Figure 5-2 Feed boom of the single-polarized antenna (diameter > 1.8 m)
l The dual-polarized antenna transmits and receives horizontally-polarized and vertically-

polarized electromagnetic waves at the same time.
Figure 5-3 shows the feed booms of the separate-mount dual-polarized antenna.
Figure 5-3 Feed boom of the separate-mount dual-polarized antenna
5.2 Functions
The microwave antenna is used to convert between the RF signals transmitted from the
Branching unit and electromagnetic waves radiated in the air.

l In the TX direction, the antenna converts the RF signals transmitted from the Branching
unit into directional electromagnetic waves and then radiates electromagnetic waves in the
air.
l In the RX direction, the antenna receives and assembles electromagnetic waves from the
air, converts electromagnetic waves into the RF signals, and then transmits the RF signals
to the Branching unit.
5.3 Working Principle

An antenna comprises the reflector, feed boom, radome, shield, and mounting brackets.
Figure 5-4 shows the structure of the antenna.
NOTE
This topic considers the single-polarized antenna as an example to describe the working principle of
antennas. The dual-polarized antenna has two feed boom interfaces and thus can transmit the
electromagnetic waves in the vertical and horizontal polarization directions at the same time. The working
principles of each component of the dual-polarized antenna are similar to the working principles of each
component of the single-polarized antenna.
Figure 5-4 Structure of the antenna

4
3
2
1
1. Feed boom 2. Reflector 3. Shield

4. Radome 5. Mounting brackets
The functions of each component of the antenna are described as follows:
l Feed boom
The input port of the feed boom accesses the RF signals transmitted from the transceiver.
The accessed RF signals are transmitted through the waveguide to the output port of the
feed boom, which is located at the focal spot of the reflector. The output port of the feed
boom is equivalent to a preliminary horn antenna and radiates electromagnetic waves
towards the antenna reflector.

You can change the polarization direction of the antenna by rotating the feed boom. Here,
polarization direction refers to the direction of an electrical field in electromagnetic waves.
Figure 5-5 shows the polarization directions supported by the rectangular waveguide.
NOTE
The polarization direction of the antenna must be the same as the polarization direction of the ODU
or hybrid coupler. The feed booms of certain types use the round waveguide. In this case, see
installation instruction of the antenna to adjust the polarization direction of an antenna according to
the polarization mark.
Figure 5-5 Polarization directions supported by the rectangular waveguide

Vertical Horizontal
polarization polarization
Direction of the
electrical field
l Reflector
Normally, the reflector of the antenna is a rotatable paraboloid. The reflector is mainly used
for determining the direction and providing the directive gain.
– In the transmit direction, the reflector reflects the electromagnetic waves radiated from
the feed boom so that the electromagnetic waves are directional.
– In the receive direction, the reflector assembles the electromagnetic waves from the
space to the output port of the feed boom.
l Radome
The radome protects the antenna from being damaged due to the wind, rain, and ice. The
electromagnetic waves can be radiated through the radome.
l Shield
The shield is installed on the HP antenna. The shield is mainly used for suppressing the
radiation of the side lobes.
l Mounting brackets
The mounting brackets are used for fixing the antenna onto the pole and for adjusting the
azimuth and elevation slightly. In addition to the mounting brackets, a reinforcing rod is
required for fixing the antenna with the diameter of not less than 1.2 meters.
5.4 Interfaces
The feed boom interface of the single-polarized antenna in direct mounting mode is a waveguide
interface. The feed boom interfaces of the single-polarized antenna in separate mounting mode
and of the dual-polarized antenna are flange interfaces.

Table 5-1 Specifications for the feed boom interface of an antenna
Frequency Interface Type

Band
Separate-mount Single- Separate-mount Dual-
Polarized Antenna Polarized Antenna
L6/U6GHz 154IEC-PDR70 154IEC-PDR70
7/8GHz 154IEC-UBR84 154IEC-UBR84
11GHz 154IEC-UBR100 154IEC-UBR100
5.5 Antenna Diameters

The antenna diameters vary according to the antenna type and the frequency band where the
antenna operates.
Table 5-2 and Table 5-3 list the diameters supported by different types of antennas. "Y" indicates
that the corresponding antenna diameter is supported. "NA" indicates that the corresponding
antenna diameter is not supported.
Table 5-2 Diameter of the single-polarized antenna
Freque Antenna Diameter

ncy
Band 0.3m 0.6m 0.9m 1.0m 1.2m 1.8m 2.4m 3.0m 3.7m
6GHz N/A N/A Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
7/8GHz N/A Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
11GHz Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A N/A N/A
Table 5-3 Diameter of the separate-mount dual-polarized antenna
Frequ Antenna Diameter

ency
Band 0.3m 0.6m 0.9m 1.0m 1.2m 1.8m 2.4m 3.0m 3.7m
6GHz N/A N/A N/A Y Y Y Y Y Y
7/8GH N/A Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
z
11GHz N/A Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A


Huawei provides a complete series of antennas. To obtain the technical documents about the
specifications of a specific antenna, contact the respective Huawei local office.
The technical specifications of the antenna include the electrical indexes and mechanical
indexes. The electrical indexes of the antenna include the antenna gain, half-power beamwidth,
VSWR, and front-to-back ratio. The mechanical indexes of the antenna include the size, weight,
wind-protective feature, and ice/snow-protective feature.

Hardware Description 6 Waveguide
6 Waveguide
About This Chapter
A waveguide is used to connect flanges.
6.1 Elliptical Waveguide

An Elliptical waveguide is a tube rigid waveguide with ripples. It is used to connect an antenna
feed and the SD antenna port on a branching unit.
6.2 Flexible Waveguide

A flexible waveguide is a rectangular waveguide used to connect an antenna and a branching
unit or connect two branching units.

6.1 Elliptical Waveguide

An Elliptical waveguide is a tube rigid waveguide with ripples. It is used to connect an antenna
feed and the SD antenna port on a branching unit.
Appearance
Figure 6-1 Appearance of an elliptical waveguide
NOTE
Install appropriate flanges to both ends of an elliptical waveguide onsite.
Technical Specifications
NOTE
Multiple models of elliptical waveguides are available. The elliptical waveguides manufactured by
Huawei's partner Andrew is recommended. Table 6-1 lists the main technical specifications of Andrew
elliptical waveguides. You can view Andrew documents to obtain more detailed technical specifications.
Table 6-1 Technical specifications of an elliptical waveguide
Item Frequency Band
L6/U6 GHz 7/8 GHz 11 GHz
Andrew type EWP63-59W EWP77-71W EWP90S
Attenuation (dB/100 ≤4.98 ≤6.26 ≤10.31

m)
VSWR 1.06 1.06 1.05
Minimum Bending 260 (multiple bends) 230 (multiple bends) 180 (multiple bends)
Radius (mm) of 180 (single bend) 180 (single bend) 150 (single bend)
Plane E
Minimum Bending 740 (multiple bends) 635 (multiple bends) 480 (multiple bends)
Radius (mm) of 510 (single bend) 510 (single bend) 300 (single bend)
Plane H

Item Frequency Band
L6/U6 GHz 7/8 GHz 11 GHz
Outer Diameter 51.1 x 29.5 43.6 x 25.4 33.5 x 20.3

(mm)
Weight (kg/m) 0.76 0.67 0.48
connector PDR70 PBR84 PBR100
Reference Information
Ensure that the bending radius of an elliptical waveguide is larger than the minimum value.
Do not twist an elliptical waveguide. To change the direction of a plane, bend two bows.
Figure 6-2 Bending an elliptical waveguide and changing the direction of a plane
6.2 Flexible Waveguide

A flexible waveguide is a rectangular waveguide used to connect an antenna and a branching
unit or connect two branching units.

Appearance
Figure 6-3 Appearance of a flexible waveguide
Table 6-2 Technical specifications of a flexible waveguide
Frequenc Available Maximu Maximu Minimum Minimum Maximu Flange

y Band Length m m Bending Bending m Type
(m) Insertion Twisting Radius Radius Standing
Loss (dB) Angle (mm) of (mm) of Wave
(Degree) Plane E Plane H Ratio
6 GHz 0.9/1.2/1.8 0.2/0.3/0.4 195 102 204 1.1 PDR70
7/8 GHz 0.9/1.2/1.8 0.3/0.4/0.6 240/320/48 76 152 1.1 PBR84

0
11 GHz 0.6/0.9/1.2/ 0.24/0.4/0. 190/280/38 64 127 1.1 PBR100

1.8 5/0.8 0/560
Reference Information
Ensure that the bending radius of a flexible waveguide is larger than the minimum value. The
twisting angle cannot be larger than the maximum value.

Figure 6-4 Bending radius and twisting angle

Hardware Description 7 Accessories
7 Accessories
About This Chapter
The accessories of the OptiX RTN 980L include the E1 panel and the power distribution unit
(PDU). Select appropriate accessories based on the requirements.
7.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1
panel functions as a DDF for the IDU.
7.2 PDU
The Power Distribution Unit (PDU) is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet or an ETSI cabinet.
The PDU is used to distribute the input power to the equipment in the cabinet. The OptiX RTN
980L equipment uses the C3 DC PDU.
7.3 AC Power Box

The external power box ETP4890-A2 can be used for AC power supply if an IDU is installed
indoors.
7.4 USB Flash Drives

Configuring, replacing, and upgrading OptiX RTN 980Ls is simple with USB flash drives, which
store NE data and new software to be installed, and are also used to back up configuration data.

7.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1
panel functions as a DDF for the IDU.
The dimensions (H x W x D) of the E1 panel are 42 mm x 483 mm x 33 mm. An E1 panel

provides cable distribution for 16 E1s.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 7-1 Front panel of an E1 panel

R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16
1-8
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16 9-16
Ports
Table 7-1 Port description of an E1 panel
T1-T16 Transmit ports for the first to BNC

sixteenth E1 ports (connected
to external equipment)
R1-R16 Receive ports for the first to

sixteenth E1 ports (connected
to external equipment)
1-8 The first to eighth E1 ports DB37

(connected to an IDU)
9-16 The ninth to sixteenth E1

ports (connected to an IDU)
Grounding bolt Connecting a PGND cable -
NOTE
The port impedance of each E1 port on an E1 panel is 75 ohms.
Figure 7-2 shows the front view of an E1 port that is connected to an IDU. Table 7-2 provides
the pin assignments for the E1 port.

Figure 7-2 Front view of an E1 port (E1 panel)

Pos. 1
Pos. 37
Table 7-2 Pin assignments for an E1 port (E1 panel)
20 The first E1 received differential 21 The first E1 transmitted

signal (+) differential signal (+)
2 The first E1 received differential 3 The first E1 transmitted

signal (-) differential signal (-)
22 The second E1 received 23 The second E1 transmitted

4 The second E1 received 5 The second E1 transmitted

24 The third E1 received differential 25 The third E1 transmitted

6 The third E1 received differential 7 The third E1 transmitted

26 The fourth E1 received 27 The fourth E1 transmitted

8 The fourth E1 received 9 The fourth E1 transmitted

36 The fifth E1 received differential 35 The fifth E1 transmitted

17 The fifth E1 received differential 16 The fifth E1 transmitted

34 The sixth E1 received differential 33 The sixth E1 transmitted

15 The sixth E1 received differential 14 The sixth E1 transmitted

32 The seventh E1 received 31 The seventh E1 transmitted


13 The seventh E1 received 12 The seventh E1 transmitted

30 The eighth E1 received 29 The eighth E1 transmitted

11 The eighth E1 received 10 The eighth E1 transmitted

Others Reserved - -
7.2 PDU
The Power Distribution Unit (PDU) is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet or an ETSI cabinet.
The PDU is used to distribute the input power to the equipment in the cabinet. The OptiX RTN
980L equipment uses the C3 DC PDU.
NOTE
Because OptiX RTN 980L is nodal microwave equipment that consumes high power, it is recommended
that the power distribution cabinet directly supply power to the equipment. If the power distribution cabinet
fails to supply 40 A power distribution terminals, the C3 DC PDU is also applicable.
7.2.1 Appearance
The C3 PDU is a simple-designed PDU.
Figure 7-3 shows the C3 PDU.
Figure 7-3 Appearance of the C3 PDU
NOTE
Normally, there is a cover in the input power terminal area.

7.2.2 Front Panel

There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches
on the front panel of the C3 PDU.
Front panel diagram
Figure 7-4 Front panel of the DC PDU

1 2 3
RTN1(+) NEG1(-)
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

PGND RTN2(+) NEG2(-)
1. Output power terminal area 2. Power switch area

3. Input power terminal area -
Port
Table 7-3 Description of ports on the DC PDU
Positio Port Port Description Port Specifications

n Identifi
er
Output -48 V Output power supply -48 V Four output power supplies (when
power used with the OptiX RTN 980L),
termina GND Output power supply GND Cord end terminal (12-10AWG),
l area terminals
maximum cable diameter 6 mm2
Input RTN1 The first input power (+) M8 OT terminal, maximum cable
power (+) diameter 16 mm2.
termina
l area RTN2 The second input power (+)
(+)
NEG1 The first input power (-)

(-)
NEG2 The second input power (-)

(-)
PGND PGND terminals
Power SW1 Output power switch 1 controls The fuse capacity is 40 A.

switch the first output power.

Positio Port Port Description Port Specifications

n Identifi
er
SW2 Output power switch 2 controls

the second output power.

the third output power.

the fourth output power.
When the C3 PDU is used together with the OptiX RTN 980L, each output power occupies four
output terminals, each power switch controls one output power, and each output power can only
provide one input power to the OptiX RTN 980L. The mapping relationship between power
switches on the front panel and output power terminals that the switches control is showed in
Figure 7-5.
Figure 7-5 Mapping relationship between power switches and output power terminals
- - G G - - G G - - G G - - G G S S S S
48 48 N N 48 48 N N 48 48 N N 48 48 N N W W W W
V V D D V V D D V V D D V V D D 1 2 3 4
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

Power switch area
7.2.3 Functions and Working Principles

The C3 PDU realizes the simple power distribution function and distributes the input power to
the equipment in a cabinet.
Functions
l The PDU supports two inputs of -48 V/-60 V DC power.
l Each input power supply supports two outputs.
l The fuse capacity of the switch of each output power is 40 A.
l Each power switch controls one output power (when the PDU is used with OptiX RTN
980L).
l The PDU is protected against short circuit and overload.
l The PDU can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or in an ETSI cabinet.
l The PDU supports the DC-I power distribution mode.

Working principles
The PDU mainly consists of input terminals, output terminals, and air circuit breakers. The PDU
supports the simple power distribution function for the input power.
Figure 7-6 Functional block diagram of the DC PDU
OUTPUT
INPUT
SW1 -48V
-48V
NEG1(-) SW2
BGND
SW3 BGND
NEG2(-) -48V
SW4
-48V
RTN1(+) BGND
BGND BGND
RTN2(+) -48V
-48V
BGND
BGND
-48V
-48V
PGND BGND
BGND
BGND
7.3 AC Power Box

The external power box ETP4890-A2 can be used for AC power supply if an IDU is installed
indoors.

The AC power box converts single-phase 220 V AC power to -48 V DC power required by the
OptiX RTN 980L. It can work with a storage battery to provide the DC power supply backup.
Table 7-4 lists the functions and features that the AC power box supports.
Basic function Converts 220 V AC power input to -48 V DC power output.

Power system AC power Supports 85 V to 300 V AC input voltages

configuration distributio
n
Rectifier l Supports a maximum of two rectifier modules.

module NOTE
When a storage battery is configured, three rectifier modules
are required.
l Supports the 30 A rectifier module type.
DC power Provides -42 V DC to -58 V DC power outputs, with -53.5

distributio V DC by default.
n
Power Required.
monitorin l Regulates rectifier module voltages and currents.
g unit
(PMU) l Powers on or off the rectifier module.
l Manages batteries.
l Monitors battery status when being configured with a
temperature sensor.
Storage Provides a valve regulated lead-acid battery (48 V/150 Ah/

battery 12 V-cell batteries).
Installation and maintenance l Supports horizontal and vertical installation in a 19-inch

cabinet (default configuration).
l Allows users to perform operations and maintenance
using the front panel.
l Supports simple operations on the LCD.
l Provides the hot-swappable rectifier module and
monitoring module.

This section describes how the AC power box works with the storage battery to supply power
to equipment.
System Architecture
The AC power box consists of an AC input module, a rectifier module, a DC distribution module,
and a monitoring module. The storage battery provides the backup power supply.

Figure 7-7 Function block diagram of the AC power box
AC power box
DC power –48 V DC
220 V AC AC input Rectifier
distribution OptiX RTN 900
power input module module
module
Monitoring
module
–48 V DC
Storage
battery
Working Principle
When receiving a 220 V AC power input, the rectifier module converts the 220 V AC power
into -48 V DC power and provides two -48 V DC power outputs to the OptiX RTN 980L and
one -48 V DC power output to the storage battery.
When the 220 V AC power input is interrupted, the storage battery discharges to ensure the two
-48 V DC power outputs to the OptiX RTN 980L. The monitoring module detects alarms about
AC power input interruption. When the storage battery voltage decreases to 45 V, the monitoring
module reports DC undervoltage alarms. When the storage battery voltage decreases to 43 V,
the power supplied by the storage battery is cut off to protect the storage battery. When the 220
V AC power supply is restored, the power system resumes normal operation.
7.3.3 Front Panel

An AC power box has power ports, communication ports, indicators, and switches on its front
panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 7-8 Front panel of an AC power box

AC/DC Power Distribution Subrack

An AC/DC power distribution subrack has ports and switches for AC power inputs and DC
power distribution.
Table 7-5 Ports on an AC/DC power distribution subrack
Location Mark Description
AC power L1-L3 Live wire terminals

input
N Neutral wire terminal
DC LOAD1- Four load ports

distribution LOAD4 l LOAD1: 10 A
l LOAD2: 30 A
l LOAD3-LOAD4: 40 A
NOTE
Plus signs (+) in marks indicate positive wiring terminals. Minus
signs (-) in marks indicate negative wiring terminals.
BATT One 80 A battery port
Rectifier Module
A rectifier module has a power indicator, an alarm indicator, and a fault indicator.
Figure 7-9 Front panel of a rectifier module

Table 7-6 Indicators on a rectifier module
Mark Indicator Description

Name
Power Indicates the power input and running status of a rectifier

indicator module.
Alarm Indicates the alarm status of a rectifier module.

indicator
Fault Indicates whether a fault occurs on a rectifier module.

indicator
NOTE
For details, see ETP4890-A2 User Manual.
Monitoring Module
A monitoring module has indicators, a liquid crystal display (LCD), buttons, and communication
and monitoring ports on its front panel.
Figure 7-10 Front panel of a monitoring module

Table 7-7 Front panel of a monitoring module
N Name Description
o.
1 Running status indicator Indicates the running status of a monitoring module.
2 Alarm indicator Indicates the alarm status of a monitoring module.
3 LCD Displays system running information and menu options.
4 Button Operates menus displayed on the LCD.
5 Locking switch Locks or unlocks a monitoring module.
6 DB50 port (Reserved)
7 Battery temperature Connects to a battery temperature sensor.

sensor port
8 RS485/RS232 port (Reserved)
9 COM port (Reserved)
NOTE
For details, see ETP4890-A2 User Manual.

This section describes the technical specifications of the AC power box, including electrical
specifications and entire system specifications.
Table 7-8 lists the technical specifications of the AC power box.
Table 7-8 Technical specifications
Item Specifications
AC input Input mode Single-phase, dual-live-wire, and three-phase
Input l 85 V AC to 300 V AC, with 110 V AC or 220 V AC by

voltage default
l 346 V AC to 415 V AC, with 380 V AC by default
Input 45 Hz to 66 Hz, with 50 Hz or 60 Hz by default

frequency
Power ≥ 0.99 (100% load)

factor
DC output Output -42 V DC to -58 V DC, with -53.5 V DC by default

voltage

Item Specifications
Output See the output power of the rectifier module. The maximum
power output power of the system is the product of the rectifier module
count and the output power of a single rectifier module.
Regulated ≤ 1.0%
voltage
precision
Peak-to- ≤ 200 mV (0 MHz to 20 MHz)

peak noise
voltage
Rectifier module type l R4815G1 (30 A rectifier of normal efficiency) (optional)
Power monitoring module SMU01C

type
Dimensions (H x W x D) 86.1 mm x 442 mm x 255 mm
Weight < 15 kg (including modules)
7.3.5 Power Cable

An AC power box (ETP 4890) has three types of power cable: AC input power cables, load
power cables, and battery power cables.
AC Input Power Cable

An AC input power cable carries AC power from an AC power supply device to an AC power
box.
Figure 7-11 AC input power cable diagram

Table 7-9 AC input power cable specifications
Cable Terminal (AC Power Terminal (ETP 4890)

Supply Device)
Power cable, 300 V/500 V, Naked crimping terminal, Naked crimping terminal,
60227IEC10 (BVV), 3x6 OT, 6 mm2, M8, tin plating, OT, 6 mm2, M6, tin plating,
mm2, black (cores: blue, insulated ring terminal, insulated ring terminal,
brown, yellow/green), 46 A, 12-10 AWG, yellow 12-10 AWG, yellow
with a package exempted from
fumigating
Load Power Cable

Load power cables carry DC power from an ETP 4890 to an OptiX RTN 980L.
Figure 7-12 Load power cable diagram

Table 7-10 Load power cable specifications
Cable Terminal (ETP 4890) Terminal (OptiX RTN

980L)
Power cable, 450/750 V, Common terminal, Naked crimping terminal,

H07Z-K UL3386, 6 mm2, conductor cross section 6 OT, 6 mm2, M6, tin plating,
blue+black, 58 A, low smoke mm2, length 20 mm, 30 A, insulated ring terminal,
zero halogen cable insertion depth 12 mm, black 12-10 AWG, yellow
NOTE
For an OptiX RTN 980L, the
cable can extend for a maximum
distance of 10 m.
Battery Power Cable

A battery power cable connects an AC power box to a storage battery. The battery power cable
and load power cable of an OptiX RTN 980L is the same.
Figure 7-13 Battery power cable diagram

Table 7-11 Battery power cable specifications
Cable Terminal (ETP 4890) Terminal (Battery)
Power cable, 450/750 V, Common terminal, Naked crimping terminal,

H07Z-K UL3386, 6 mm2, conductor cross section 6 OT, 6 mm2, M6, tin plating,
blue+black, 58 A, low smoke mm2, length 20 mm, 30 A, insulated ring terminal,
zero halogen cable insertion depth 12 mm, black 12-10 AWG, yellow
NOTE
For a storage battery, the cable
can extend for a maximum
distance of 10 m.
7.4 USB Flash Drives

Configuring, replacing, and upgrading OptiX RTN 980Ls is simple with USB flash drives, which
store NE data and new software to be installed, and are also used to back up configuration data.
Functions and Features

USB flash drives prepared for OptiX RTN 980Ls store NE software, configuration data
(including databases, system parameters, and scripts), and license files.
l Equipment software, scripts, and license files stored in USB flash drives are installed on
OptiX RTN 980Ls for deployment and commissioning. With this system, users do not need
to configure data on site.
l Software, patch packages, license files, NE databases, and system parameters are backed
up to USB flash drives. This avoids the need to reconfigure data when replacing a OptiX
RTN 980L.
l Software of target versions stored in USB flash drives are imported to OptiX RTN 980Ls.
Application Scenario
l For deployment and commissioning of the OptiX RTN 980L, the license, scripts, and
software are stored on a USB flash drive. After the USB flash drive is plugged in and
functioning, the OptiX RTN 980L downloads software, scripts, and license in sequence.
l For an upgrade or downgrade of the OptiX RTN 980L, only the software of the target
version is stored on a USB flash drive. After the USB flash drive is plugged in and
functioning, the OptiX RTN 980L compares the versions of the running software and the
software stored on the USB flash drive. If the versions are not the same, the OptiX RTN
980L automatically downloads the software from the USB flash drive for an upgrade or
downgrade.
l During OptiX RTN 980L replacement, an empty USB flash drive is inserted into a faulty
device, which automatically backs up its data to the drive. After the faulty device is replaced,
the drive holding the backup data is inserted into the new device, which automatically
downloads the backed up NE data, software, license, and system parameters and restores
the NE data.

Data uploading
A USB flash drive contains the following folders:
NOTE
The USB flash drive partition format is FAT32.
l The root directory stores a RTN.CER file.
NOTE
The RTN.CER file, which stores administrator-level account and password information (with
password information encrypted), is used for authenticating the USB flash drive. The file is generated
by a system administrator at the NMC using a dedicated tool.
l pkg: stores the NE software.
NOTICE
Data is saved in the \pkg folder only when the NE software is upgraded. Otherwise, keep
the folder empty.
l patch: stores the patch software.

l sysdata: stores system parameters.
l script: stores scripts.
l db: stores NE databases.
l license: stores a license.
l devicetype: stores device type parameters.
When a USB flash drive is connected to an OptiX RTN 980L, the OptiX RTN 980L checks the
folders on the USB flash drive in the following order:
1. Checks for the RTN.CER file in the root directory. If the file exists, the USB flash drive
is authenticated. Otherwise, the USB flash drive fails to be identified.
2. Checks the NE software folder pkg. If the NE software version is different from that of the
local OptiX RTN 980L, the OptiX RTN 980L upgrades its software.
3. Checks the patch software folder patch. If the patch software version is different from that
of the local OptiX RTN 980L, the OptiX RTN 980L loads the patch software from the
folder.
4. Checks the system parameter folder sysdata. If the folder contains data, the OptiX RTN
980L imports system parameters from the folder.
5. Checks the script folder script. If the folder contains data, the OptiX RTN 980L imports
script data from the folder.
6. Checks the database folder db. If the folder contains data and the device type under
\Devicetype is the same as the NE device type, the OptiX RTN 980L loads the database
from the folder.
7. Checks the license folder license. If the folder contains the license, the OptiX RTN 980L
loads the license from the folder.
8. If any of the preceding folders contains no data or does not exist, the OptiX RTN 980L
checks the next folder. If the OptiX RTN 980L finds none of the preceding folders, it exports
its data to the USB flash drive.

Ensure that USB flash drives have only the preceding folders, as extra folders may lead to
malfunctions.
The following are working principles of USB flash drives in various scenarios:
NOTE
A device reads data from a USB flash drive at different rates in different scenarios. The user can check
whether the device is reading data from a USB flash drive by observing the USB port or USB flash drive
indicator.
Types of USB Flash Drives

Table 7-12 lists the types of USB flash drives supported by the OptiX RTN 980L. Not all USB
flash drives are supported by the OptiX RTN 980L. If a USB flash drive of another model or
capacity is required, confirm with the local Huawei representative office that the USB flash drive
is supported by the OptiX RTN 980L. The USB which do not meet the requirement may have
the compatibility issue.
Table 7-12 Types of USB flash drives
No. Manufacturer Model Capacity
1 Netac U208 4 GB

Hardware Description 8 Cables
8 Cables
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the purpose, appearance, and pin assignments of various cables used on
the IDU 980L.
8.1 Power Cable

A power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDU
on top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU.
8.2 PGND Cable

PGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables.
8.3 IF Cable
The IF cable connects the RFU/ODU and IDU. The IF cable is used to transport the IF signal,
O&M signal, and -48 V power between the RFU/ODU and the IDU.
8.4 IF Jumper
An IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmit
IF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the RFU-NonSD/
RFU-SD/ODU and the IDU.
8.5 XPIC Cable

An XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPIC
workgroup to implement the XPIC function.
8.6 Fiber Jumper

A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector
that is connected to an SDH optical port or FE/GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 980L. The
connector at the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the
equipment to be connected.
8.7 STM-1 Cable

An STM-1 cable transmits/receives STM-1 signals. One end of the STM-1 cable has an SAA
connector that is connected to an STM-1 electrical port. The connector at the other end of the
STM-1 cable is connected to a DDF and needs to be prepared on site as required.
8.8 E1 Cables

E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment
and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel.
8.9 Orderwire Cable

An orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire
cable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the
PHONE port on the AUX. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the port of the
orderwire phone.
8.10 Network Cable

A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are
terminated with an RJ45 connector.

8.1 Power Cable

A power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDU
on top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU.
NOTE
If an OptiX RTN 980L uses an AC power box, the load power cable delivered with the AC power box
must be used. See 7.3.5 Power Cable.
Cable Diagram
Figure 8-1 Power cable
Table 8-1 Power cable specifications
Model Cable Terminal
6 mm2 Power cable, 450 V/750 Naked crimping terminal, OT, 6 mm2, M6, tin
power cable V, H07Z-K UL3386, 6 plating, 12-10 AWG, yellow
and terminal mm2, blue/black, low
smoke zero Halogen
cable
16 mm2 Power cable, 450 V/750 Naked crimping terminal, OT, 16 mm2, M6, tin
power cable V, H07Z-K UL3386, 16 plating, naked ring terminal
and terminal mm2, blue/black, low
smoke zero Halogen
cable

NOTE
For the OptiX RTN 980L, power cables with a 6 mm2 cross-sectional area can extend for a maximum distance
of 10 m, and power cables with a 16 mm2 cross-sectional area can extend for a maximum distance of 25 m.
8.2 PGND Cable

PGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables.
8.2.1 IDU PGND Cable

An IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of external
equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and external equipment
share the same ground.
Cable Diagram
Figure 8-2 IDU PGND cable

Main label
1 Cable tie H.S.tube
1. Bare crimping terminal, OT 2. Bare crimping terminal, OT
Pin Assignments
None.
8.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable

An E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of
external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and
external equipment share the same ground.

Cable Diagram
Figure 8-3 E1 panel PGND cable
Main label
Bare crimping terminal, OT
Pin Assignments
None.
8.2.3 Outdoor Protection Ground Cable

The Outdoor protection ground cable is used to connect the left grounding screw of the RFU/
BU/ODU and the outdoor ground point such as the ground point on the tower, so that the RFU/
BU/ODU is connected to the outdoor ground counterpoise.
Cable Diagram
Figure 8-4 View of the ODU protection ground cable

1
2
1500 mm
1. Naked crimping connector, OT 2. Grounding clip base

Cable Connection Table

None.
8.3 IF Cable
The IF cable connects the RFU/ODU and IDU. The IF cable is used to transport the IF signal,
O&M signal, and -48 V power between the RFU/ODU and the IDU.
IF cables are of three types, namely, 5D cable, RG-8U cable, and 1/2-inch cable.
Table 8-2 Types of IF cables
Type Applicable Connector IF Jumper

Distance Required
(Distance ODU Side IDU Side
Between an
IDU and an
RFU/ODU)
5D cable < 120 m Type N, male Type TNC, male No

connector connector
RG-8U cable 120 m to 180 m Type N, male Type N, male Yes

connector connector
1/2-inch cable 180 m to 300 m Type N, male Type N, male Yes

connector connector
NOTE
A 5D cable connects the IF interface of an RFU/ODU to the IF interface of an IDU. An RG-8U cable or 1/2-
inch cable connects the IF interface of an ODU to the IF jumper of an IDU.

Cable Diagram
Figure 8-5 Diagram of the IF cable
RG-8U cable or 1/2-inch cable

1 1
5D cable
1 2
1. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, male 2. RF Coaxial Connector, type TNC, male
Cable Connection Table

None.
Table 8-3 Technical specifications of the IF cable
Item Performance
5D Cable RG-8U Cable 1/2-Inch Cable
Characteristic 50 50 50
impedance (ohm)
Attenuation (dB/100 ≤ 10.0 (140 MHz) ≤ 6.0 (140 MHz) ≤ 5.0 (140 MHz)
m) ≤ 15.0 (350 MHz) ≤ 9.0 (350 MHz) ≤ 7.8 (350 MHz)
DC resistance (ohm/ ≤ 11.0 ≤ 4.9 ≤ 4.3

km at 20°C)
Cable diameter (mm) 7.60 mm 10.16 mm 13.40 mm

8.4 IF Jumper
An IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmit
IF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the RFU-NonSD/
RFU-SD/ODU and the IDU.
An IF jumper is a 2 m RG-223 cable. One end of the IF jumper has a Type N connector that is
connected to the IF cable. The other end of the IF jumper has a TNC connector that is connected
to the IF board.
NOTE
l If a 5D IF cable is used,
l When you connect a 5D IF cable to an ISM6 board, you can connect the cable to a TNC-to-TNC
connector and then to the ISM6 board.
l When you connect a 5D IF cable to an IF board other than an ISM6 board, you can connect the
cable directly to the IF board instead of using an IF jumper.
l If an RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable is used, an IF jumper is required to connect the RG-8U or 1/2-inch
IF cable to the IF board.
Cable Diagram
Figure 8-6 IF jumper

1
H.S.tube 2 PCS 2
L = 3 cm
2000 mm
1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male 2. RF coaxial cable connector, Type N, female
Pin Assignments
None.
8.5 XPIC Cable

An XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPIC
workgroup to implement the XPIC function.

An XPIC cable is an RG316 cable that has SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPIC
cable is connected to the X-IN port of one XPIC board in an XPIC workgroup, and the other
end of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-OUT port of the other XPIC board in the same
XPIC workgroup.
l If the XPIC function is disenabled on an ISX2 board, use a short XPIC cable to connect
the IN and OUT ports on the board. Otherwise, board performance will be affected.
l If the XPIC function is disenabled on an ISV3 board, do not use a short XPIC cable to
connect the IN and OUT ports on the board. Otherwise, the board performance will be
affected.
XPIC cables are available in the following types:
l XPIC cables with angle connectors: These XPIC cables are long and used to connect two
XPIC boards in the horizontal direction, for example, XPIC boards in slots 3 and 4.
l XPIC cables with straight connectors: These XPIC cables are short and used to connect
two XPIC boards in the vertical direction, for example, IFX2 boards in slots 3 and 5. These
XPIC cables are also used to connect the X-IN port to the X-OUT port on the same XPIC
board to loop back signals.
Cable Diagram
Figure 8-7 XPIC cable

1
1
L1
2
2
L2
1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male 2. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, straight, male
Pin Assignments
None.

8.6 Fiber Jumper

A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector
that is connected to an SDH optical port or FE/GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 980L. The
connector at the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the
equipment to be connected.
Types of Fiber Jumpers
Table 8-4 Types of fiber jumpers
Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable
LC/PC FC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber
2 mm multi-mode fiber
LC/PC SC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber
LC/PC LC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber
NOTE
For the OptiX RTN 980L, multi-mode fibers are required to connect to 1000BASE-SX GE optical ports.
Fiber Connectors
The following figures show three common types of fiber connectors, namely, LC/PC connector,
SC/PC connector, and FC/PC connector.
Figure 8-8 LC/PC connector

Figure 8-9 SC/PC connector
Figure 8-10 FC/PC connector
8.7 STM-1 Cable

An STM-1 cable transmits/receives STM-1 signals. One end of the STM-1 cable has an SAA
connector that is connected to an STM-1 electrical port. The connector at the other end of the
STM-1 cable is connected to a DDF and needs to be prepared on site as required.

Cable Diagram
Figure 8-11 STM-1 cable
1. Coaxial connector, SAA straight/male 2. Main label 3. Coaxial cable
Pin Assignments
None.
Cable Specifications
Item Description
Connector Coaxial connector, SAA connector (1.0/2.3), 75-ohm straight/male
Cable model Coaxial cable, 75-ohm, 3.9 mm, 2.1 mm, 0.34 mm, shielded
Number of cores One
Core diameter Diameter of the shield layer (3.9 mm), diameter of the internal
insulation layer (2.1 mm), diameter of the internal conductor (0.34
mm)
Length 10 m
Fireproof class CM
8.8 E1 Cables
E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment
and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel.
8.8.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment

An E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to directly
receive E1 signals from or transmits E1 signals to external equipment.
Each E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment can transmit a maximum of 16 E1
signals. There are two types of E1 cables that are connected to the external equipment: 75-ohm
coaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair cables.

Cable Diagram
Figure 8-12 E1 cable connected to the external equipment
Main label
1
W
X1 A
ViewA Pos.96
Cable connector, Anea,
96-pin,female
Pos.1
1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female
NOTE
l A 120-ohm E1 cable and a 75-ohm E1 cable have the same appearance.

l The core diameter of a 75-ohm E1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use a crimping tool with an opening of
2.5 mm (0.098-inch) to attach the end of the 75-ohm E1 cable on the DDF frame with a 75-1-1 coaxial
connector.
Pin Assignments
Table 8-5 Pin assignments for a 75-ohm E1 cable
Pin W Remark Pin W Remark

s s
Core Serial Core Serial
No. No.
1 Tip 1 R0 25 Tip 2 T0
2 Ring 26 Ring
3 Tip 3 R1 27 Tip 4 T1
4 Ring 28 Ring
5 Tip 5 R2 29 Tip 6 T2
6 Ring 30 Ring
7 Tip 7 R3 31 Tip 8 T3

Pin W Remark Pin W Remark

s s
Core Serial Core Serial
No. No.
8 Ring 32 Ring
9 Tip 9 R4 33 Tip 10 T4
10 Ring 34 Ring
11 Tip 11 R5 35 Tip 12 T5
12 Ring 36 Ring
13 Tip 13 R6 37 Tip 14 T6
14 Ring 38 Ring
15 Tip 15 R7 39 Tip 16 T7
16 Ring 40 Ring
18 Ring 17 R8 42 Ring 18 T8
17 Tip 41 Tip
20 Ring 19 R9 44 Ring 20 T9
19 Tip 43 Tip
22 Ring 21 R10 46 Ring 22 T10
21 Tip 45 Tip
24 Ring 23 R11 48 Ring 24 T11
23 Tip 47 Tip
50 Ring 25 R12 74 Ring 26 T12
49 Tip 73 Tip
52 Ring 27 R13 76 Ring 28 T13
51 Tip 75 Tip
54 Ring 29 R14 78 Ring 30 T14
53 Tip 75 Tip
56 Ring 31 R15 80 Ring 32 T15
55 Tip 79 Tip
Shell Braid Shell Braid

Table 8-6 Pin assignments for a 120-ohm E1 cable
Pin W Rema Tape Pin W Rema Tape

rks Color rks Color
Color Relati Color Relati
of the onshi of the onshi
Core p Core p
1 White Twiste R0 Blue 25 White Twiste T0 Blue

d pair d pair
2 Blue 26 Orang
e
3 White Twiste R1 27 White Twiste T1

d pair d pair
4 Green 28 Brown
5 White Twiste R2 29 Red Twiste T2

d pair d pair
6 Gray 30 Blue
7 Red Twiste R3 31 Red Twiste T3

d pair d pair
8 Orang 32 Green
e

d pair d pair
10 Brown 34 Gray
11 Black Twiste R5 35 Black Twiste T5

d pair d pair
12 Blue 36 Orang
e

d pair d pair
14 Green 38 Brown
15 Black Twiste R7 39 Yello Twiste T7

d pair w d pair
16 Gray 40 Blue
17 White Twiste R8 Orang 41 White Twiste T8 Orang

d pair e d pair e
18 Blue 42 Orang
e
19 White Twiste R9 43 White Twiste T9

d pair d pair
20 Green 44 Brown
21 White Twiste R10 45 Red Twiste T10

d pair d pair
22 Gray 46 Blue

d pair d pair

Pin W Rema Tape Pin W Rema Tape

rks Color rks Color
Color Relati Color Relati
of the onshi of the onshi
Core p Core p
24 Orang 48 Green
e

d pair d pair
50 Brown 74 Gray

d pair d pair
52 Blue 76 Orang
e

d pair d pair
54 Green 78 Brown
55 Black Twiste R15 79 Yello Twiste T15

d pair w d pair
56 Gray 80 Blue
8.8.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel

An E1 cable that is connected to the E1 panel is used when the E1 panel functions as a DDF.
One end of the E1 cable has an Anea 96 connector that is connected to an E1 port on the IDU.
The other end of the E1 cable has a DB37 connector that is connected to the E1 panel.
Each E1 cable can transmit 16 E1 signals. The port impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.

Cable Diagram
Figure 8-13 E1 cable connected to the E1 panel
X1: Cable connector, Anea 96, female X2/X3: Cable connector, type D, 37 male
Label 1: "CHAN 0-7" Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"
Pin Assignments
Table 8-7 Pin assignments for the E1 cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB37
connector
Wire Connecto Connecto Remarks Connecto Connecto Remarks

r X1 r X2/X3 r X1 r X2/X3
W1 X1.2 X2.20 R0 X1.10 X2.36 R4
X1.1 X2.2 X1.9 X2.17
X1.26 X2.21 T0 X1.34 X2.35 T4
X1.25 X2.3 X1.33 X2.16
X1.4 X2.22 R1 X1.12 X2.34 R5
X1.3 X2.4 X1.11 X2.15
X1.28 X2.23 T1 X1.36 X2.33 T5
X1.27 X2.5 X1.35 X2.14

Wire Connecto Connecto Remarks Connecto Connecto Remarks

r X1 r X2/X3 r X1 r X2/X3
X1.6 X2.24 R2 X1.14 X2.32 R6
X1.5 X2.6 X1.13 X2.13
X1.30 X2.25 T2 X1.38 X2.31 T6
X1.29 X2.7 X1.37 X2.12
X1.8 X2.26 R3 X1.16 X2.30 R7
X1.7 X2.8 X1.15 X2.11
X1.32 X2.27 T3 X1.40 X2.29 T7
X1.31 X2.9 X1.39 X2.10
W2 X1.18 X3.20 R8 X1.50 X3.36 R12
X1.17 X3.2 X1.49 X3.17
X1.42 X3.21 T8 X1.74 X3.35 T12
X1.41 X3.3 X1.73 X3.16
X1.20 X3.22 R9 X1.52 X3.34 R13
X1.19 X3.4 X1.51 X3.15
X1.44 X3.23 T9 X1.76 X3.33 T13
X1.43 X3.5 X1.75 X3.14
X1.22 X3.24 R10 X1.54 X3.32 R14
X1.21 X3.6 X1.53 X3.13
X1.46 X3.25 T10 X1.78 X3.31 T14
X1.45 X3.7 X1.77 X3.12
X1.24 X3.26 R11 X1.56 X3.30 R15
X1.23 X3.8 X1.55 X3.11
X1.48 X3.27 T11 X1.80 X3.29 T15
X1.47 X3.9 X1.79 X3.10
8.9 Orderwire Cable

An orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire
cable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the

PHONE port on the AUX. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the port of the
orderwire phone.
Cable Diagram
Figure 8-14 Orderwire cable

1 Main label
6 6
1 1
X1 X2
1. Orderwire port, RJ11 connector
Pin Assignments
Table 8-8 Pin assignments for the orderwire cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Function
X1.3 X2.3 Tip
X1.4 X2.4 Ring
8.10 Network Cable

A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are
terminated with an RJ45 connector.
Two types of interfaces use RJ45 connectors, which are medium dependent interfaces (MDIs)
and MDI-Xs. MDIs are used by terminal equipment, for example, network card. The pin
assignments for MDIs are provided in Table 8-9. MDI-Xs are used by network equipment. The
pin assignments for MDI-Xs are provided in Table 8-10.
Table 8-9 Pin assignments for MDIs

(+)

(-)


(+)

(+)

(-)

(-)

(+)

(-)
Table 8-10 Pin assignments for MDI-Xs

(+)

(-)

(+)

(+)

(-)

(-)

(+)

(-)

Straight-through cables are used between MDIs and MDI-Xs, and crossover cables are used
between MDIs or between MDI-Xs. The only difference between straight-through cables and
crossover cables is with regard to the pin assignment.
The NMS/COM port, NE cascading port, and Ethernet electrical service ports of the OptiX RTN
980L support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. Straight-through cables and
crossover cables can be used to connect the NMS/COM port, EXT port, and Ethernet electrical
service ports to MDIs or MDI-Xs.
Cable Diagram
Figure 8-15 Network cable

1
Label 1 Main label Label 2
8 8
1 1
1. Network port connector, RJ45
Pin Assignments
Table 8-11 Pin assignments for the straight-through cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation
X1.1 X2.1 White/Orange Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
Table 8-12 Pin assignments for the crossover cable
X1.1 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.6 Green
X1.3 X2.1 White/Orange Twisted pair
X1.6 X2.2 Orange
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown

Hardware Description A Glossary
A Glossary
Numerics
3G See 3rd Generation.
3GPP 3rd Generation Partnership Project
3rd Generation (3G) The third generation of digital wireless technology, as defined by the International
Telecommunications Union (ITU). Third generation technology is expected to deliver
data transmission speeds between 144 kbit/s and 2 Mbit/s, compared to the 9.6 kbit/s to
19.2 kbit/s offered by second generation technology.
802.1Q in 802.1Q A VLAN feature that allows the equipment to add a VLAN tag to a tagged frame. The
(QinQ) implementation of QinQ is to add a public VLAN tag to a frame with a private VLAN
tag to allow the frame with double VLAN tags to be transmitted over the service
provider's backbone network based on the public VLAN tag. This provides a layer 2
VPN tunnel for customers and enables transparent transmission of packets over private
VLANs.
A
A/D analog/digit
ABR See available bit rate.
ACAP See adjacent channel alternate polarization.
ACL See access control list.
ADC analog to digital converter
ADM add/drop multiplexer
AF See assured forwarding.
AIS alarm indication signal
ALS See automatic laser shutdown.
AM See adaptive modulation.
APS automatic protection switching
ARP See Address Resolution Protocol.

ASBR See autonomous system boundary router.

ASIC See application-specific integrated circuit.
ATM asynchronous transfer mode
ATPC See automatic transmit power control.
AU See administrative unit.
Address Resolution An Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. The ARP protocol
Protocol (ARP) enables hosts and routers to determine link layer addresses through ARP requests and
responses. The address resolution is a process by which the host converts the target IP
address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of
ARP is to use the target equipment's IP address to query its MAC address.
access control list A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to access a
(ACL) resource.
adaptive modulation A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode according to the
(AM) channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment uses a high-
efficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum
utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment uses the
low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the link
that carries high-priority services.
adjacent channel A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal
alternate polarization polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.
(ACAP)
administrative unit The information structure that enables adaptation between the higher order path layer
(AU) and the multiplex section layer. The administrative unit consists of an information
payload (the higher order VC) and an AU pointer, which indicates the offset of the
payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start.
alarm suppression A method to suppress alarms for the alarm management purpose. Alarms that are
suppressed are no longer reported from NEs.
analog signal A signal in which information is represented with a continuously variable physical
quantity, such as voltage. Because of this constant changing of the wave shape with
regard to its passing a given point in time or space, an analog signal might have a virtually
indefinite number of states or values. This contrasts with a digital signal that is expressed
as a square wave and therefore has a very limited number of discrete states. Analog
signals, with complicated structures and narrow bandwidth, are vulnerable to external
interference.
application-specific A special type of chip that starts out as a nonspecific collection of logic gates. Late in
integrated circuit the manufacturing process, a layer is added to connect the gates for a specific function.
(ASIC) By changing the pattern of connections, the manufacturer can make the chip suitable for
many needs.
assured forwarding One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF.
(AF) It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay.
For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that
exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the
traffic instead of discarding the packets.

attenuator A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used to
ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong.
automatic laser A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters
shutdown (ALS) and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic transmit A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected
power control (ATPC) at the receiver
autonomous system A router that exchanges routing information with other ASs.
boundary router
(ASBR)
available bit rate (ABR) A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible
forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time
quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.
B
B-ISDN See broadband integrated services digital network.
BDI See backward defect indication.
BE See best effort.
BER bit error rate
BFD See Bidirectional Forwarding Detection.
BGP Border Gateway Protocol
BIOS See basic input/output system.
BIP See bit interleaved parity.
BPDU See bridge protocol data unit.
BSC See base station controller.
BTS base transceiver station
Bidirectional A fast and independent hello protocol that delivers millisecond-level link failure
Forwarding Detection detection and provides carrier-class availability. After sessions are established between
(BFD) neighboring systems, the systems can periodically send BFD packets to each other. If
one system fails to receive a BFD packet within the negotiated period, the system regards
that the bidirectional link fails and instructs the upper layer protocol to take actions to
recover the faulty link.
backbone network A network that forms the central interconnection for a connected network. The
communication backbone for a country is WAN. The backbone network is an important
architectural element for building enterprise networks. It provides a path for the exchange
of information between different LANs or subnetworks. A backbone can tie together
diverse networks in the same building, in different buildings in a campus environment,
or over wide areas. Generally, the backbone network's capacity is greater than the
networks connected to it.
backward defect A function that the sink node of a LSP, when detecting a defect, uses to inform the
indication (BDI) upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.

base station controller A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM/CDMA network. It
(BSC) interworks with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface.
It provides the following functions: radio resource management, base station
management, power control, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC
controls and manages one or more BTSs in an actual network.
basic input/output Firmware stored on the computer motherboard that contains basic input/output control
system (BIOS) programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting
information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.
baud rate The number of times per second the signal can change on a transmission line. Commonly,
the transmission line uses only two signal states, making the baud rate equal to the
number of bits per second that can be transferred. The underlying transmission technique
may use some of the bandwidth, so it may not be the case that user data transfers at the
line's specified bit rate.
best effort (BE) A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded
following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the
network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time
it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss
ratio, and high reliability.
bit interleaved parity A method of error monitoring. With even parity, the transmitting equipment generates
(BIP) an X-bit code over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of
the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered
portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit
sequences within the specified portion, and so forth. Even parity is generated by setting
the BIP-X bits so that an even number of 1s exist in each monitored partition of the
signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits in the same bit position within the X-bit
sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIP-X.
bridge A device that connects two or more networks and forwards packets among them. Bridges
operate at the physical network level. Bridges differ from repeaters because bridges store
and forward complete packets, while repeaters forward all electrical signals. Bridges
differ from routers because bridges use physical addresses, while routers use IP
addresses.
bridge protocol data Data messages exchanged across switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning
unit (BPDU) tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses,
priorities, and costs, and they ensure that the data reaches its intended destination. BPDU
messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. These
loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridge interfaces and placing
redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
broadband integrated A standard defined by the ITU-T to handle high-bandwidth applications, such as voice.
services digital network It currently uses the ATM technology to transmit data over SONNET-based circuits at
(B-ISDN) 155 to 622 Mbit/s or higher speed.
broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is
determined by the broadcast address.
broadcast domain A group of network stations that receives broadcast packets originating from any device
within the group. The broadcast domain also refers to the set of ports between which a
device forwards a multicast, broadcast, or unknown destination frame.

C
CAR committed access rate
CBR See constant bit rate.
CBS See committed burst size.
CC See continuity check.
CCDP See co-channel dual polarization.
CDMA See Code Division Multiple Access.
CE See customer edge.
CES See circuit emulation service.
CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol
CIST See Common and Internal Spanning Tree.
CLNP connectionless network protocol
CM connection management
CORBA See Common Object Request Broker Architecture.
CPU See central processing unit.
CRC See cyclic redundancy check.
CSES consecutive severely errored second
CSMA/CD See carrier sense multiple access with collision detection.
CTC common transmit clock
CW control word
Code Division Multiple A communication scheme that uses frequency expansion technology to form different
Access (CDMA) code sequences. When the CDMA scheme is used, subscribers with different addresses
can use different code sequences for multi-address connection.
Common Object A specification developed by the Object Management Group in 1992 in which pieces of
Request Broker programs (objects) communicate with other objects in other programs, even if the two
Architecture (CORBA) programs are written in different programming languages and are running on different
platforms. A program makes its request for objects through an object request broker, or
ORB, and therefore does not need to know the structure of the program from which the
object comes. CORBA is designed to work in object-oriented environments.
Common and Internal The single spanning tree jointly calculated by STP and RSTP, the logical connectivity
Spanning Tree (CIST) using MST bridges and regions, and MSTP. The CIST ensures that all LANs in the
bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
cable tie A tie used to bind cables.

carrier sense multiple Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) is a computer
access with collision networking access method in which:
detection (CSMA/CD)
l A carrier sensing scheme is used.
l A transmitting data station that detects another signal while transmitting a frame,
stops transmitting that frame, transmits a jam signal, and then waits for a random
time interval before trying to send that frame again.
central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets
(CPU) and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute
instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's
main data-transfer path, the bus.
channel A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or speed between two or more
locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio (microwave),
fiber, or any combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted per second
in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per second. For
example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s), and Tb/s
(1012 bit/s).
circuit emulation A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the
service (CES) transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM
cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the
interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES
technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original
sequence at the reception end.
clock tracing The method of keeping the time on each node synchronized with a clock source in the
network.
co-channel dual A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical
polarization (CCDP) polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization has twice
the transmission capacity of the single polarization.
committed burst size A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst
(CBS) IP packet size when information is transferred at the committed information rate. This
parameter must be greater than 0 but should be not less than the maximum length of an
IP packet to be forwarded.
constant bit rate (CBR) A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on
the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise
clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
continuity check (CC) An Ethernet connectivity fault management (CFM) method used to detect the
connectivity between MEPs by having each MEP periodically transmit a Continuity
Check Message (CCM).
cross polarization A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminate
interference the cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP.
cancellation (XPIC)
customer edge (CE) A part of the BGP/MPLS IP VPN model that provides interfaces for directly connecting
to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.

cyclic redundancy A procedure used to check for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a
check (CRC) complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before performing the transmission and includes the
generated number in the packet it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device
then repeats the same calculation. If both devices obtain the same result, the transmission
is considered to be error free. This procedure is known as a redundancy check because
each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
D
DC direct current
DC-C See DC-return common (with ground).
DC-I See DC-return isolate (with ground).
DC-return common A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
(with ground) (DC-C) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between
the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-return isolate (with A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
ground) (DC-I) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND
on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DCC See data communications channel.
DCN See data communication network.
DDF digital distribution frame
DDN See digital data network.
DE discard eligible
DM See delay measurement.
DS boundary node A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in a
domain that is not DS-capable.
DS interior node A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node.
DS node A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node.
DSCP See differentiated services code point.
DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol.
DiffServ See Differentiated Services.
Differentiated Services An IETF standard that defines a mechanism for controlling and forwarding traffic in a
(DiffServ) differentiated manner based on CoS settings to handle network congestion.
Distance Vector An Internet gateway protocol based primarily on the RIP. The DVMRP protocol
Multicast Routing implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution and uses IGMP to exchange
Protocol (DVMRP) routing datagrams with its neighbors.
data communication A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the data
network (DCN) communication function.

data communications The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to
channel (DCC) transmit information on the operation, management, maintenance, and provisioning
(OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channel composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as
the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel composed of bytes D4-D12 is
referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
delay measurement The time elapsed since the start of transmission of the first bit of the frame by a source
(DM) node until the reception of the last bit of the loopbacked frame by the same source node,
when the loopback is performed at the frame's destination node.
differentiated services According to the QoS classification standard of the Differentiated Service (Diff-Serv),
code point (DSCP) the type of services (ToS) field in the IP header consists of six most significant bits and
two currently unused bits, which are used to form codes for priority marking.
Differentiated services code point (DSCP) is the six most important bits in the ToS. It is
the combination of IP precedence and types of service. The DSCP value is used to ensure
that routers supporting only IP precedence can be used because the DSCP value is
compatible with IP precedence. Each DSCP maps a per-hop behavior (PHB). Therefore,
terminal devices can identify traffic using the DSCP value.
digital data network A data transmission network that is designed to transmit data on digital channels (such
(DDN) as the fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel).
digital modulation A method that controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the carrier
based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the information can
be transmitted by the carrier.
dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to simultaneously radiate or receive two independent radio waves
orthogonally polarized.
E
E-Aggr See Ethernet aggregation.
E-LAN See Ethernet local area network.
E-Line See Ethernet line.
ECC See embedded control channel.
EMC See electromagnetic compatibility.
EMI See electromagnetic interference.
EPL See Ethernet private line.
EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service.
EPLD See erasable programmable logic device.
ERPS Ethernet ring protection switching
ESD electrostatic discharge
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
EVPL See Ethernet virtual private line.
EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service.

Ethernet A LAN technology that uses the carrier sense multiple access with collision detection
(CSMA/CD) media access control method. The Ethernet network is highly reliable and
easy to maintain. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000
Mbit/s, or 10,000 Mbit/s.
Ethernet aggregation A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
(E-Aggr) connection).
Ethernet line (E-Line) A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).
Ethernet local area A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet
network (E-LAN) virtual connection).
Ethernet private LAN A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
service (EPLAN) networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between multipoint-to-
multipoint connections.
Ethernet private line A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
(EPL) networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between point-to-point
connections.
Ethernet virtual A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
private LAN service networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between multipoint-to-
(EVPLAN) multipoint connections.
Ethernet virtual A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
private line (EVPL) networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between point-to-point
connections.
European A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
Telecommunications
Standards Institute
(ETSI)
electromagnetic A condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its
compatibility (EMC) individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without
causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic
interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
electromagnetic Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or
interference (EMI) limits the performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
embedded control A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer
channel (ECC) to enable the transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)
information between NEs.
engineering label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.
erasable A logic array device which can be used to implement the required functions by
programmable logic programming the array. In addition, a user can modify and program the array repeatedly
device (EPLD) until the program meets the requirement.
F
FD See frequency diversity.
FDDI See fiber distributed data interface.

FDI See forward defect indication.

FEC See forward error correction.
FFD fast failure detection
FFD packet A path failure detection method independent from CV. Different from a CV packet, the
frequency for generating FFD packets is configurable to satisfy different service
requirements. By default, the frequency is 20/s. An FFD packet contains information the
same as that in a CV packet. The destination end LSR processes FFD packets in the same
way for processing CV packets.
FIFO See first in first out.
FPGA See field programmable gate array.
FTP File Transfer Protocol
fiber distributed data A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-
interface (FDDI) speed fiber-optic LANs. FDDI provides specifications for transmission rates of 100
megabits per second on token ring networks.
field programmable A semi-customized circuit that is used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit
gate array (FPGA) (ASIC) field and developed based on programmable components. FPGA remedies many
of the deficiencies of customized circuits, and allows the use of many more gate arrays.
first in first out (FIFO) A stack management method in which data that is stored first in a queue is also read and
invoked first.
forward defect A packet generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that first
indication (FDI) detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its location. Its
primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level client LSPs
and (in turn) their client layers.
forward error A bit error correction technology that adds correction information to the payload at the
correction (FEC) transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission can be corrected at the receive end.
fragmentation A process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network node
that does not support the original size of the packet.
frequency diversity A diversity scheme in which two or more microwave frequencies with a certain
(FD) frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then
performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.
G
GCRA generic cell rate algorithm
GFC generic flow control
GFP See Generic Framing Procedure.
GNE See gateway network element.
GPS See Global Positioning System.
GTS See generic traffic shaping.
GUI graphical user interface

Generic Framing A framing and encapsulated method that can be applied to any data type. GFP is defined
Procedure (GFP) by ITU-T G.7041.
Global Positioning A global navigation satellite system that provides reliable positioning, navigation, and
System (GPS) timing services to users worldwide.
gateway A device that connects two network segments using different protocols. It is used to
translate the data in the two network segments.
gateway network An NE that serves as a gateway for other NEs to communicate with a network
element (GNE) management system.
generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that proactively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This is
(GTS) to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router
to avoid packet discarding and congestion.
H
HDLC High-Level Data Link Control
HQoS See hierarchical quality of service.
HSDPA See High Speed Downlink Packet Access.
HSM hitless switch mode
High Speed Downlink A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement
Packet Access for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the
(HSDPA) maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the
WCDMA network topology.
hierarchical quality of A type of QoS that controls the traffic of users and performs the scheduling according
service (HQoS) to the priority of user services. HQoS has an advanced traffic statistics function, and the
administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidth
can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis.
hybrid radio The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supports
the AM function.
I
I/O input/output
ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol.
IDU See indoor unit.
IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
IF See intermediate frequency.
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol.
IGMP snooping A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages
and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyzing Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) packets between hosts and Layer 3 devices. In this
manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
IGP See Interior Gateway Protocol.

IMA See inverse multiplexing over ATM.

IP Internet Protocol
IPv4 See Internet Protocol version 4.
IPv6 See Internet Protocol version 6.
IS-IS See Intermediate System to Intermediate System.
ISDN integrated services digital network
ISO International Organization for Standardization
IST internal spanning tree
ITU See International Telecommunication Union.
IWF Interworking Function
Institute of Electrical A professional association of electrical and electronics engineers based in the United
and Electronics States, but with membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on
Engineers (IEEE) electrical, electronics, and computer engineering, and produces many important
technology standards.
Interior Gateway A routing protocol that is used within an autonomous system. The IGP runs in small-
Protocol (IGP) sized and medium-sized networks. The commonly used IGPs are the routing information
protocol (RIP), the interior gateway routing protocol (IGRP), the enhanced IGRP
(EIGRP), and the open shortest path first (OSPF).
Intermediate System to A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward
Intermediate System datagram or packets through a packet-based network.
(IS-IS)
International A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendation
Telecommunication bodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) and
Union (ITU) radio networks (ITU-R).
Internet Control A network layer protocol that provides message control and error reporting between a
Message Protocol host server and an Internet gateway.
(ICMP)
Internet Group One of the TCP/IP protocols for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast
Management Protocol groups. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain
(IGMP) multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol The current version of the Internet Protocol (IP). IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address which is
version 4 (IPv4) assigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C, D, or E) and is
written as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from 0.0.0.0 through to
255.255.255.255. Each IPv4 address consists of a network number, an optional
subnetwork number, and a host number. The network and subnetwork numbers together
are used for routing, and the host number is used to address an individual host within the
network or subnetwork.
Internet Protocol An update version of IPv4, which is designed by the Internet Engineering Task Force
version 6 (IPv6) (IETF) and is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). It is a new version of the Internet
Protocol. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while
an IPv6 address has 128 bits.

indoor unit (IDU) The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing,
multiplexing/demultiplexing, and intermediate frequency (IF) processing for services.
intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF
(IF) signal.
inverse multiplexing A technique that involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a
over ATM (IMA) cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate
is approximately the sum of the link rates.
L
L2VPN Layer 2 virtual private network
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol.
LAG See link aggregation group.
LAN See local area network.
LAPS Link Access Protocol-SDH
LB See loopback.
LCAS See link capacity adjustment scheme.
LM See loss measurement.
LOS See loss of signal.
LPT link-state pass through
LSDB link state database
LSP See label switched path.
LSP tunnel An LSP over which traffic is transmitted based on labels that are assigned to FECs on
the ingress. The traffic is transparent to the intermediate nodes
LSR See label switching router.
LTE Long Term Evolution
Layer 2 switching A data forwarding method. In a LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch
transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address
is at the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called Layer 2
switching.
Link Aggregation A dynamic link aggregation protocol that improves the transmission speed and
Control Protocol reliability. The two ends of the link send LACP packets to inform each other of their
(LACP) parameters and form a logical aggregation link. After the aggregation link is formed,
LACP maintains the link status in real time and dynamically adjusts the ports on the
aggregation link upon detecting the failure of a physical port.
label switched path A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label
(LSP) switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on
common routing mechanisms or through configuration.

label switching router Basic element of an MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is
(LSR) composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for
allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and
removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups
received in the label forwarding table.
laser A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser
light has better coherence than ordinary light. Semi-conductor lasers provide the light
used in a fiber system.
line rate The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals the
maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
(LAG) aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were
a single link.
link capacity LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a
adjustment scheme control mechanism to hitless increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the
(LCAS) bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links
that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation,
increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the
responsibility of the network and element management systems.
local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
(LAN) kilometers or within a single building, featuring high speed and low error rate. Current
LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and run at 1,000
Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
loopback (LB) A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors. The loopback can be a inloop or outloop.
loss measurement (LM) A method used to collect counter values applicable for ingress and egress service frames
where the counters maintain a count of transmitted and received data frames between a
pair of MEPs.
loss of signal (LOS) No transitions occurring in the received signal.
M
MA maintenance association
MAC See Media Access Control.
MADM multiple add/drop multiplexer
MBS maximum burst size
MD See maintenance domain.
MD5 See message digest algorithm 5.
MDI medium dependent interface
MEP maintenance association end point
MIB See management information base.
MIP maintenance intermediate point

MLPPP Multi-Link Point-to-Point Protocol

MP maintenance point
MPLS See Multiprotocol Label Switching.
MPLS L2VPN A network that provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network. In this
case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs of different
media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP.
MPLS TE multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering
MPLS VPN See multiprotocol label switching virtual private network.
MPLS-TP See MultiProtocol Label Switching Transport Profile.
MS multiplex section
MSP See multiplex section protection.
MST region See Multiple Spanning Tree region.
MSTI See multiple spanning tree instance.
MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.
MTBF See mean time between failures.
MTTR See mean time to repair.
MTU See maximum transmission unit.
Media Access Control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the
(MAC) data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting
the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol
checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control
information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are
transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC
protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted
correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control
information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
MultiProtocol Label A packet transport technology proposed by IETF that combines the packet experience
Switching Transport of MPLS with the operational experience of transport networks.
Profile (MPLS-TP)
Multiple Spanning A protocol that can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks
Tree Protocol (MSTP) redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case,
the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The
protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This
solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/
RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
Multiple Spanning A region that consists of switches that support the MSTP in the LAN and links among
Tree region (MST them. Switches physically and directly connected and configured with the same MST
region) region attributes belong to the same MST region.
Multiprotocol Label A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link
Switching (MPLS) layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of
IP routing and control protocols.

maintenance domain The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by connectivity
(MD) fault management (CFM). The devices in a maintenance domain are managed by a single
Internet service provider (ISP).
management A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It
information base (MIB) comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as
routers and switches) in a network.
maximum transmission The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies,
unit (MTU) depending on the network—576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on
Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbit/s token ring. Responsibility for determining the
size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted
across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one
that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks
involved.
mean time between The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure
failures (MTBF) of the reliability of the system.
mean time to repair The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
(MTTR)
message digest A hash function that is used in a variety of security applications to check message
algorithm 5 (MD5) integrity. MD5 processes a variable-length message into a fixed-length output of 128
bits. It breaks up an input message into 512-bit blocks (sixteen 32-bit little-endian
integers). After a series of processing, the output consists of four 32-bit words, which
are then cascaded into a 128-bit hash number.
multicast A process of transmitting data packets from one source to many destinations. The
destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address
ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast
group rather than a host.
multiple spanning tree A type of spanning trees calculated by MSTP within an MST Region, to provide a simply
instance (MSTI) and fully connected active topology for frames classified as belonging to a VLAN that
is mapped to the MSTI by the MST Configuration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to
multiple MSTIs.
multiplex section A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and
protection (MSP) including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a
"protection" channel.
multiprotocol label An Internet Protocol (IP) virtual private network (VPN) based on the multiprotocol label
switching virtual switching (MPLS) technology. It applies the MPLS technology for network routers and
private network switches, simplifies the routing mode of core routers, and combines traditional routing
(MPLS VPN) technology and label switching technology. It can be used to construct the broadband
Intranet and Extranet to meet various service requirements.
N
N+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection
channel.
NE network element

NE Explorer The main operation interface of the NMS, which is used to manage the
telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, a user can query, manage, and
maintain NEs, boards, and ports.
NNI network-to-network interface
NPE network provider edge
NSAP See network service access point.
NSF non-stop forwarding
network service access A network address defined by ISO, at which the OSI Network Service is made available
point (NSAP) to a Network service user by the Network service provider.
network storm A phenomenon that occurs during data communication. To be specific, mass broadcast
packets are transmitted in a short time; the network is congested; transmission quality
and availability of the network decrease rapidly. The network storm is caused by network
connection or configuration problems.
node A managed device in the network. For a device with a single frame, one node stands for
one device. For a device with multiple frames, one node stands for one frame of the
device.
non-GNE See non-gateway network element.
non-gateway network A network element that communicates with the NM application layer through the
element (non-GNE) gateway NE application layer.
O
O&M operation and maintenance
OAM See operation, administration and maintenance.
OAMPDU operation, administration and maintenance protocol data unit
ODF optical distribution frame
ODU See outdoor unit.
OSPF See Open Shortest Path First.
Open Shortest Path A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing that uses
First (OSPF) cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology,
which is identical on all routers in the area.
operation, A set of network management functions that cover fault detection, notification, location,
administration and and repair.
maintenance (OAM)
orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or
maintenance engineers of different stations.
outdoor unit (ODU) The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency
conversion and amplification for radio frequency (RF) signals.
P
P2P See point-to-point service.

PBS See peak burst size.

PCB See printed circuit board.
PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy.
PDU protocol data unit
PE See provider edge.
PHB See per-hop behavior.
PIR peak information rate
PLA See physical link aggregation.
PLL See phase-locked loop.
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence.
PRI primary rate interface
PSN See packet switched network.
PSTN See public switched telephone network.
PTN packet transport network
PTP Precision Time Protocol
PTP clock See Precision Time Protocol clock.
PVP See permanent virtual path.
PW See pseudo wire.
PWE3 See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge.
Precision Time A type of high-decision clock defined by the IEEE 1588 V2 standard. The IEEE 1588
Protocol clock (PTP V2 standard specifies the precision time protocol (PTP) in a measurement and control
clock) system. The PTP protocol ensures clock synchronization precise to sub-microseconds.
packet switched A telecommunications network that works in packet switching mode.
network (PSN)
paired slots Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the
backplane.
peak burst size (PBS) A parameter that defines the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst IP
packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate.
per-hop behavior IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop
(PHB) behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should
select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF
defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF),
assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).
permanent virtual path Virtual path that consists of PVCs.
(PVP)

phase-locked loop A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector that compares the frequency of a
(PLL) voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or reference-
frequency generator. The output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop filter,
is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with the
incoming or reference frequency.
physical link Being a technology providing load balancing based on physical layer bandwidths,
aggregation (PLA) physical link aggregation (PLA) combines Ethernet transmission paths in several
Integrated IP radio links into a logical Ethernet link for higher Ethernet bandwidth and
Ethernet transmission reliability.
plesiochronous digital A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum
hierarchy (PDH) rate 64 kit/s into rates of 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s.
point-to-point service A service between two terminal users. In P2P services, senders and recipients are
(P2P) terminal users.
polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or
rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is
perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically
polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the
plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the
tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this
electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.
printed circuit board A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components
(PCB) using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto
a non-conductive substrate.
provider edge (PE) A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is
responsible for managing VPN users, establishing LSPs between PEs, and exchanging
routing information between sites of the same VPN. A PE performs the mapping and
forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can be
a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in the sense that the value of each element is independent of
sequence (PRBS) the values of any of the other elements, similar to a real random sequence.
pseudo wire (PW) An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established
and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is
maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
pseudo wire emulation An end-to-end Layer 2 transmission technology. It emulates the essential attributes of a
edge-to-edge (PWE3) telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a packet switched network
(PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed time division
multiplexing (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real
situation.
public switched A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the public
telephone network subscribers. Sometimes it is called POTS.
(PSTN)
Q
QPSK See quadrature phase shift keying.
QinQ See 802.1Q in 802.1Q.

QoS See quality of service.

quadrature phase shift A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and
keying (QPSK) the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period
or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are
evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform two-
bit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER.
quality of service (QoS) A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.
Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss
ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the
transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a
service provider to meet the demands of users.
R
RADIUS See Remote Authentication Dial In User Service.
RADIUS accounting An accounting mode in which the BRAS sends the accounting packets to the RADIUS
server. Then the RADIUS server performs accounting.
RDI remote defect indication
RED See random early detection.
REI remote error indication
RF See radio frequency.
RFC See Request For Comments.
RMEP remote maintenance association end point
RMON remote network monitoring
RNC See radio network controller.
RSL See received signal level.
RSSI See received signal strength indicator.
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol.
RTN radio transmission node
RTSP Real-Time Streaming Protocol
Rapid Spanning Tree An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) that provides faster spanning tree
Protocol (RSTP) convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
Remote Authentication A security service that authenticates and authorizes dial-up users and is a centralized
Dial In User Service access control mechanism. RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) as its
(RADIUS) transmission protocol to ensure real-time quality. RADIUS also supports the
retransmission and multi-server mechanisms to ensure good reliability.

Request For Comments A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to the
(RFC) operation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control of
the IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sources
such as InterNIC.
Resource Reservation A protocol that reserves resources on every node along a path. RSVP is designed for an
Protocol (RSVP) integrated services Internet.
RoHS restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances
radio frequency (RF) A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an
electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave.
The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC
with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified
into such high-frequency current.
radio network A device in a radio network subsystem that is in charge of controlling the usage and
controller (RNC) integrity of radio resources.
random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according
(RED) to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization
resulting from traditional tail drop can be prevented.
real-time variable bit A parameter intended for real-time applications, such as compressed voice over IP
rate (rt-VBR) (VoIP) and video conferencing. The rt-VBR is characterized by a peak cell rate (PCR),
sustained cell rate (SCR), and maximum burst size (MBS). You can expect the source
device to transmit in bursts and at a rate that varies with time.
received signal level The signal level at a receiver input terminal.
(RSL)
received signal strength The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the
indicator (RSSI) receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD
within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna
receiver sensitivity The minimum acceptable value of mean received power at point Rn (a reference point
at an input to a receiver optical connector) to achieve a 1x10-12 BER when the FEC is
enabled.
regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes,
waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.
route The path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. Routes can change
dynamically.
router A device on the network layer that selects routes in the network. The router selects the
optimal route according to the destination address of the received packet through a
network and forwards the packet to the next router. The last router is responsible for
sending the packet to the destination host. Can be used to connect a LAN to a LAN, a
WAN to a WAN, or a LAN to the Internet.
rt-VBR See real-time variable bit rate.
S
SAI service area identifier
SAToP Structure-Agnostic Time Division Multiplexing over Packet

SCSI Small Computer System Interface

SD See space diversity.
SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy.
SEC security screening
SES severely errored second
SETS SDH equipment timing source
SF See signal fail.
SFP small form-factor pluggable
SLA See service level agreement.
SNCP subnetwork connection protection
SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol.
SNR See signal-to-noise ratio.
SSL See Secure Sockets Layer.
SSM See Synchronization Status Message.
STM See synchronous transport module.
STM-1 See Synchronous Transport Module level 1.
STM-4 Synchronous Transport Module level 4
STM-N Synchronous Transport Module level N
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
Secure Sockets Layer A security protocol that works at a socket level. This layer exists between the TCP layer
(SSL) and the application layer to encrypt/decode data and authenticate concerned entities.
Simple Network A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify
Management Protocol the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the
(SNMP) transmission of management information between any two points. The polling
mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which
can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the
network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control
information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
Synchronization Status A message that carries the quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.
Message (SSM) SSM messages provide upstream clock information to nodes on an SDH network or
synchronization network.
Synchronous Synchronous transfer mode at 155 Mbit/s.
Transport Module level
1 (STM-1)
service level agreement A service agreement between a customer and a service provider. SLA specifies the
(SLA) service level for a customer. The customer can be a user organization (source domain)
or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). An SLA may include
traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement as a whole
or partially.

signal fail (SF) A signal indicating that associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect
condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
signal-to-noise ratio The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a
(SNR) given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and
is usually expressed in dB.
single-ended switching A protection mechanism that takes switching action only at the affected end of the
protected entity in the case of a unidirectional failure.
single-polarized An antenna intended to radiate or receive radio waves with only one specified
antenna polarization.
space diversity (SD) A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distance
to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two
signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.
subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are
destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the device and is matched
with the IP address.
synchronous digital A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. SDH defines the
hierarchy (SDH) transmission features of digital signals, such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-
ISDN.
synchronous transport An information structure used to support section layer connections in the SDH. It consists
module (STM) of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields organized in a
block frame structure which repeats every 125. The information is suitably conditioned
for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronized to the
network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Higher
capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacities
for N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.
T
T1 A North American standard for high-speed data transmission at 1.544Mbps. It provides
24 x 64 kbit/s channels.
TCI tag control information
TCP See Transmission Control Protocol.
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TD-SCDMA See Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access.
TDD time division duplex
TDM See time division multiplexing.
TDMA See Time Division Multiple Access.
TE See traffic engineering.
TEDB See traffic engineering database.
TIM trace identifier mismatch
TMN See telecommunications management network.

TOS test operation system

TTL See time to live.
TUG tributary unit group
Telnet A standard terminal emulation protocol in the TCP/IP protocol stack. Telnet allows users
to log in to remote systems and use resources as if they were connected to a local system.
Telnet is defined in RFC 854.
Time Division Multiple An approach used for allocating a single channel among many users, by dividing the
Access (TDMA) channel into different timeslots during which each user has access to the medium.
Time Division- A 3G mobile communications standard found in UMTS mobile telecommunications
Synchronous Code networks in China as an alternative to W-CDMA. TD-SCDMA integrates technologies
Division Multiple of CDMA, TDMA, and FDMA, and makes use of technologies including intelligent
Access (TD-SCDMA) antenna, joint detection, low chip rate (LCR), and adaptive power control. With the
flexibility of service processing, a TD-SCDMA network can connect to other networks
through the RNC.
Transmission Control The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to
Protocol (TCP) be sent using Internet Protocol (IP), and the reassembly and verification of the complete
messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable
in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in
the ISO/OSI reference model.
tail drop A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when
the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide
synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.
tangent ring A concept borrowed from geometry. Two tangent rings have a common node between
them. The common node often leads to single-point failures.
telecommunications A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications
management network network. TMN manages the planning, provisioning, installation, and OAM of
(TMN) equipment, networks, and services.
time division A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots
multiplexing (TDM) (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3…), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots
in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over
one channel.
time to live (TTL) A specified period of time for best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets from
looping endlessly.
trTCM See two rate three color marker.
traffic engineering (TE) A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load
of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management
parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the
utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by
unbalanced loads.
traffic engineering A type of database that every router generates after collecting the information about TE
database (TEDB) of every links in its area. TEDB is the base of forming the dynamic TE path in the MPLS
TE network.

tributary loopback A fault can be located for each service path by performing loopback to each path of the
tributary board. There are three kinds of loopback modes: no loopback, outloop, and
inloop.
tunnel A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs.
In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel
ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel
is an MPLS tunnel.
two rate three color An algorithm that meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates,
marker (trTCM) Peak Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their
associated burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it
exceeds the PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it
exceeds or does not exceed the CIR.
U
UART universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
UAS unavailable second
UBR unspecified bit rate
UBR+ Unspecified Bit Rate Plus
UDP See User Datagram Protocol.
UI user interface
UNI See user-to-network interface.
UPC See usage parameter control.
User Datagram A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a
Protocol (UDP) datagram to an application program on another. UDP uses IP to deliver datagrams. UDP
provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery
service. That is, UDP messages may be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of
order. The destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet
is received.
unicast The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient.
usage parameter During communications, UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on each virtual
control (UPC) circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is exceeded, measures
will be taken to control. NPC is similar to UPC in function. The difference is that the
incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into UPC and NPC according to their
positions. UPC locates at the user/network interface, while NPC at the network interface.
user-to-network The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for
interface (UNI) example, ATM switches).
V
V-NNI virtual network-network interface
V-UNI See virtual user-network interface.
VB virtual bridge

VBR See variable bit rate.

VC See virtual container.
VCC See virtual channel connection.
VCCV virtual circuit connectivity verification
VCG See virtual concatenation group.
VCI virtual channel identifier
VCTRUNK A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal
port of a data service processing board.
VLAN virtual local area network
VPI See virtual path identifier.
VPLS virtual private LAN segment
VPN virtual private network
VSWR voltage standing wave ratio
variable bit rate (VBR) One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a
permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth
and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.
virtual channel A VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A point-
connection (VCC) to-multipoint VCC is a set of ATM virtual connections between two or multiple end
points.
virtual circuit A channel or circuit established between two points on a data communications network
with packet switching. Virtual circuits can be permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) or
switched virtual circuits (SVCs) .
virtual concatenation A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same
group (VCG) virtual concatenation link.
virtual container (VC) An information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. A VC
consists of a payload and path overhead (POH), which are organized in a block frame
structure that repeats every 125 μs or 500 μs.
virtual path identifier The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to which
(VPI) virtual path the cell belongs.
virtual user-network A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service
interface (V-UNI) classification and traffic control in HQoS.
W
WCDMA See Wideband Code Division Multiple Access.
WDM wavelength division multiplexing
WEEE waste electrical and electronic equipment
WFQ See weighted fair queuing.
WRED See weighted random early detection.
WRR weighted round robin

WTR See wait to restore.

Web LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located at the NE
management layer of the transport network.
Wi-Fi See Wireless Fidelity.
Wideband Code A standard defined by the ITU-T for the third-generation wireless technology derived
Division Multiple from the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology.
Access (WCDMA)
Wireless Fidelity (Wi- A short-distant wireless transmission technology. It enables wireless access to the
Fi) Internet within a range of hundreds of feet wide.
wait to restore (WTR) The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.
weighted fair queuing A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This
(WFQ) scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according
to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority
queues can be scheduled.
weighted random early A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP
detection (WRED) synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority
packet when calculating the packet loss ratio.
winding pipe A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.
X
XPIC See cross polarization interference cancellation.


Manual Do Produto 980

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Manual Do Produto 980

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

OptiX RTN 980L Radio Transmission System

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

About This Document

Product Name Version

OptiX RTN 980L V100R007C10

iManager U2000 V200R014C60

l Network planning engineer

l Basics of digital microwave communication

Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation

Calls attention to important information, best

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in

Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Updates in Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Based on Product Version V100R007C10

Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

2.14.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................258

Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

2.18.7 Types of SFP Modules..........................................................................................................................................323

Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x

8.7 STM-1 Cable..............................................................................................................................................................421

Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

About This Chapter

1.1 Network Application

Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

1.1 Network Application

l Large-capacity and long haul trunk transmission

Figure 1-1 OptiX RTN 980L long haul radio solution

l An IDU 980L connects to an RFU through an IF cable.

Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2

Figure 1-2 OptiX RTN 980L long haul system

Table 1-1 Basic information about the IDU 980L

Number of radio directions 1 to 14

RF configuration mode l N+0 non-protection (N ≤ 14)

Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3

Service interface type l E1 interface

Figure 1-3 Appearance of the IDU 980L

Table 1-2 RFU supported by the OptiX RTN 980L

Series type name XMC-LH

Frequency band L6/U6/7/8/11 GHz

Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4

Channel spacing 28/40/56 MHz (U6/8/11 GHz)

Figure 1-4 Appearance of an RFU (in the case of the RFU-SD)

Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5

Figure 1-5 Appearance of a BU (in the case of the BU-SD)

Issue 01 (2014-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6

About This Chapter

2.2 Board List

2.3 Board Appearance

合格证/ QUALIFICATION CARD Qualification Indicates that